i 


ill 


i 


I 


Hi! 


;ii  Wm'\\  i.'ii!!i:'! i,!lli'" 


l!lii 


!!!!!!i!l!!i!i!ilHII  1 


i  in  I  !i  III  llli  i       (i  lUiijiltl  il:i:;! 


Sj^e^Xz-      VcjeJLB^w-tt. 


•;*£&& 


Digitized  by  the  Internet  Archive 

in  2012  with  funding  from 

University  of  North  Carolina  at  Chapel  Hil 


http://www.archive.org/details/colonialchildrenOhart 


JOHN    QUINCY 


Source-Readers   in   American    History  —  No.  I 


COLONIAL  CHILDREN 


SELECTED    AND    ANNOTATED     BY 

ALBERT    BUSHNELL    HART 

Of  Harvard   University 
WITH     THE    COLLABORATION     OF 

BLANCHE    E.    HAZARD 

Of  the  Rhode   Island   Normal   School 


With   Many   Illustrations 


NEW  YORK 
THE    MACMILLAN    COMPANY 

LONDON  :    M ACMILLAN    &    CO.,    Ltd. 
I905 

All   rights    reserved 


Copyright,    1902, 
By  THE   MACMILLAN   COMPANY. 


Set  up  and  electrotyped  June,  1902.      Reprinted  April, 
1903;   January,  July,  1905. 


TO 

iltttlr  8.  anti  ILtttlr  3L 

LOVERS    OF    PAPA'S    STORIE! 
THESE    VERITIES 


Preface 


In  the  conviction  that  the  freshest  and  most  direct  writings 
are  those  which  most  appeal  to  children  of  every  age,  this 
volume  and  its  three  companions  have  been  prepared.  The 
books  are  made  up  of  sources,  but  not  of  sources  in  the  garb 
of  three  centuries  ago,  unfamiliar  to  modern  children.  The 
language  and  spelling  have  been  freely  altered,  while  the 
thought  has  been  preserved.  Much  has  been  omitted,  but  it 
has  not  been  the  intention  to  add  any  statement  not  expressed 
in  the  original.  If  children  are  interested  in  this  book,  it  will 
be  because  their  ancestors  were  interesting,  and  not  because  a 
modern  mind  has  invented  a  story  for  them.  History  has  been 
taken  in  its  large  sense,  as  a  record  of  the  life  of  the  people, 
and  hence  many  descriptions  of  manners  and  customs  have 
been  included.  While  long  narratives  in  general  had  to  be 
avoided,  the  lack  of  verse  is  due  simply  to  the  fact  that  colonial 
poetry  is  in  general  too  rugged  or  too  stupid  for  children,  and 
cannot  be  modernized.  In  later  volumes  verse  will  appear 
more  freely. 

ALBERT   BUSHNELL   HART. 

Cambridge,  Massachusetts, 
December  19,  1900. 


Contents 


PAGE 

Introduction  for  Teachers     ........       ix 

PART    I 
Discovery  of  America i 

PART    II 
On  the  Sea ...       33 

PART    III 
In  the  Wilderness     ..........       55 

PART    IV 
Big  Indians  and  Little  Indians      .......      91 

PART    V 
How  the  Colonies  grew  .........     133 

PART    VI 
Little  Folks      .............     165 

PART    VII 
Colonial  Schools      ..........    201 


Descriptive    List   o+    Illustrations 

John  QoiNCY .  Frontispiece 

Grandfather  of  John  Adams  ;    «hen  two  years  old  ;    painted  about  16S7. 

PAGE 

A  Norse  Ship 2 

From  old  buried  ships  discovered  in  Scandinavia. 
Columbus'  Ships  in  facsimile 5 

From  a  drawing  of  1493,  supposed  to  be  by  Columbus. 
The  Departure  of  Columbus 9 

Drawn  from  imagination,  and  published  in  De  Bry's  "  Voyages,"  1594. 
A  Spaniard  in  Armor 15 

Portrait  of  Hernando  Cortez,  Conqueror  of  Mexico. 
Esquimaux  Children 20 

From  an  old  book  of  travels,  1577. 
A  Ship  at  Ska 22 

Ships    of    about    1570,    showing    high    forecastle    and    aftercastle  ;     from 
De  Bry's  "  Voyages,"  1592. 

A  Ship  among  Flying  Fish 26 

From  De  Bry's  "  Voyages,"  1592. 
Indians  Canoeing 29 

From  De  Bry's  "Voyages,"  1590. 

Freebooters'  Pastimes 35 

Showing  the  cruelty  and  rapacity  of  the  pirates  ;    from  De  Bry's  "  Voyages." 

Portrait  ok  a   Pirate 39 

A  picture  of  Sir  Henry  Morgan,  long  the  scourge  of  the  Spanish  settle- 
ments in  the  Caribbean  Sea;    from  "  Huccaniers  of  America." 


List  of  Illustrations 


PAGE 

An  Indian  Town 54 

A  town  on  Roanoke  Island,  as  seen  by  Ilariot. 

An  Indian  Dance 57 

As  seen  by  Ilariot  in  North  Carolina. 

A  Big  Colonial  Tree 62 

"Big  Ben,"  Lancaster,  Massachusetts;    about  30  feet  in  circumference  and 
no  feet  high. 

The  Supposed  Buffalo 73 

As  drawn,  probably  from  descriptions,  by  Thevenet  in  his  "  Singularitez," 
I55S. 

The  Real  Buffalo 73 

Drawn  by  Audubon,  the  Naturalist. 

Beaver 77 

From  a  museum. 
Bear 77 

From  a  museum. 

An  Indian  Boy 90 

A  Nambe  water-carrier   in  Arizona ;  from  the  Reports  of  the  Bureau  of 
Ethnology. 

Indian  Warriors 93 

European  idea  of  what  Indians  looked  like,  when  hunting  in  snow-shoes. 
From  Thevenet's  "  Singularitez,"  1558. 

Pocahontas 98 

From  an  old  portrait  of  the  Indian  Princess. 

Indian  Writings 108 

From  the  Reports  of  the  Bureau  of  Ethnology. 

Pipe  of  Peace 116 

Two  genuine  calumets,  used  in  Indian  councils. 

Weapons  of  War    .        .        .        .        „ 117 

An  Indian  tomahawk  and  a  stone-headed  club. 


List   of  Illustrations 


PAGE 

Indian  Money 122 

Belts  made  of  wampum  shell;    on  the  left  the  peace-belt  given  to  William 
Penn. 

An  Indian  Papoose 127 

An  Ojibway  squaw;    drawn  in  1S37. 

The  Fairbanks  House 132 

At  Dedham,  Massachusetts;    oldest  house  in  Xew  England;    still  occupied 
by  a  descendant  of  the  original  family. 

A  Soldier's  Outfit 13S 

"Buff  coat,"  of  leather,  flint-lock  musket,  and  Miles  Standish's  sword. 

New  Amsterdam 140 

Early  picture  of  the  Dutch  settlement  on  the  site  of  Xew  York,  dated  1656. 

A  New  York  Lady         . 142 

Member  of  the  family  of  Governor  Dongan,  about  16S0. 

William  Penn 146 

As  a  young  courtier  in  armor  ;   painted  about  1670. 

A  Block-house *4° 

On  the  Kennebec  River;   built  1754. 

A  Colonial  Kitchen '54 

An  imaginative  picture  based  on  actual  colonial  rooms  and  furniture. 

Edward  Winslow '64 

Miniature  taken  at  about  live  years  old  ;  Winslow  grew  up  to  be  Governor 
of  Plymouth. 

Mr  Walti  i:  Ralegh l69 

From  a  painting  made  about  1 5S4- 

A  Colonial  Cradle '72 

Dudley  Cradle,  in  Massachusetts  Historical  Society. 

An  Old  Doli I7(' 

Preserved  in  Salem.  Massachusetts. 


List   of  Illustrations 


PAGE 


An  Old  Toy 179 

A  little  carriage  made  about  1S00. 

A  Colonial  Family 180 

Children   of  Governor  Gore  of  Massachusetts  ;    painted    about    1754  by 
Copley. 

Colonial  Pews 195 

From  church  at  Salisbury,  New   Hampshire,  where  Daniel  Webster  wor- 
shipped. 

From  a  Colonial  Picture  Book 199 

Portrait   of   John   Smith,  chief   founder  of  Virginia,  from   his  "  Generall 

Historic." 

A  Horn  Book 203 

Earliest  form  of  school  reader,  covered  with  transparent  horn  to  keep  it 
from  wearing  out  ;    from  Tuer's  "  Horn  Book." 

A  Sampler 205 

Every  little  girl  was  expected  to  work  in  embroidery  something  like  this. 
Colonial  Handwriting 206 

Various  signatures  of  George  Washington. 
A  Schoolboy's  Trunk 211 

15  inches  long;  used  by  Ichabod  Tucker  when  he  went  to  college  in  171 1. 
The  New  England  Primer 213 

Used  in  many  editions  as  a  schoolbook  for  nearly  a  century  in  New  Eng- 
land. 

In  School 218 

Rude  pictures  from  a  school  spelling-book,  1796. 
A  Colonial  Schoolgirl 223 

Mistress  Campion,  a  four-year-old  girl,  with  a  horn  book;  painted  1661. 
In  a  Library 227 

From  a  schoolbook  published  1770. 
School  Days 231 

An  English  picture,  showing  horn  book  and  rod. 


INTRODUCTION    FOR    TEACHERS 

By  Blanche   E.   Hazard 

The  demand  at  the  present  day  for  reading-books 
is  not  like  that  of  fifty  or  even  fifteen  years  ago. 
Any  collection  of  poetry  and  prose  used  to  be  thought 
adequate,  if  made  up  of  words  of  certain  brevity  and 
paragraphs  of  appropriate  choppiness  about  miscel- 
laneous subjects.  Such  a  Reader  was  a  good  exercise 
book  for  a  drill  in  the  mechanical  process  of  reading. 

In  these  days  of  teaching  children  instead  of  sub- 
jects, the  demand  is  not  merely  for  something  to  read, 
but  for  something  worth  reading,  both  for  its  style 
and  its  matter.  During  the  last  ten  years  various 
Readers  have  appeared,  made  up  of  selections  which 
were  good  literature  and  at  the  same  time  suited  to 
young  pupils.  The  subject-matter  of  such  Readers 
covers  a  wide  range,  including  science,  geography, 
and  history,  descriptions  of  people  and  the  world  we 
live  in  ;  for  we  are  teaching  children  to  live  and  to 
be  interested  in  the  lives  of  others. 

Good  reading-books  may  also  be  applied  to  the 
problems  of  "  anticipation  and  correlation  "  in  educa- 
tion ;  we  have  come  to  realize  that  at  a  given  age  cer- 
tain faculties  can  be  developed  more  advantageously 
than  at  other  times.  When  the  first  bold  pioneers  of 
"anticipation  "  tried  to  urge  that  some  subjects  for- 
merly reserved  for  secondary  schools  should  be  taught 
in  the   grammar  grades,  there  were  cries  of  dismay 


xii  Introduction 

and  honest  fears  of  a  "stuffing  process"  by  which 
Latin  and  algebra  were  to  be  brought  back  into  gram- 
mar grades,  and  science  and  history  into  primary 
grades.  Yet  many  schools  throughout  the  United 
States  have  proved  that  good  teachers  working  with 
good  tools  on  wise  plans  can  perform  the  impossibility. 
Among  the  necessary  tools  are  supplementary  Readers 
so  used  as  to  correlate  the  work  of  the  grades. 

For  this  reform  it  is  not  essential  to  ask  faithful 
and  efficient  teachers  to  do  more  work,  but  to  use  ef- 
fectively their  time  and  strength  and  that  of  their 
pupils,  so  that  they  may  reach  the  ideals  of  the  pres- 
ent day  education.  While  they  are  teaching  reading, 
they  are  to  think  of  the  children  not  only  as  acquiring 
a  mechanical  skill,  but  also  as  getting  ideas  about 
things  in  life ;  hence  the  growing  use  of  "  nature 
readers,"  "history  readers,"  and  "geography  read- 
ers," or  as  commonly  termed  "  Supplementary  Read- 
ers." The  very  name  involves  the  conclusion  that 
these  books  are  helping  children  to  a  knowledge  of 
subjects. 

What  are  the  characteristics  of  a  good  modern 
reading-book  ?  ( i )  Clear  thought  simply  expressed  ; 
(2)  Good  English;  (3)  Interesting  pieces  that  will 
train  in  expression  ;  (4)  Valuable  matter  that  is  worth 
remembering  for  its  own  sake.  In  my  own  work  of 
teaching  methods  to  Normal  School  classes  in  the 
Rhode  Island  Normal  School  and  of  supervising  the 
history  study  in  the  primary  and  grammar  grades  of 
the  Observation  School  connected  with  this  Normal 
School  I  have  found  the  system  of  supplementary 
readers  an  aid  to  the  teacher  and  a  stimulus  to  the 
pupil.  In  talking  with  young  children  both  in  and 
out  of  school,  reading  to  them,  hearing  them  read  to 


Introduction  xiii 

me,  and  listening  to  their  unconstrained  and  valuable 
criticisms,  I  have  been  convinced  that  they  can  under- 
stand and  enjoy  proper  selections  from  real  literature. 

Colo)iial  Children^  like  the  other  Readers  of  this 
series  which  are  to  follow,  is  an  attempt  to  give  good 
literature  to  children,  and  at  the  same  time  to  do  two 
other  things  :  to  let  people  of  bygone  days  speak  for 
themselves  ;  and  to  lay  good  foundations  for  accurate 
knowledge  of  history.  Hence  the  sources  of  Ameri- 
can history  have  been  re-examined  and  narratives 
have  been  selected  which  seem  interesting  to  children, 
and  simple  enough  in  thought  for  them  to  understand. 

The  stories  are  the  same  in  substance  as  when  they 
were  first  told,  two  and  three  centuries  ago ;  but  their 
garb  has  been  changed  without  adding  a  detail  or 
altering  a  statement  of  fact.  The  spelling  and  phrase- 
ology of  the  sixteenth  and  seventeenth  centuries  have 
been  corrected  so  that  the  story  may  be  easily  under- 
stood by  young  children.  Nevertheless  as  much  of 
the  quaintness  of  expression  has  been  kept  as  was 
allowable  by  rules  of  present  good  usage,  with  due 
reference  to  the  mental  development  of  the  pupils  of 
the  fourth  to  the  sixth  grade.  Those  children  can 
now  read  aloud  to  their  listening  schoolmates  the 
words  uttered  by  such  leaders  as  Governor  William 
Bradford,  Governor  John  Winthrop,  John  Smith,  and 
William  Penn,  great  men  of  action,  who  were  also 
writers  of  clear  thought  and  pure  English  style. 

Perhaps  a  proper  definition  of  oral  reading  might 
be  this,  —  getting  the  thought  out  of  a  writer's  words, 
and  then  expressing  it  in  such  a  way  as  to  pass  that 
thought  on  to  others.  An  interest  that  awakens  im- 
agination leads  readily  into  an  ability  to  get  and  to 
transmit  another's  thought.     This  volume  should  have 


xiv  Introduction 

in  the  training  of  expression  as  much  helpfulness  as 
the  many  artificial  story  books,  for  it  is  full  of  adven- 
ture, wonderful  happenings,  graphic  descriptions,  and 
altogether  delightful  tales.  I  have  seen  and  heard 
history  stories  read  by  children  in  all  the  grades  from 
the  third  to  the  sixth  ;  and  I  have  observed  that  even 
little  children  cannot  help  giving  the  right  expression 
when  they  read  of  triumph  or  of  sorrow,  for  their 
voices  are  unconsciously  modulated  to  suit  the 
thought,  because  the  feelings  which  control  the  voice 
are  awakened. 

Reading  aloud  with  taste  and  expression  is  only 
part  of  the  school  training.  Children  must  learn  to 
read  both  to  and  for  themselves  ;  to  get  the  sense  by 
the  appeal  of  the  printed  page  to  the  eye,  as  well  as 
of  the  spoken  words  to  the  ear.  That  children  do 
not  acquire  this  power  generally  in  the  primary  and 
grammar  schools  is  known  to  secondary  school  teach- 
ers ;  repeatedly  in  my  high  school  classes  I  have 
found  that  reading  twenty  pages  of  a  comparatively 
easy  history  or  even  of  a  novel,  was  a  "  time-taking 
task  "  without  definite  results  in  the  way  of  securing 
the  ideas.  Since  this  power  cannot  be  acquired 
without  years  of  training,  a  beginning  should  be 
made  in  the  elementary  schools.  There  is  no  doubt 
that  many  of  these  stories  would  be  most  profitable 
and  engrossing  "  seat  work,"  a  means  of  relaxation, 
which  would  not  involve  mischief  making. 

Varying  conditions  in  schools  and  courses  in  the 
East  and  in  the  West,  and  in  different  schools  also  of 
one  state,  prevent  a  general  statement  as  to  the  grade 
for  which  this  reading-book  is  intended.  In  selecting 
and  revising  the  extracts  we  hoped  that  it  might  fit 
the  average  fifth  grade,  or  say  children  ten  or  twelve 


Introduction  xv 

years  old,  and  my  own  experience  and  a  test  of  many 
of  the  pieces  show  that  average  children  of  that  age 
can  use  it  pleasurably. 

The  fourth  requirement  for  a  Reader  is  that  it  con- 
tain valuable  subject-matter,  worth  remembering  for 
itself  :  we  believe  that  the  pieces  in  this  book  not 
only  cultivate  the  imagination  and  train  the  vocal  ex- 
pression, but  may  aid  the  memory  and  aid  the  judg- 
ment so  as  to  be  an  ultimate  help  in  the  study  of 
history  in  the  fifth  or  in  higher  grades.  W  nile  in- 
tended primarily  as  a  reading-book,  the  volume  has 
been  made  up  in  accordance  with  the  principles  of 
the  scientific  study  of  history  :  large  bodies  of  sources 
have  been  searched  ;  opinions  have  been  weighed  and 
balanced ;  and  the  merits  of  the  writers  and  their 
writings  have  been  considered  ;  kindred  subjects  have 
been  grouped ;  chronological  order  and  historical 
perspective  have  been  kept  in  mind.  If  a  teacher  in 
the  fifth  grade  is  required  to  teach  American  history, 
in  a  simple  though  formal  way,  with  a  text-book  or 
without,  she  will  find  in  this  book  a  tool  adapted  for 
her  work. 

For  example,  to  make  real  the  Norsemen  who 
visited  our  country  so  long  ago,  leaving  few  or  no 
traces  of  their  coming,  she  can  turn  those  shadowy 
beings  into  seeming  flesh  and  blood  by  reading  the 
story  of  the  Wineland  Baby  (No.  i).  She  can  be  sure 
that  children  will  remember  not  only  the  story,  but 
the  story-teller,  when  Columbus  (No.  2)  or  Higginson 
(No.  20)  tell  what  they  saw  in  the  New  World.  The 
real  nature  of  exploration  will  come  home  to  the  pupils 
with  force  as  they  read  about  Balboa  (No.  5)  and 
Pizarro(No.  6)  and  De  Soto  (Xo.  7).  A  fuller  ap- 
preciation of  the  courage  of  the  colonists  will  be  pos- 


xvi  Introduction 

sible  for  the  children  who  notice  the  dangers,  real 
and  imaginary,  which  were  faced  in  the  journey  over 
the  ocean  and  during  the  first  years  in  the  wilderness ; 
any  of  the  selections  grouped  in  the  chapter  "  On 
the  Sea  "  and  "  In  the  Wilderness  "  will  furnish  these 
pictures. 

The  volume  contains  some  of  the  earliest  and  most 
authentic  accounts  of  the  native  Indians  :  but  it  was 
not  all  scalping  and  war  dances.  The  girls  who  read 
of  their  home-life  (Nos.  33  and  34)  and  the  true  story 
of  Pocahontas  (No.  35)  will  find  that  the  Indians  can 
interest  as  well  as  frighten  them ;  the  boys  will  get 
enough  excitement  in  the  stories  of  rescue  from 
Indian  captivity  found  in  Nos.  41  and  43  ;  while  both 
boys  and  girls  will  find  much  to  admire  in  the  char- 
acter of  the  Indian  chieftain,  Passaconnaway  (No. 
39).  Colonies  seem  more  real  to  boys  and  girls  when 
they  find  that  there  were  real  children  on  the  Virginia 
plantations  and  in  the  New  England  towns ;  as 
''fathers"  and  "mothers"  the  parents  of  these 
children  (read  Nos.  56  and  59,  60  and  61,  65,  66, 
and  67)  become  infinitely  more  interesting  than  the 
old-fashioned  "colonists"  could  ever  be.  That  per- 
sonal impression  once  gained,  pupils  may  read  Nos. 
46  to  55  about  "How  the  Colonies  Grew."  That 
the  accounts  of  the  colonial  schools,  in  the  closing 
chapter  of  this  Reader,  will  make  the  children  more 
eager  to  go  to  their  own  schools,  is,  perhaps,  too 
much  to  promise,  but  that  all  these  stories  wisely  used 
will  tend  to  keep  this  rising  generation  from  "  hating 
history  "  is  confidently  expected. 

To  a  sixth  grade  teacher,  who  takes  up  the  formal 
study  of  American  history,  with  a  class  that  has  be- 
come acquainted  with   Colonial  Children  during  the 


Introduction  xvii 

previous  year,  there  will  come  a  grateful  appreci- 
ation of  the  worth  of  a  supplementary  Reader  that 
gave  the  children  something  not  only  to  read,  and  to 
read  with  expression,  but  to  remember ;  she  will  see 
a  practical  outcome  of  the  system  of  "  anticipation 
and  correlation,"  and  she  will  be  doing  her  share  in 
working  out  this  problem  in  our  primary  and  gram- 
mar schools. 


PART    I 

DISCOVERY   OF   AMERICA 


i.    Saga  of  a  Wineland  Baby 

By  Hauk  Erlendsson  (about  iooo) 

One  summer  a  ship  came  from  Norway  to  Green- 
land. The  skipper's  name  was  Thorfinn  Karlsefni, 
and  he  was  the  son  of  Thord  called  "  Horsehead," 
and  a  grandson  of  Snorri.  Thorfinn  Karlsefni,  who 
was  a  very  wealthy  man,  passed  the  winter  there  in 
Greenland,  with  Lief  Ericsson.  He  very  soon  set  his 
heart  upon  a  maiden  called  Gudrid,  and  sought  her 
hand  in  marriage. 

That  same  winter  a  new  discussion  arose  concern- 
ing a  Wineland  voyage.  The  people  urged  Karlsefni 
to  make  the  bold  venture,  so  he  determined  to  under- 
take the  voyage,  and  gathered  a  company  of  sixty 
men  and  five  women.  He  entered  into  an  agreement 
with  his  shipmates  that  they  should  each  share  equally 
in  all  the  spoils.  They  took  with  them  all  kinds  of 
cattle,  as  they  intended  to  settle  the  country  if  they 
could.  Karlsefni  asked  Lief  for  his  house  in  Wine- 
land. Lief  replied  that  he  would  lend  it  but  not 
frive  it. 


This  story 
was  handed 
down  by  tra- 
dition for 
many  cen- 
turies ;  but  it 
describes  a 
real  settle- 
ment, the 
first  by 
Europeans 
in  America 
nine  cen- 
turies ago. 


I.e.  to  a 
place  called 
Wineland. 

Lief  had 
already  made 
a  voyage  to 
Wineland 
and  built  a 
house  there. 


D 


is  cover  y  o 


of  A??ic 


rica 


[No.  1 


The  name  of 
Lief's  place. 


The  ships 
which  had 
brought  out 
the  colonists 
were  sent 
back  with  a 
cargo  from 
Wineland. 


The 

Skrellings 

were  natives, 

probably 

Esquimaux 

or  other 

northern 

tribes. 

The 
Skrellings 


They  sailed  out  to  sea  with  the  ship  and  arrived  safe 
and  sound  at  Lief 's  booths,  and  carried  their  hammocks 
ashore  there.  They  were  soon  provided  with  an  abun- 
dant supply  of  food,  for  a  whale  of  good  size  and  qual- 
ity was  driven  ashore  and  they  secured  it.  Their  cattle 
were  turned  out  upon  the  land.  Karlsefni  ordered 
trees  to  be  felled ;  for  he  needed  timber  wherewith  to 
load  his  ships.  They  gathered  some  of  all  the  prod- 
ucts of  the  land, 
grapes,  all  kinds  of 
game,  fish,  and  other 
good  things. 

In  the  summer 
after  the  first  winter 
the  Skrellings  were 
discovered.  A  great 
throng  of  men  came 
forth  from  the  woods ; 
the  cattle  were  close 
by  and  the  bull  began 
to  bellow  and  roar 
with  a  great  noise. 
At  this  the  Skrellings 
were  frightened  and 
ran  away  with  their 
packs,  wherein  were  gray  furs,  sables,  and  all  kinds 
of  skins.  They  fled  towards  Karlsefni's  dwelling  and 
tried  to  get  into  the  house,  but  Karlsefni  caused  the 
doors  to  be  defended.  Neither  people  could  under- 
stand the  other's  language.  The  Skrellings  put  down 
their  packs,  then  opened  them  and  offered  their  wares, 
in  exchange  for  weapons,  but  Karlsefni  forbade  his 
men  to  sell  their  weapons.  He  bade  the  women  to 
carry  out  milk  to  the  Skrellings  ;  as  soon  as  these  peo- 


A    NORSE   SHIP, 


no.  i]  A  JVineland  Baby  3 

pie  had  tasted  the  milk,  they  wanted  to  buy  it  and   had  neither 
nothing;  else.  cows  nor 

_,  .     .  .  ,  ■,     ,  -r-r      1       r    •  1  goats,  so  that 

JNow  it  is  to  be  told  that  Karlsefni  caused  a  strong   miikwasa 
wooden  palisade  to  be  constructed  and  set  up  around   novel  luxm7 

,        .  T  ....  ,      ,        .  for  them. 

the  house.     It  was  at  this  time  that  a  baby  boy  was 

born  to  Gudrid  and  Karlsef  ni  and  he  was  called  Snorri.   The  first 

In  the  early  part  of  the  second  winter  the  Skrellings   chlld  of 

J  .  °       European 

came  to  them  again  m  greater  numbers  than  before,  race  born  in 
and  brought  with  them  the  same  kind  of  wares  to  America- 
exchange.  Then  said  Karlsefni  to  the  women,  "  Do 
ye  carry  out  now  the  same  thing  which  proved  so  prof- 
itable before  and  nothing  else."  The  Skrellings  seemed 
contented  at  first,  but  soon  after,  while  Gudrid  was  sit- 
ting in  the  doorway  beside  the  cradle  of  her  infant 
son,  Snorri,  she  heard  a  great  crash  made  by  one  of 
the  Skrellings  who  had  tried  to  seize  a  man's  weapons. 
One  of  Karlsefni's  followers  killed  him  for  it.  "  Now 
we  must  needs  take  counsel  together,"  said  Karlsefni, 
"  for  I  believe  they  will  visit  us  a  third  time  in  greater 
numbers.  Let  us  now  adopt  this  plan :  when  the  tribe 
approaches  from  the  forest,  ten  of  our  number  shall 
go  out  upon  the  cape  in  front  of  our  houses  and  show 
themselves  there,  while  the  remainder  of  our  company 
shall  go  into  the  woods  back  of  our  houses  and  hew 
a  clearing  for  our  cattle.  Then  we  will  take  our  bull 
and  let  him  go  in  advance  of  us  to  meet  the  enemy." 
The  next  time  the  Skrellings  came  they  found  Karl- 
sefni's men  ready  and  fled  helter-skelter  into  the  woods. 
Karlsefni  and  his  party  remained  there  throughout 
the  winter,  but  in  the  spring  Karlsefni  announced  that 
he  did  not  intend  to  remain  there  longer,  for  he  wished 
to  return  with  his  wife  and  son  to  Greenland.      They   We  do  not 


know  what 
became  <>i 
them  much  in  vines  and  grapes  and  skins.  thesc  pe0pie. 


now  made  ready  for  the  voyage  and  carried  away  with 

became  <>i 


Discovery  of  America        [No. 


This  extract 
is  part  of 
Columbus's 
own  account 
of  his  dis- 
covery of 
the  new 
world. 

King  Fer- 
dinand of 
Spain. 


I.e.  one  of 
the  names 
applied  to 
Jesus  Christ. 

juana  = 
Cuba. 


Cathay  = 
China,  which 
Columbus 
had  expected 
to  reach. 


Or  His- 
panola,  now 
San 
Domingo. 


2.    Throngs  of  Children  to  see 
Columbus 

By  Christopher  Columbus  (1492) 

Thirty-three  days  after  my  departure  from 
Cadiz  I  reached  the  Indian  Sea,  where  I  discovered 
many  islands  which  were  thickly  peopled.  I  took 
possession  of  these  without  resistance  in  the  name 
of  our  most  illustrious  Monarch,  by  a  public  procla- 
mation and  with  unfurled  banners.  To  the  first  of 
these  islands,  which  is  called  by  the  Indians  Guana- 
hani,  I  gave  the  name  of  the  blessed  Saviour,  San 
Salvador,  relying  upon  whose  protection  I  had 
reached  this  as  well  as  the  other  islands.  As 
soon  as  we  arrived  at  the  great  island,  which  I  have 
said  was  named  Juana,  I  proceeded  along  its  coast 
a  short  distance  westward,  and  found  it  to  be  so 
large  and  apparently  without  termination,  that  I 
could  not  suppose  it  to  be  an  island,  but  the  conti- 
nental province  of  Cathay.  In  the  meantime  I  had 
learned  from  some  Indians  whom  I  had  seized,  that 
that  country  was  certainly  an  island :  and  therefore 
I  sailed  towards  the  east,  coasting  to  the  distance  of 
three  hundred  and  twenty-two  miles,  which  brought  us 
to  the  extremity  of  it.  From  this  point  I  saw  lying 
eastwards  another  island,  fifty-four  miles  distant  from 
Juana,  to  which  I  gave  the  name  of  Espanola.  All 
these  islands  are  very  beautiful ;  they  are  filled  with 
a  great  variety  of  trees  of  immense  height  which 
retain  their  foliage,  in  all  seasons,  I  believe,  for  when 
I  saw  them  they  were  as  verdant  and  luxuriant  as 
they   usually   are   in    Spain   in   the   month    of    May. 


no.  2]       Children  and  Columbus 


Some  of  them  were  blossoming,  some  bearing  fruit, 
and  all  flourishing  in  the  greatest  perfection.  Yet 
the  islands  are  not  so  thickly  wooded  as  to  be  impas- 
sable.    The  nightingale  and  various  birds  were  sing- 


®ceanica 


SHU'S    IN    FACSIMILE. 


ing  in  countless  numbers,  and  that  in  November,  the 
month  in  which  I  arrived  there. 

The  inhabitants  are  very  simple  and  honest,  and 
exceedingly  liberal  with  all  they  have  ;  none  of  them 
refusing  anything  he  may  possess  when  he  is  asked 


Discovery  of  America        [No. 


The  friendly 
people  were 
soon  after 
made  slaves 
by  the 
Spaniards, 
and  in  a  few 
years  were 
almost  all 
dead  from 
the  cruel 
treatment  of 
their  masters. 


for  it ;  but  on  the  contrary  inviting  us  to  ask  them. 
They  exhibit  great  love  towards  all  others  in  prefer- 
ence to  themselves  :  they  also  give  objects  of  great 
value  for  trifles,  and  content  themselves  with  very 
little  in  return.  I,  however,  forbade  that  these  trifles 
and  articles  of  no  value,  such  as  pieces  of  dishes, 
plates,  and  glass,  keys,  and  leather  straps  should  be 
given  to  them;  although  if  they  could  obtain  them, 
they  imagined  themselves  to  be  possessed  of  the 
most  beautiful  trinkets  in  the  world. 

On  my  arrival  in  the  new  world  I  took  some  Ind- 
ians by  force  from  the  first  island  to  which  I  came, 
in  order  that  they  might  learn  our  language.  These 
men  are  still  travelling  with  me,  and  although  they 
have  been  with  us  now  for  a  long  time,  they  continue 
to  entertain  the  idea  that  I  have  descended  from 
heaven.  On  our  arrival  at  any  new  place  they  pub- 
lish this,  crying  out  immediately  with  a  loud  voice  to 
the  other  Indians,  "  Come,  come  and  look  upon 
beings  of  a  celestial  race  "  :  upon  which  both  women 
and  men,  children  and  adults,  young  men  and  old, 
when  they  get  rid  of  the  fear  they  at  first  entertain, 
will  come  out  in  throngs,  crowding  the  roads  to  see 
us,  some  bringing  food  and  others  drink,  with  aston- 
ishing affection  and  kindness. 


Mo.  3] 


Dressed  in  Silk 


3.    A  Father  dressed  in  Silk 

By  Two  Italian  Gentlemen  (1497) 

London.  23d  August,  1497. 
Our  Venetian,  John  Cabot,  who  went  with  a  small 
ship  from  Bristol  to  find  new  islands,  has  come  back, 
and  says  that  he  has  discovered,  seven  hundred  leagues 
off,  the  mainland  of  the  country  of  China.  He  coasted 
along  it  for  three  hundred  leagues,  and  landed  but 
did  not  see  any  people.  But  he  has  brought  here  to 
the  king  certain  snares  spread  to  take  game,  and  a 
needle  for  making  nets.  He  found  some  notched 
trees,  from  which  he  judged  that  people  lived  about 
there.  Being  in  doubt,  he  came  back  to  the  ship. 
He  had  been  away  three  months  on  the  voyage,  and, 
in  returning,  he  saw  two  islands  to  the  right ;  but  he 
did  not  wish  to  land,  lest  he  should  lose  time,  for  he 
was  in  want  of  provisions.  The  king  of  this  country 
has  been  much  pleased.  He  has  promised  for  an- 
other time  ten  armed  ships  such  as  Cabot  desires, 
and  has  given  him  all  the  prisoners,  except  such  as 
are  confined  for  high  treason,  to  go  with  him.  The 
king  has  granted  him  money  also,  with  which  to 
amuse  himself  till  then.  Meanwhile,  he  is  with  his 
Venetian  wife  and  his  sons  at  Bristol.  His  name  is 
John  Cabot  and  he  is  called  the  Great  Admiral  ; 
great  honor  is  paid  to  him,  and  he  goes  about  dressed 
in  silk.  The  English  are  ready  to  go  with  him,  and 
so  are  many  of  our  rascals.  As  discoverer  of  these 
things,  Cabot  has  planted  a  large  cross  in  the  ground 
with  a  banner  of  England,  and  one  of  St.  Mark,  as 
he  is  a  Venetian  ;  so  that  our  flag  has  been  hoisted 
very  far  away. 


John  Cabot 
was  sent  out 
by  Henry 
VII,  King  of 
England,  and 
this  was  the 
first  English 
voyage  to 
America. 
A  league  = 
three  miles. 


Henry  VII 
of  England. 


I.e.  let  Cabot 
take  them 
as  seamen, 
so  as  to 
relieve  the 
overcrowded 
English 
prisons. 

Rascals  = 
poor  men. 

St.  Mark  is 
the  patron 
saint  of 
Venice. 


8 


Di 


iscovery  Oj 


An. 


terica 


[No.  3 


It  was  still 
supposed 
tii.it  the  coast 
of  America 
u:h  a  part 
ot  China  or 
Japan. 


These  two 
letters  were 
wr.tten  to  the 
governments 
of  Venice 
and  Milan. 


18th  December,  1497. 

Perhaps  amidst  so  many  occupations  of  your  Ex- 
cellency it  will  not  be  unwelcome  to  learn  how  the 
King  of  England  has  gained  a  part  of  Asia  without 
drawing  his  sword.  In  this  kingdom  there  is  a  cer- 
tain Venetian  named  John  Cabot,  of  gentle  disposi- 
tion, very  expert  in  navigation,  who,  seeing  that  the 
most  serene  Kings  of  Portugal  and  Spain  had  occu- 
pied unknown  islands,  wished  to  gain  new  territory  for 
the  English  king.  Having  obtained  the  king's  prom- 
ise that  he  might  have  the  lordship  of  the  dominions 
which  he  might  discover,  Cabot  embarked  in  a  small 
vessel  with  a  crew  of  eighteen  persons,  and  set  out 
from  Bristol,  a  port  in  the  western  part  of  this  king- 
dom. He  wandered  for  a  long  time;  at  length  he 
came  to  land,  where  he  hoisted  the  royal  standard, 
and  took  possession  for  his  Highness  ;  then,  having 
obtained  various  proofs  of  his  discovery,  he  returned. 

Since  John  was  a  foreigner  and  poor,  he  would  not 
have  been  believed  if  the  crew,  who  are  nearly  all 
English,  and  belong  to  Bristol,  had  not  testified  that 
what  he  said  was  the  truth.  This  Cabot  has  the 
description  of  the  world  on  a  chart,  and  also  on  a 
solid  sphere  which  he  has  made.  On  this  he  shows 
where  he  has  been.  They  say  that  the  new  land  is 
excellent  and  the  climate  is  temperate  ;  they  also  say 
that  perhaps  dye-wood  and  silk  grow  there.  They 
affirm  that  the  sea  is  full  of  fish,  which  are  taken  not 
only  with  a  net,  but  also  with  a  basket,  which  has  a 
stone  fastened  to  it  in  order  to  keep  it  in  the  water. 
This  I  have  heard  John  Cabot  himself  say.  People 
look  upon  him  as  a  prince. 


THE    DEPARTURE   OF   COLUMBUS. 


i  o  Discovery  of  America        [No. 


The  first 
man  to  sug- 
gest the  name 
of  America 
was  a 
German 
school- 
master whose 
name  means 
"Miller  of 
the  Wood 
Pond." 
Really 
Americus 
Vespucius 
discovered 
very  little, 
and  does 
not  deserve 
to  have  the 
continents 
named  for 
him. 


The  South 
Sea,  which 
we  call  the 
Pacific 
Ocean, 
which 
washed  the 
eastern 
shores  of 
India  and 
China,  was 
what  most  of 
the  early 
European 
explorers  set 
out  to  find. 
Balboa,  a 
Spanish 
officer,  had 
heard  from  a 


4.    The  Name  America 

By  Hylacomylus  (1507) 

And  the  fourth  part  of  the  world  halving  been  dis- 
covered by  Americus,  it  may  be  called  Amerige  ;  that 
is,  the  land  of  Americus  or  America. 

Now  truly,  since  these  regions  are  more  widely 
explored,  and  another  fourth  part  is  discovered  by 
Americus  Vesputius,  as  may  be  learned  from  the  fol- 
lowing letters,  I  do  not  see  why  any  one  may  justly 
forbid  it  to  be  named  Amerige,  that  is,  Americ's  Land, 
after  Americus  the  discoverer,  who  is  a  man  of  saga- 
cious mind  ;  or  call  it  America,  since  both  Europa  and 
Asia  derived  their  names  from  women. 


5.    How  to  find  an  Ocean 

By  Antonio  Herrera  (15 13) 

Balboa,  having  resolved  to  march  over  to  the  South 
Sea,  and  having  provided  all  things  necessary  for  it, 
set  out  from  Darien  in  the  beginning  of  September, 
1 5 1 3.  He  went  by  sea  as  far  as  the  land  of  the  Cacique 
Careta.  There  he  left  the  brigantines  and  the  canoes 
and  advanced  towards  the  mountain.  Careta  who  was 
friendly  to  him  commanded  some  of  his  subjects  to 
attend  Balboa.  A  neighboring  Cacique,  Ponca,  by 
name,  who  had  spies  abroad,  was  informed  that  the 
Spaniards  were  coming  up  his  mountain,  and  hid  him- 
self in  an  out  of  the  way  part  of  his  territory.  Balboa 
sent  some  of  the  Careta  Indians  to  assure  him  that  he 
was  doing  no  harm  but  would  be  his  friend  as  he  was 
Careta's.     So  Ponca  came,  bringing  a  present  of  gold. 


no.  5]       How  to  find  an  Ocean         1 1 


Balboa  received  him  with  much  joy  because  he  did 
not  wish  to  leave  an  enemy  behind.  He  gave  him  an 
abundance  of  beads,  looking  glasses,  and  some  iron 
axes.  In  return,  Balboa  demanded  of  Ponca  some 
guides  and  men  to  carry  burdens.  The  Cacique  granted 
all  he  desired,  and  gave  him  plenty  of  provisions. 

Then  Balboa  proceeded  to  the  top  of  the  mountain 
whence  he  had  been  told  that  the  other  sea  might  be 
seen.  From  Ponca' s  land  to  the  top  was  about  six 
days'  journey ;  but  they  spent  twenty-five  days 
because  of  the  roughness  of  the  land,  and  because 
they  were  short  of  provisions.  At  length  they 
arrived  at  the  top  of  the  high  mountain,  on  the 
twenty-fifth  of  September,  15 13,  whence  the  sea 
could  be  seen.  Balboa  was  given  notice  a  little 
while  before  they  came  to  the  top  that  they  were 
very  near  it.  Commanding  all  to  halt  there,  Balboa 
went  up  alone  and  saw  the  South  Sea  ;  then,  with 
uplifted  hands  and  on  his  knees,  he  returned  thanks 
to  heaven  for  being  the  first  who  had  seen  this  sea. 

After  performing  this  act  of  devotion  he  called  his 
men  and  repeated  the  same,  and  they  followed  his 
example,  while  the  Indians  stood  amazed  to  see 
them  so  overjoyed.  Balboa  praised  Camegra's  son 
for  giving  him  this  news,  and  promised  all  his  follow- 
ers much  wealth  and  happiness.  They  all  believed 
him,  for  he  was  very  much  beloved  because  he  made 
no  difference  between  himself  and  the  common  sol- 
diers. He  always  showed  sympathy  for  the  sick  and 
wounded,  every  one  of  whom  he  visited  and  com- 
forted. He  was  himself  undaunted  in  dangers,  never 
showing  the  least  fear  in  the  greatest  perils. 

Balboa  next  ordered  that  a  certificate  should  be 
drawn   of   his  taking  possession  of  that  sea  and  all 


native  chief 
that  there 
was  a  great 
seaacross  the 
mountains. 
Cacique  = 
chief. 


The  state  of 
Castile  was  a 
part  of 
Ferdinand's 
Spanish 
kingdom. 

We  shall 
meet  Pizarro 
again 
presently. 


The  tide 
rose  a  fathom 
—  that  is, 
6  feet. 

Nobody  then 
guessed  that 
there  was  an 
opening 
south  of 
the  land,  by 
which  they 
could  sail 
into  the 
Pacific 
Ocean. 


1 2  Discovery  of  A??ierica        [No.  e 

that  was  in  it  for  the  Crown  of  Castile ;  as  a  testi- 
mony of  this  he  cut  down  trees,  raised  crosses  and 
heaps  of  stones,  and  cut  the  name  of  the  King  of 
Spain  on  some  of  the  trees.  He  then  resolved  to  go 
down  the  mountains  to  observe  what  there  was  on 
them  and  on  the  sea-coast.  He  sent  Captain  Francis 
Pizarro  to  view  the  sea-coast  and  the  country  round 
about.  John  Escaray  and  Alonzo  Martin,  with  twelve 
men  each,  he  sent  to  find  the  shortest  way  to  this  sea. 
Alonzo  Martin  hit  upon  the  shortest  road  and  in 
two  days  came  to  a  place  where  he  found  two  canoes 
upon  dry  land,  yet  saw  no  sea ;  but  whilst  he  was 
considering  how  those  canoes  were  up  on  the  land, 
the  sea  water  came  in  and  lifted  them  up  about  a 
fathom  in  height ;  for  upon  that  coast  the  sea  ebbs 
and  flows  every  six  hours,  two  or  three  fathoms,  so 
that  great  ships  are  left  dry  and  no  sea  water  appears 
for  half  a  league  at  least.  Alonzo  Martin,  seeing 
the  canoes  begin  to  swim,  went  into  one  of  them  and 
bid  his  companions  to  bear  witness  that  he  was  the 
first  to  enter  the  South  Sea.  Another  man  whose 
name  was  Atienza  did  the  like  and  bid  them  bear 
witness  that  he  was  the  second.  They  returned  to 
Balboa  with  the  news,  which  made  them  all  rejoice. 


6.    A  Room  Full  of  Gold 


Pizarro  was 
a  Spanish 
officer  who 
had  got  per- 
mission from 


By  Francisco  Xeres  (1533) 

Governor  Pizarro  received  news  from  the  natives 
that  the  way  to  Cuzco  passed  through  very  populous 
districts  which  were  rich  and  fertile ;  that  there  was 
an  inhabited  valley  called  Caxamalca  ten  or  twelve 


no.  6]  Room  Full  of  Gold  i  3 

days'  journey  from  the  settlement  where  Atahuallpa,   Spain  to 
the    greatest    \orc[    anions;    these    natives,    resided.    conquerthe 

0  °  region  in 

When  Atahuallpa  had  come  to  the  province  of  Ca-  south 
xamalca  years  before  he  found  it  to  be  so  rich  and   America 
pleasant  that  he  settled  there  and  continued  to  con-   call  Peru_ 
quer  other  lands  from  thence.     This  lord  was  held   Cuzco  was 
so  much  in  dread,  that  the  natives  of  the  valley  did   cap;"^6 
not  dare  to  leave  his  service  for  the  service  of  the 
king  of  Spain  ;  so  they  told  the  Christians  and  their  Atahuallpa 
leader,  Governor  Pizarro,  that  a  small  detachment  of  masking  of 

the  natives. 

Atahuallpa's  army  would  be  sufficient  to  kill  all  the 
Christians.  Governor  Pizarro  thereupon  resolved  to 
march  in  search  of  Atahuallpa  to  reduce  him  to  the 
service  of  the  king  of  Spain  and  to  win  over  the  sur- 
rounding countries. 

The    Governor    departed   from    the    city    of    San   Pizarro  had 
Miguel  in  search  of  Atahuallpa  on  the  twenty-fourth   °"':v2I3men 

0  r     m  •>  and  03 

of  September,  1532.  He  arrived  at  the  town  of  horses. 
Caxamalca  two  months  later  at  the  hour  of  vespers. 
In  the  middle  of  the  town  there  was  a  great  open 
space  surrounded  by  walls  and  houses.  The  Gov- 
ernor occupied  this  position  and  sent  a  messenger  to 
Atahuallpa  to  announce  his  arrival,  to  arrange  a 
meeting,  and  in  order  that  he  might  show  him  where 
to  lodge ;  meanwhile  he  ordered  the  town  to  be 
examined  with  a  view  to  discovering  a  strong  posi- 
tion where  he  might  pitch  his  camp.  He  ordered 
all  the  troops  to  be  stationed  in  the  open  space  and 
the  cavalry  to  remain  mounted  until  it  was  seen 
whether  Atahuallpa  would  come. 

This  town,  which  is  the  principal  place  in  the  val- 
ley, is  situated  on  the  edge  of  a  mountain,  with  an 
open  plain  in  front  of  it.  Two  rivers  flow  through 
the    valley,    which    is    level    and    well     peopled    with 


Plaza  =  the 
Spanish 
name  for 
public 
square. 

A  pace  is 
about  three 
feet. 


A  great 
battle  be- 
tween Ata- 
huallapa's 
forces  and 
Pizarro's 
took  place, 
in  which 
Atahuallapa 
was  taken 
prisoner. 
Throughout 
his  captivity 
he  was  kindly 
treated,  but 
he  felt  un- 
easy about 
his  safety. 


1 4  Discovery  of  America        [No.  e 

about  two  thousand  inhabitants.  Near  the  entrance 
there  are  two  bridges  because  two  rivers  flow  past. 
The  plaza  is  larger  than  any  in  Spain,  surrounded 
by  a  wall  and  entered  by  two  doorways  which  open 
upon  the  streets  of  the  town.  The  houses  are  more 
than  two  hundred  paces  in  length,  very  well  built, 
being  surrounded  by  strong  walls,  three  times  the 
height  of  a  man.  The  roofs  are  covered  with  straw 
and  wood,  the  interiors  are  divided  into  eight  rooms, 
much  better  than  any  we  had  seen  before.  Their 
walls  are  of  well  cut  stones,  and  each  lodging  is  sur- 
rounded by  a  wall  of  masonry  with  doorways,  and 
has  its  fountain  of  water  in  an  open  court  brought 
from  a  distance  by  pipes  for  the  supply  of  the 
house. 

Atahuallapa  feared  that  the  Spaniards  would  kill 
him,  so  he  told  Governor  Pizarro  that  he  would  give 
his  captors  a  great  quantity  of  gold  and  silver.  The 
Governor  asked  him:  "  How  much  can  you  give  and 
in  what  time  ?  "  Atahuallapa  said  :  "  I  will  give  gold 
enough  to  fill  a  room  twenty-two  feet  long  and  seven- 
teen wide  up  to  a  white  line  which  is  half  way  up  the 
wall.  The  height  will  be  once  and  a  half  that  of  a 
man's  stature."  Atahuallapa  also  said,  that  up  to  that 
mark  he  would  fill  the  room  with  different  kinds  of 
golden  vessels,  such  as  jars,  pots,  vases,  besides  lumps 
and  other  pieces.  As  for  silver,  he  said  that  he  would 
fill  a  whole  chamber  with  it  twice  over.  He  under- 
took to  do  this  in  two  months.  Governor  Pizarro  told 
him  to  send  off  messengers  for  this  purpose,  and  that 
when  it  was  accomplished  he  need  have  no  fear. 

Then  Atahuallapa  sent  messages  to  his  captains  who 
were  in  the  city  of  Cuzco,  ordering  them  to  send  two 
thousand  Indians,  laden  with  gold  and  silver.     After 


no.  6]  Room  Full  of  Gold  15 

some  days,  several  of  the  family  of  Atahuallapa  arrived. 
There  was  his  brother,  who  came  from  Cuzco,  and 
sisters  and  wives.  The  brother  brought  many  vases, 
jars,  and  pots  of  gold  and  much  silver,  and  he  said 
that  there  were  more 
on  the  road  ;  but  that 
as  the  journey  was 
long,  the  Indians  who 
were  bringing  the 
treasure  became  tired 
and  could  not  come 
so  quickly,  but  that 
every  day  more  gold 
and  silver  would  ar- 
rive. And  it  came. 
On  some  days  twenty 
thousand,  on  others 
fifty  or  sixty  thou- 
sand pesos  of  gold 
arrived.  The  Gov- 
ernor ordered  it  to 
be  put  in  the  house 
where  Atahuallapa 
had  his  guards,  and 
to  be  stored  there 
until  he  had  accom- 
plished what  he  had 
promised. 

And  so  the  gold  was  delivered  to  the  Christians  by   worth  about 
little  and  little  and  slowly,  because  it  was  necessary   $17,500,000 

.  1  t     i-  i.      1      1    i.  r  -ii  inourmoney. 

to  employ  many  Indians  who  had  to  go  from  village 

to  village  to  collect  it. 


A  peso  =  a 

dollar. 


A   SPANIARD   IN   ARMOR. 


The  Spanish 

The  Governor   ordered   the   king  de- 


pieces  of  gold  to  be  counted,  and  the  trold  vessels  and 

r  o  rt  certain  fixed 

plates  to  be  melted  down  and  weighed. 


manded  a 
It  was  found   s 


treasures 
found  in  the 
new  world. 
Having  got 
the  gold, 
Pizarro 
murdered 
Atahuallpa, 
and  enslaved 
the  people. 


1 6  Discovery  of  America        [No.  7 

that  there  was  over  three  million  pesos  of  good  gold. 
Of  this,  Governor  Pizarro  had  as  his  share  two  hun- 
dred thousand  pesos  of  gold  and  fifty  thousand  of  sil- 
ver. The  "  royal  fifth  "  was  set  aside  for  the  Spanish 
king.  All  the  rest  was  divided  among  all  the  con- 
querors who  had  accompanied  Governor  Pizarro,  and 
the  men  who  had  been  friendly  to  them  during  the 
expedition.  Thus  every  one  of  Pizarro's  helpers  in 
the  country  received  something  out  of  this  room  full 
of  gold. 


This  is  one 
of  the  unsuc- 
cessful 
expeditions 
made  by  the 
Spaniards. 
De  Soto 
expected  to 
find  gold  as 
Pizarro  had 
done. 


Caravel  =  a 
four-masted 
ship. 


7.    Buried  in  the  Mississippi 

By  A  Portuguese  Gentleman  of  Elvas  (1542) 

Captain  De  Soto  was  the  son  of  a  Spanish  squire. 
He  went  into  the  Spanish  Indies  when  Peter  Arias 
was  governor  of  the  West  Indies  There  he  was  with- 
out anything  of  his  own  save  his  sword  and  shield. 
For  his  good  qualities  and  valor,  Peter  Arias  made 
him  captain  of  a  troop  of  horsemen,  and  by  his  own 
command  De  Soto  went  with  Fernando  Pizarro  to  the 
conquest  of  Peru.  Afterwards  the  Spanish  Emperor 
made  him  governor  of  the  Isle  of  Cuba  and  President 
of  Florida,  with  the  title  of  Marquis  over  a  certain 
part  of  the  lands  which  he  might  conquer. 

On  Sunday,  the  eighteenth  day  of  May,  in  the 
year  1539,  President  De  Soto  departed  from  Havana 
in  Cuba  with  his  fleet,  which  consisted  of  nine  vessels, 
five  great  ships,  two  caravels  and  two  brigantines. 
They  sailed  for  seven  days  with  a  prosperous  wind. 
On  Friday  they  landed  on  the  western  coast  of  Florida. 

De  Soto  left  Captain  Caldero  there  with  thirty 
horsemen  and  seventy  footmen  with    provisions  for 


no.  7]  In  the  Mississippi  i  7 

two  years.  Then  he  himself  with  all  the  rest  of  his 
men  marched  into  the  mainland  in  search  of  the 
"Great  River";  and  after  many  adventures  they 
found  the  river ;  but  the  natives  were  hostile  and  the 
country  was  poor. 

After  many  weary  and  dangerous  marches,  the 
governor  fell  into  great  dumps  to  see  how  hard  it 
was  to  get  down  the  Mississippi  to  the  sea.  It 
seemed  even  worse,  because  the  number  of  his  men 
and  horses  was  every  day  diminished,  as  they  could 
not  find  enough  food  to  sustain  them  in  this  country. 
Discouraged  by  that  thought  De  Soto  fell  sick. 
Before  he  took  his  bed,  he  sent  an  Indian  to  the 
cacique  at  Ouigalta  to  tell  him  that  he,  Fernando 
De  Soto,  was  the  Child  of  the  Sun,  and  that  all  the 
way  on  his  journey  thither,  all  men  had  obeyed  and 
served  him  ;  that  he  requested  him  to  accept  of  his 
friendship,  and  come  to  him,  for  he  should  be  very 
glad  to  see  him ;  and  in  sign  of  love  and  obedience  to 
bring  something  with  him  of  that  which  in  his  coun- 
try was  most  prized.  The  cacique  answered  by  the 
same  Indian,  saying  that  whereas  De  Soto  said  that 
he  was  the  Child  of  the  Sun,  if  he  would  dry  up  the 
Great  River  he  would  believe  him  ;  and  touching  the 
rest,  that  he  was  wont  to  visit  none  ;  but  rather  that 
all  those  of  whom  he  had  notice  did  visit  him,  served, 
obeyed,  and  paid  him  tributes  willingly  or  perforce. 
Therefore,  if  De  Soto  desired  to  see  him,  it  were  best 
he  should  come  to  his  place.  That  if  he  came  in 
peace,  he  would  receive  him  with  special  good  will. 
Or  if  De  Soto  came  in  war,  even  then  the  chief  told 
him  to  come  and  find  the  Indians  in  the  town  where 
they  were,  adding,  that  for  De  Soto  or  any  other  per- 
son he  would  not  shrink  one  foot  back. 


1 8  Discovery  of  America        [No.  7 


half  wide  and 
a  hundred 
feet  deep. 


By  the  time  the  Indian  returned  with  this  answer, 
the  governor  had  betaken  himself  to  bed,  very  ill 
with  fever  and  much  grieved  that  he  was  not  able  to 
pass  over  the  river  and  seek  this  cacique  to  see  if  he 
could  lessen  that  pride  of  his.  But  the  current  of 
the  river  was  very  strong  in  those  parts,  where  it  was 
a  mile  and  a  nearly  half  a  league  broad  and  sixteen  fathoms  deep. 
On  both  sides  there  were  many  Indians,  and  his 
power  was  not  now  so  great  but  that  he  had  need 
to  help  himself  when  he  could  by  flight  rather  than 
by  force. 

Before  he  could  do  either,  on  the  twenty-first  of 
May,  in  the  year  1542,  Don  Fernando  De  Soto,  the 
valorous,  virtuous,  and  valiant  captain,  Governor  of 
Cuba,  and  President  of  Florida,  departed  out  of  this 
life.  He  departed  in  such  a  place  and  at  such  a 
time  that  during  his  sickness  he  had  had  but  little 
comfort,  and  the  danger  wherein  all  his  people  found 
themselves  of  perishing  in  that  strange  country,  is 
the  reason  why  they  did  not  visit  nor  stay  with  him 
as  they  ought  to  have  done. 

Luys  de  Moscoso  determined  to  conceal  this  death 
from  the  Indians  because  Fernando  De  Soto  had 
made  them  believe  that  the  Christians  were  immortal ; 
and,  since  they  had  considered  him  to  be  hardy,  wise, 
and  valiant,  Moscoso  feared  that  if  they  should  know 
that  he  was  dead  they  would  be  bold  to  set  upon  the 
Christians,  even  if  the  Spaniards  tried  to  live  peace- 
ably among  them. 

As  soon  as  De  Soto  was  dead,  therefore,  Luys  de 
Moscoso  commanded  the  men  to  put  him  in  a  house 
secretly.  Here  he  remained  for  three  days.  Re- 
moving him  thence,  Moscoso  commanded  them  to 
bury  him  in  the  night  at  one  of  the  gates  of  the  town 


Next  in  com- 
mand in  the 
expedition. 


no.  7]  In  the  Mississippi  1  9 

just  within  the  wall.  As  the  Indians  had  seen 
De  Soto  sick  and  had  missed  him,  they  suspected 
what  had  happened.  Passing  by  the  place  where  he 
was  buried  and  seeing  the  earth  disturbed,  they 
looked  and  spoke  one  to  another.  Luys  de  Moscoso, 
understanding  it,  gave  the  order  that  De  Soto  should 
be  taken  up  by  night  and  a  great  deal  of  sand  cast 
into  the  mantles  wherein  he  was  wrapped.  Then 
De  Soto  was  carried  in  a  canoe  and  thrown  into  the 
midst  of  the  Great  River. 

The  cacique  of  Guachaya  inquired  for  him,  de- 
manding what  was  become  of  his  brother,  the  gov- 
ernor. Luys  de  Moscoso  told  him  that  he  had  gone 
to  heaven  as  he  had  many  other  times,  and  because 
he  was  to  stay  there  certain  days,  he  had  left  him  in 
his  place. 

The   cacique    still  thought   that  the  governor  was   a  small  rem- 
dead,  and  commanded  two  voung  and  well  propor-  nant  ot  the 

i     t      1  •  it  1  1  •  1  •  t  proud  expe- 

tioned   Indians  to  be   brought  thither,  praying  Luys   dition  at  last 
to   command  them  to  be  beheaded  that  they  might   escaped  to 
attend  and  serve  his  lord  and  brother  after  his  death.    NdrtierDe 
Luys  told  him  that  the  governor  was  not  dead  but   Soto's  pride 
had  gone  to  heaven  and  that  he  had  taken  such  of   no1  ,  °s" 

"  coso  s  lies 

his  own   Christian  soldiers  as  he  needed  away  with   helped  them. 

him  ;  but  the   Indians   believed  nothing  of   what   he 

said. 


2  o  Discovery  of  A??terica         [No.  8 


8.    Esquimaux  Foot-ball 

By  Richard  Hakluyt  (about  1590) 


I  find  that  in  the  manner  of  living  the  people  of 
the  northeast  and  those  of  the  northwest  are  alike. 


That  is,  of 

two  ports  of 

the  northern  ... 

lands  visited  They  have    an    olive   complexion,  —  are  very  active 

by  English  and  nimble  men,  —  and  are  a  strong,  warlike  people; 

exporers.  £or  even  m  our  sighj-  on  ^g  tops  of  the  hills  they 


The  Esqui- 
maux still 
wear  such 
garments. 


ESQUIMAUX    CHILDREN. 

would  muster  themselves,  and  in  a  mimic  skirmish 
scamper  over  the  ground  very  nimbly.  They  man- 
age their  bows  and  arrows  with  great  dexterity. 

They  go  about  clad  in  skins  of  beasts  such  as 
seals,  deer,  bears,  foxes,  and  hares.  They  have 
also   some   garments  of    feathers,    finely   sewed    and 


no.  8]         Esquimaux  Foot-ball  2 1 

fastened  together.  In  summer  they  wear  the  hairy- 
side  of  the  skins  outward,  and  in  winter  they  wear 
four  or  five  thicknesses  with  the  hairy  sides  turned 
inward. 

These  people  are  by  nature  subtle  and  sharp-witted, 
ready  to  understand  our  meaning  by  signs  and  make 
answers  that  can  be  well  understood.  If  they  have 
not  seen  the  thing  whereof  we  ask,  they  will  wink  or 
cover  their  eyes  with  their  hands  as  if  to  say  it  had 
been  hid  from  sight.  If  they  do  not  understand  what 
you  ask  them,  they  will  stop  their  ears.  They  are 
willing  to  teach  us  the  names  of  anything  in  their 
language  which  we  desire  to  know,  and  are  quick  to 
learn  anything  of  us.  They  delight  in  music  and 
will  keep  time  and  stroke  to  any  tune  which  we  may 
sing,  both  with  their  voice,  head,  hands,  and  feet, 
and  will  sing  the  same  tune  after  us. 

They  live  in  caves  in  the  earth  and  hunt  for  their 
dinners  just  as  the  bears  and  other  wild  beasts  do. 
They  eat  raw  flesh  and  fish. 

On  the  twenty-first  of  August  the  captain  of  our 
ship  sent  a  boat  on  shore  for  wood  with  six  of  our 
men  who  had  friendly  dealings  writh  these  Esquimaux. 
After  that,  they  beckoned  us  on  shore  several  times 
to  play  foot-ball  with  them,  and  some  of  our  company 
went  on  shore  to  play  with  them  ;  but  nimble  as  they 
were,  as  often  as  they  struck  at  the  ball  our  men  won 
the  frame. 


A    SHIP   AT    SEA. 


PART    II 

ON    THE    SEA 


9.    The  foke  of  the  Pilot's  Boy 

By  Francis  Pretty  (157S) 

From  thence  we  went  to  a  certain  port  called 
Tarapaca,  where  we  landed  and  found  by  the  seaside 
a  Spaniard  lying  asleep.  Beside  him  there  lay  thir- 
teen bars  of  silver,  which  we  took,  leaving  the  man. 

Not  far  from  thence  we  went  on  land  for  fresh 
water,  and  met  a  Spaniard  and  an  Indian  boy  driving 
eight  lamas,  or  Peruvian  sheep,  which  were  as  big 
as  donkeys ;  each  one  of  these  sheep  had  on  his  back 
two  bags  of  leather,  each  bag  containing  fifty  pounds 
of  fine  silver.  So  we  brought  both  the  sheep  and 
their  burden  to  the  ship  and  found  we  had  obtained 
eight  hundred  weight  of  fine  silver. 

From  here  we  sailed  to  a  place  called  Arica. 
When  we  entered  port  we  found  three  small  brigs 
which  we  rifled,  and  found  in  one  of  them  fifty-seven 
wedges  of  silver,  each  of  them  weighing  about  twenty 
pounds  weight.  In  these  brigs  we  did  not  find  a 
single  person,  for  all  had  gone  ashore  to  the  town, 
which  consisted  of  about  twenty  houses.  If  our 
company  had  been  larger  we   would   have  rifled    the 

23 


Although 
England  was 
not  formally 
at  war  with 
Spain,  Sir 
Francis 
Drake  made 
a  voyage 
around  the 
world  during 
the  years 
1577-1580, 
with  the 
purpose  of 
capturing 
Spanish 
vessels  and 
towns ;  and 
Queen 
Elizabeth 
refused  to 
punish  him. 
The 

Spaniards 
had  never 
before  seen 
an  enemy  in 
the  Pacific 


24 


On  the  Sea 


[No.  9 


Ocean. 
The  places 
mentioned 
here  are  on 
the  west  coast 
of  South 
America. 


It  is  plain 
that  Drake 
was  little 
better  than 
a  common 
pirate, 
robbing 
innocent 
people  right 
and  left. 


Ordnance  = 
cannon. 


town,  but  our  general  contented  himself  with  the 
spoils  of  the  ships,  put  off  to  sea  again,  and  set  sail 
for  Lima. 

To  Lima  we  came  on  the  thirteenth  of  February,  and 
entering  port,  we  found  there  about  twelve  ships  lying 
fast  moored  to  their  anchors,  their  sails  having  been 
carried  on  shore.  Their  captains  and  the  merchants 
felt  most  secure  here,  never  having  been  assaulted 
by  the  negroes.  Our  general  rifled  these  ships  and 
found  in  one  of  them  a  chest  full  of  plate  and  good 
store  of  silks  and  linen  cloth.  This  chest  he  took  to 
his  own  ship.  While  he  was  on  board  this  ship  he 
got  news  of  another  ship,  called  the  Spitfire,  laden 
with  treasure  :  hereupon  we  stayed  there  no  longer, 
but  cutting  all  the  cables  of  the  enemies'  ships  in  the 
haven,  we  left  them  drift  whither  they  would,  either 
to  sea  or  to  shore,  and  with  all  speed  we  followed 
the  Spitfire  towards  Paita.  Before  we  arrived  there, 
the  Spaniards  shot  out  again  towards  Panama.  Our 
general  speedily  pursued.  But  we  met  a  brig  laden 
with  ropes  and  tackling ;  we  boarded  and  searched  it 
until  we  found  a  quantity  of  gold  and  golden  cruci- 
fixes set  with  large  emeralds. 

Thence  we  departed,  still  following  the  Spitfire, 
and  our  general  promised  the  company  that  whoso- 
ever should  first  descry  her  should  have  his  reward 
of  gold  for  his  good  news.  It  happened  that  John 
Drake,  going  up  to  the  top,  descried  her  at  about 
three  o'clock.  About  six  o'clock  we  came  to  her, 
shot  at  her  with  three  pieces  of  ordnance,  and  struck 
down  her  mizzenmast.  Next  we  entered  the  boat 
and  found  in  her  great  riches,  such  as  jewels,  pre- 
cious stones,  thirteen  chests  of  fine  plate,  four-score 
pound  weight  of  gold,  and  twenty-six  tons  of  silver. 


no.  10]  Sir  Francis  Drake  2  5 

The  place  where  we  took  this  prize  was  called  Cape  Not  San 
de  San  Francisco,  about  one  hundred  and  fifty  leagues   ^r^clsc.°' 

'  J  °  California; 

from  Panama.  though 

The  name  of  the  pilot  of  this  ship  was  Francisco.    Drake  went 
He   owned  two  fair   gilt  bowls  of   silver   which  our   si<mor=the 
General  found,  and  said :    "  Signor   Pilot,  you   have   Spanish 
here  two  silver  cups,  I  must  needs  have  one  of  them.    wordforslr- 
The  pilot,  because   he   could   not   choose   otherwise, 
yielded,  giving  one  to  the  General  and  the  other  to   The  Genei  ' 
the  steward  of  our  ship.     When  the  pilot  left  us,  his 
boy  said  to  our  General :   "  Captain,  our  ship  shall  be 
called  no  more  the  Spitfire,  but  the  Spittreasure,  and 
your  ship  shall  be  called  the  Spitfire."     This  bright 
speech  of  the  pilot's  boy  made  us  all  laugh,  both  then 
and  Ion?-  after. 


was  Drake 


10.    Far,  Far  at  Sea 


By  the  Rev.  Francis  Higginson   (1629)  Higginson 

called  this 


narrative 
The  true 


The  names  of  the  five  ships  were  as  follows  :  — 
The  first  was  called  the  Talbot,  a  good  and  strong  story  of  the 
ship  of    three  hundred  tons  and  nineteen  pieces  of   voyage  to 

1  •   1  r      1   •  •  t«i   •         1  •        New  Eng- 

ordnance,  with  a  crew  or  thirty  manners,      ihis  ship   iand,made 
carried  more  than  a  hundred  planters,  six  goats,  five   during  the 

£         1  -.i        n  r  ■      last  summer. 

great  pieces  or  ordnance,  with  all  manner  of  ammuni-   Reeunon 
tion  and  provisions  for  the  Plantation  for  a  twelfth-   the  25th  of 
month.  Apri1' l629-" 

The    second    ship   was    called    the    George.     This  Planters  = 
also  was  a  strong  ship  of  about  three  hundred   tons,  seUlcrs- 
with  a  crew  of  thirty  mariners.      Her  general   cargo  Plantation  = 
was  of  cattle,   twelve   mares,   thirty   cows,   and   some  settlement  or 

colony. 

goats.      She  had  fifty-two  planters  on  board. 


26 


On  the  Sea 


[No.  10 


This  is  not 
the  cele- 
brated 


The  third  ship  was  called  the  Lion's  Whelp,  and 
was  a  nimble  ship  of  one  hundred  and  twenty-two 
tons,  carrying  many  mariners  and  over  forty  planters 
with  provisions. 

The  fourth  ship  was  called  the  Four  Sisters. 

The  fifth  ship  was  called  the  Mayflower.  This  did 
carry  both  passengers  and  provisions. 


A    bllli'    AMONG    FLYING    FISH. 


voyage  of  the 
Mayflower 
to  Plymouth ; 
that  had 
been  nine 
years  earlier. 

Gravesend, 
at  the  mouth 
of  the 


The  George  having  some  special  urgent  reasons  for 
hastening  her  passage  set  sail  before  the  rest,  about 
the  middle  of  April.  We  who  took  ship  in  the  Tal- 
bot and  the  Lion's  Whelp  hoisted  sail  from  Graves- 
end  on  Saturday,  the  25th  of  April.  On  Tuesday, 
a  week  later,  we  entered  the  channel  early  in  the 
morning,  and  passed  by  Portsmouth  very  slowly  for 


No.  10] 


An  Emigrant 


27 


the  wind  was  weak  and  calm.  In  the  afternoon  the 
wind  slackened  and  we  were  forced  to  anchor,  a  little 
this  side  of  Cowes  Castle,  where  I  and  my  wife  and 
daughter  Mary,  the  two  mates,  and  some  others  with 
us  obtained  leave  from  the  master  of  the  ship  to  go 
ashore  to  wash  our  linen,  but  the  wind  turning  when 
we  were  absent,  they  hoisted  sail  and  left  us  there  at 
Cowes. 

Wednesday,  early  in  the  morning  a  shallop  was 
sent  from  the  ship  to  fetch  us  to  Yarmouth,  but  the 
weather  proved  rough  and  our  women  desired  to 
be  set  on  shore  at  a  point  three  miles  short  of  Yar- 
mouth, and  the  rest  of  the  way  we  went  on  foot,  and 
then  regained  the  ship.  The  next  Sabbath  being  the 
first  Lord's  Day  on  which  we  had  been  at  sea  we 
were  disturbed  in  our  morning  services  by  the  charge 
of  a  man-of-war.  The  captain  of  this  ship  finding  us 
too  strong  for  him  durst  not  venture  to  assail  us,  but 
made  off. 

This  day,  my  two  children,  Samuel  and  Mary, 
began  to  be  sick  of  the  small  pox,  which  was  brought 
into  the  ship  by  one  Mr.  Brown  who  was  sick  with 
the  small  pox  at  Gravesend.  By  Tuesday,  towards 
night,  my  daughter  grew  sicker.  She  died  by  five 
o'clock  that  night,  and  was  the  first  of  our  ship  to  be 
buried  in  the  great  Atlantic  Sea.  By  the  following 
Saturday  we  were  comforted  with  the  hope  that  my 
son  Samuel  would  get  well.  One  morning  while  we 
were  at  prayers,  a  strong  sudden  blast  of  wind  came 
from  the  south,  stirred  up  the  waves  and  tossed  us 
more  than  ever  before.  Towards  night  the  wind 
abated  by  little  and  little  until  it  was  calm.  Mr. 
Goffe's  great  dog,  that  fell  overboard  during  the  gale, 
could  not  be  recovered. 


Thames, 
below 

London.      It 
often  took  a 
saiiing  vessel 
a  week  to  get 
around  the 
south  of 
England. 
Channel  = 
English 
Channel. 
Cowes,  on 
Isle  of 
Wight. 

Shallop  =  a 
boat  without 
a  mast. 


Of  course  a 

hostile 

vessel. 

Small-pox 
was  very 
common  and 
very  dan- 
gerous till 
vaccination 
came  about 
a  century 
ago. 


28 


On  the  Sea 


[No.  ii 


Sixty  days ! 
The  fastest 
steamers  now 
cross  the 
same 

distance  in 
six  days. 
Cape  Sable, 
near  New- 
foundland. 
These  "  gilly- 
flowers " 
were  an  ordi- 
nary species 
of  marine 
flower. 


On  Wednesday,  just  two  months  after  we  left  our 
English  port,  we  had  a  clear  sight  of  America,  and 
of  Cape  Sable  which  was  seven  or  eight  leagues  to  the 
south.  On  the  sea  about  us  we  saw  yellow  gilly- 
flowers. About  the  afternoon  of  the  next  day  we  had 
a  clear  sight  of  many  islands  and  hills  by  the  seashore. 
We  saw  an  abundance  of  mackerel,  and  a  great  store 
of  whales  puffing  up  water  as  they  went  by  our  ship. 
Their  enormous  size  astonished  those  of  us  who  had 
not  seen  them  before ;  their  backs  appeared  like 
small  islands. 

Friday,  after  the  fog  cleared,  we  saw  many  schools 
of  mackerel  on  every  side  of  our  ship.  The  sea  was 
abundantly  stored  with  rock-weed  and  yellow  flowers. 
By  noon  we  were  within  three  leagues  of  Cape  Ann  ; 
and  as  we  sailed  along  the  coast  we  saw  every  hill 
and  dale  and  every  island  full  of  great  woods  and 
high  trees.  The  nearer  we  came  to  the  shore  the 
more  flowers  we  saw,  sometimes  scattered  abroad, 
sometimes  joined  in  sheets  nine  or  ten  yards  long. 
Towards  night,  we  came  near  the  harbor  of  Salem, 
whither  we  were  bound. 


The  Massa- 
chusetts 
settlement 
was  made  by 
a  rich  cor- 
poration, 
which  could 
send  over 


ii.    The  Ship  and  the  Indians 

By  Edward  Johnston  (1628) 

The  whole  Indian  nation  of  Massachusets  was 
frightened  at  a  ship  that  arrived  in  the  bay,  for  they 
had  never  seen  one  before.  They  themselves  report 
that  when  some  Indians  saw  a  great  thing  moving 
toward  them  upon  the  waters,  wondering  what  crea- 
ture it  could  be,  they  ran  with  their  light  canoes  from 


No.  ii] 


Indi 


tan   Visitors 


29 


place  to  place,  and  stirred  up  all  their  countrymen  to   hundreds  of 

come  forth  and  behold  this  monstrous  thins;.     At  this   PeoP|eata 

•  1  time- 

sudden  news  the  shores  for  many  miles  were  filled 

with  the  people  of  this  unclothed  nation.     They  gazed 

at  this  wonder  till  some  of  the  bravest  among  them   Birch  bark 

manned  their  canoes. 


canoes, 
fastened 


-'■•=; 'v-   '.:;■.-••_:■  -■'.-■  r--^ 


INDIANS    CANOEING. 


Armed  with    bows    and    arrows,   they  approached   together 
within   bow  shot  of   the   ship,   and   let   fly   their   long   ophite"" 
arrows   at   her.      These   were   headed   with   bone   and    cedar  trees, 
some  stuck   fast  in  the  wood.      Others  dropped   into 
the  water.     The  Indians  wondered  that  the  ship  did 
not  cry  out,  but  kept  moving  quietly  on  toward  them, 


3° 


0?i  the  Sea 


[No.  i? 


and  that  its  passengers  made  no  defence.  All  of  a 
sudden  the  master  caused  a  cannon  to  be  fired.  This 
struck  such  fear  into  the  poor  Indians  that  they  hur- 
ried to  shore,  and  their  wonder  was  greatly  increased. 

Once  again  the  great  crowd  of  Indians  waited  with 
amazement  to  see  the  outcome.  The  seamen  furled 
up  their  sails  and  came  to  anchor,  then  manned  their 
long  boat,  and  went  ashore.  At  their  approach  most 
of  the  Indians  fled,  but  some  saw  that  the  newcomers 
were  men,  who  made  signs  to  stop  their  flight,  in  order 
that  they  might  trade  with  the  natives.  For  that  pur- 
pose the  newcomers  had  brought  some  copper  kettles, 
and  the  Indians  by  degrees  made  their  approach  nearer 
and  nearer. 

Then  they  saw  clearly  the  kettles  which  had  been 
set  forth  before  them.  The  Indians  knocked  on  them 
and  were  much  delighted  with  the  sound.  They  were 
much  more  astonished  to  see  that  they  would  not 
break,  although  they  were  so  thin. 

To  obtain  those  kettles  the  Indians  brought  the 
white  men  many  beaver  skins.  They  loaded  the 
strangers  richly  according  to  their  wishes. 


12.    The  Ship  in  the  Air 


Over  the  harbor  of  New  Haven  appeared,  in  the 
evening,  the  form  of  a  ship  with  three  masts.     Sud- 

and    sails  were   to   be   seen. 


This  won- 
derful 
appearance 

was  probably  denly  all  the  tacklim 
a  mirage,  or  Shortly  after,  upon  the  ship  there  appeared  a  man, 
very  distant  standing  with  one  arm  akimbo  under  his  left  side  ; 
ship.  and  holding  in  his  right  hand  a  sword  stretched  out 

towards  the  sea. 


no.  12]  Ship  in  Air  3  1 

Then  from  the  side  of  the  ship  which  was  toward 
the  town  arose  a  great  smoke,  which  covered  all  the 
ship ;  and  in  that  smoke  she  vanished  away.  But 
some  saw  her  keel  sink  into  the  water.  This  was 
seen  by  many  men,  women,  and  children,  and  it 
lasted  about  a  quarter  of  an  hour. 

The  unhappy  mourners  of  relatives  lost  in  a  ship 
nearly  two  years  before,  tried  to  find  some  connection 
between  the  ship  in  the  air  and  their  own  sufferings. 
In  the  gloomy  and  sad  state  of  their  minds  they  tried 
to  find  some  meaning  in  the  strange  appearance. 

There  are  many  accounts  of  this  air-ship.  One 
says :  "  After  the  failure  of  news  of  their  ship  from 
England,  prayers,  both  public  and  private,  were  of- 
fered by  the  distressed  people.  They  prayed  that 
the  Lord  would,  if  it  was  His  pleasure,  let  them  hear 
what  He  had  done  with  their  dear  friends,  and  that 
He  would  help  them  to  bow  humbly  to  His  holy  will. 

"Then  a  great  thunder  storm  arose  out  of  the  north- 
west, and  a  ship  was  seen  sailing  against  the  wind. 
The  very  children  cried  out,  'There's  a  brave  ship.' 
The  air-ship  remained  before  their  eyes  and  came  up 
as  far  as  there  was  water  for  such  a  vessel.  It  came 
so  near  to  some  persons,  that  they  thought  a  man 
might  throw  a  stone  on  board  her." 

The  people  were  so  sure  and  satisfied  that  they 
had  seen  the  ship  that  they  believed  that  God,  for 
the  quieting  of  their  troubled  hearts,  had  been  willing 
to  send  this  wonderful  ship  to  tell  of  what  He  had 
done  to  those  for  whom  so  many  prayers  had  been 
made. 


32 


On  the  Sea 


[No.  13 


Phips  was  a 
Massachu- 
setts trader. 


Now  Buenos 
Ayres. 


Cotton 
Mather  was 
one  of  the 
greatest  New 
England 
ministers. 


13.    Treasure  at  the  Bottom  of 
the  Sea 

By  Cotton  Mather  (1692) 

Captain  William  Phips  frequently  told  his  wife 
that  he  would  yet  be  captain  of  a  king's  ship,  and 
that  he  should  be  the  owner  of  a  fair  brick  house  in 
the  green  land  north  of  Boston.  One  year  Captain 
Phips  arrived  with  a  ship  and  a  tender  at  Port  de  la 
Platta.  There  he  made  a  stout  canoe  of  a  stately 
cotton  tree,  large  enough  to  carry  eight  or  ten  per- 
sons. In  doing  this  he  used  his  own  hand  and  adze 
and  endured  no  little  hardship,  living  out  of  doors 
in  the  woods  many  nights  together.  With  this  canoe 
he  had  his  men  explore  the  reefs  of  shoals  thereabouts 
for  they  rise  to  within  two  or  three  feet  of  the  surface 
of  the  sea,  and  are  so  steep  that  a  ship  striking  on  them 
would  immediately  sink.  Captain  Phips  had  dragged 
from  an  old  Spaniard  in  a  previous  voyage  a  few 
facts  about  this  spot,  which  was  supposed  to  be  the 
very  spot  where  a  wreck  lay.  This  wreck  was  sup- 
posed to  hold  a  great  treasure. 

One  day  after  the  men  in  the  canoe  were  returning 
to  Captain  Phips  and  his  large  boat  with  bad  news 
about  their  day's  search,  one  of  the  men,  looking  over 
the  side  of  the  canoe  into  the  calm  water,  spied  a  sea 
feather  growing,  as  he  judged,  out  of  a  rock.  He 
bade  one  of  the  Indians  to  dive  down  and  fetch  this 
feather  that  they  might  carry  home  something  with 
them.  The  diver  who  brought  up  the  feather 
brought  also  a  surprising  story.  He  said  that  he 
saw  a  number  of  great  guns  down  in  the  watery  land 


no.  i3]  P hips' s    T) 


reasure 


33 


where  he  found  the  feather.  That  report  of  these 
guns  astonished  the  whole  company  exceedingly,  and 
at  once  turned  their  discouragement  for  their  ill-suc- 
cess into  assurances  that  they  had  now  come  to  the 
true  spot  of  ground  for  which  they  had  been  looking. 

Upon  further  diving  the  Indian  fetched  up  a  lump 
of  silver  worth  perhaps  two  or  three  hundred  pounds. 
They  prudently  marked  the  spot  with  a  buoy,  that 
they  might  find  it  readily  again.  Then  they  went 
back  to  their  captain,  who  for  some  time  had  de- 
spaired of  anything  but  bad  news.  They  gave  a 
similar  report  now,  meanwhile  slipping  the  lump  of 
silver  under  the  table  where  the  captain  was  sitting. 
After  hearing  him  express  his  determination  to  wait 
patiently  they  pushed  the  lump  to  the  spot  where  he 
was,  then  he  cried  out :  "  Why,  what  is  this  ?  "  With 
changed  countenances  the  men  told  him  how  and 
where  they  had  got  it.  Then  said  Captain  Phips : 
"  Thanks  be  to  God.     We  are  made." 

So  away  they  went,  all  hands  to  work.  Now  most 
happily  they  first  fell  upon  that  ruined  wreck  where 
the  bullion  had  been  stored,  and  they  prospered  so  in 
this  "  New  Fishery  "  that  in  a  little  while  they  brought 
up  thirty-two  tons  of  silver;  for  now  it  had  come  to 
measuring  silver  by  tons. 

Thus  once  again  there  came  into  the  light  of  the 
sun  a  treasure  which  had  been  groaning  under  the 
\\aters  for  half  a  hundred  years.  In  this  time  there 
had  grown  upon  the  plate  a  crust  like  limestone  seven 
inches  thick.  Besides  this  incredible  treasure  of 
plate  in  various  forms,  they  fetched  up  from  seven 
or  eight  fathoms  of  water  vast  riches  of  gold,  pearls 
and  jewels. 


$1000  to 

SI500. 


This  find  was 
worth  about 
a  million 
dollars. 


For  this  feat 
Phips  was 
made  "  Sir 
William 
Phips  "  by 
the  king  of 
England. 


34 


0?i  the  Sea 


[No.  14 


Pirates  or 
sea-robbers 
were  the 
curse  of  their 
times;  and 
there  are  still 
some  of  them 
in  the  seas 
east  of  Asia. 
Many  good 
ships  were 
destroyed 
by  them,  and 
thousands  of 
people 
killed,  for 
the  small 
gain  to  be 
had  from 
plundering 
vessels  and 
passengers 
of  their 
valuables. 
Sometimes 
they  landed 
and  sacked 
towns. 
This  does 
not  seem 
very  likely, 
—  many 
times  they 
fought  with 
each  other. 

New  Spain 
=  the 
Spanish 
possessions 
in  the  new 
world. 


14.      A   Pirate's   Pastimes 

BY    ESQUEMELIN    (1666) 

Before  the  pirates  go  to  sea,  they  give  notice  to 
all  concerned  of  the  day  on  which  they  are  to  sail. 
They  oblige  each  man  to  bring  so  many  pounds  of 
powder  and  gunballs.  When  all  have  come  aboard 
they  decide  where  to  get  food,  especially  meat ;  for 
they  eat  scarcely  anything  else. 

Sometimes  they  rob  such  and  such  hog-yards, 
where  the  Spaniards  often  have  a  thousand  hogs 
together.  They  come  to  these  places  in  the  night. 
They  surround  the  keeper's  house  and  force  him  to  get 
up  and  give  them  as  many  hogs  as  they  wish  to  have. 
They  threaten  to  kill  him  if  he  will  not  obey  or  if 
he  makes  any  noise.  When  they  have  meat  enough 
for  their  trip  they  return  to  their  ship.  When  well 
supplied  with  food,  they  begin  to  plan  where  they 
will  go  to  seek  their  fortunes. 

These  pirates  keep  very  good  order  among  them- 
selves. They  are  very  polite  and  kind  to  each  other, 
so  that  if  any  one  wants  what  another  has,  he  very 
willingly  gives  it  to  him. 

There  was  one  noted  pirate  who  lived  afterwards 
at  Jamaica.  He  did  many  surprising  things.  His 
real  name  was  not  known.  His  companions  called 
him  Rache  Brasiliano  because  he  had  long  lived  in 
Brazil.  He  joined  the  pirates  and  was  liked  so  much 
that  they  made  him  captain.  In  a  few  days  he  took  a 
great  ship  coming  from  New  Spain.  It  had  a  great 
quantity  of  gold  and  silver  on  board  which  he  carried 
to  Jamaica. 

For  this  the  pirates  thought  very  highly  of  him. 


No.  14] 


A  Pirate 


35 


But  in  his  private  affairs  he  governed  himself  very 
poorly.  He  would  sometimes  appear  brutal  and 
foolish  when  in  drink,  running  up  and  down  the 
streets  and  beating  or  injuring  those  he  met.  No 
person  dared  to  oppose  him. 

Once  while  on  a  journey  with  his  men,  all  were 
very  hungry  and  thirsty  ;  for  it  was  a  desert  place. 


freebooters'  pastimes. 


They  were  chased  by  a  troop  of  a  hundred  Span- 
iards. Brasiliano  seeing  their  danger  encouraged  his 
companions  by  telling  them  that  they  were  better 
soldiers  than  the  Spaniards  and  ought,  at  least,  to 
die  with  their  arms  in  their  hands  fighting,  like  men 
of  courage.  That,  he  said,  would  be  better  than  to 
surrender  to  the  Spaniards  who  would  take  away 
their  lives  with  torments. 


36 


On  the  Sea 


[No.  14 


On  the  island 
of  San 
Domingo. 
To  be 
attacked  by 
pirates  was 
exactly  like 
being 

attacked  by  a 
horde  of 
furious  wild 
beasts, 
except  that 
no  wild 
animals 
could  be  so 
cruel  as  men. 


The  pirates  were  but  thirty  in  number,  yet  seeing 
their  brave  captain  show  such  courage  they  resolved 
to  do  the  same.  So  they  faced  the  troop  of  Span- 
iards, and  discharged  their  guns  at  them  so  well  that 
they  killed  one  horseman  with  almost  every  shot. 
The  fight  lasted  an  hour  ;  then  the  Spaniards  were 
put  to  flight.  The  pirates  took  from  the  dead  what 
was  most  useful. 

Captain  Henry  Morgan  was  another  noted  pirate. 
He  was  born  in  England.  His  father  was  a  rich 
farmer  of  good  rank.  When  Morgan  was  young  he 
had  no  wish  to  be  a  farmer.  So  he  left  his  own  coun- 
try, and  found  two  pirates  ready  to  go  to  sea ;  and  he 
went  with  them.  He  learned  their  manner  of  living 
so  exactly  that  he  became  in  time  a  pirate  captain. 
Finally  he  had  twelve  ships  with  seven  hundred 
fighting  men.  They  decided  to  attack  the  town  of 
Puerto  de  Principe.  It  was  at  a  distance  from  the 
sea,  and  had  never  been  plundered  by  any  pirates 
and  they  knew  that  the  people  living  there  were  rich. 

Captain  Morgan  and  his  men  set  sail,  steering 
towards  Puerto  de  Principe.  When  they  came  into 
its  bay,  a  Spaniard  who  was  a  prisoner  aboard  the 
pirate  ships  swam  ashore  by  night  to  the  town  and 
told  its  people  of  the  plan  of  the  pirates.  This  he 
had  overheard  in  their  talk  while  they  thought  he 
did  not  understand  English.  Upon  hearing  this  the 
Spaniards  began  to  hide  their  riches  and  carry  away 
their  movables. 

The  governor  gathered  together  all  the  men  of  the 
town  and  took  a  stand  where  the  pirates  would  be 
obliged  to  pass.  He  commanded  many  trees  to  be 
cut  down  and  laid  across  their  path  to  hinder  their 
passing,  when  the  pirates  arrived.      The  Spaniards 


No.  14] 


A  Pirate 


37 


charged  them  very  bravely  for  a  while,  but  the  pirates 
were  very  skilful  with  their  guns.  The  governor  with 
many  of  his  companions  was  killed,  and  the  Span- 
iards fled  into  the  woods  to  save  themselves.  But 
before  they  could  reach  it,  most  of  them  were  killed 
by  the  pirates. 

Many  people  upon  seeing  the  pirates  in  the  town, 
shut  themselves  up  in  their  houses,  and  from  them 
shot  at  the  pirates.  The  pirates  then  threatened 
them  saying,  —  "  If  you  do  not  give  up  willingly  you 
shall  soon  see  the  town  in  flames.  Your  wives  and 
children  also  will  be  killed  before  your  faces." 

At  these  threats  the  Spaniards  surrendered.  As 
soon  as  the  pirates  got  possession  of  the  town,  they 
shut  up  all  the  men,  women  and  children  and  slaves 
in  several  churches.  They  stole  everything  they 
could  find.  They  also  searched  the  country  round 
about,  bringing  in  daily  many  goods  and  prisoners 
and  much  food. 

Then  they  had  a  merry  time  as  is  their  way. 
They  did  not  remember  the  poor  prisoners,  but  gave 
them  nothing  to  eat  so  that  nearly  all  died  of  their 
misery. 


The  pirates 
got  away 
with  their 
booty,  but 
at  a  later 
attack  on 
another 
Spanish 
town, 

Morgan  and 
his  followers 
were  beaten 
by  the 
Spaniards. 


3§ 


On  the  Sea 


[No.  15 


This  is  one 
of  the  boldest 
defences 
known  in 
American 
history.     A 
privateer 
was  a  vessel 
authorized  to 
capture  an 
enemy's 
property,  but 
the  piiva- 
teersmen 
often  were 
little  better 
than  pirates, 
as  in  tnis  case. 


15.    The  Privateers'  Attack 

By  John  Fontaine  (1708) 

With  a  constant  apprehension  of  attack  before 
ns,  we  lived  on  the  qui  vive  from  the  first  day  of 
June,  1704,  until  the  eighth  day  of  October,  1708, 
when,  with  all  our  precautions,  we  were  actually 
taken  by  surprise. 

A  French  privateer  entered  the  harbor  during  the 
night,  and  anchored  off  Bear  Haven,  about  five  miles 
from  my  house,  and  entirely  out  of  our  sight.  She 
hoisted  English  colors  by  way  of  deception.  She  suc- 
ceeded in  her  wish,  for  the  officer  no  sooner  dis- 
covered her,  than  he  concluded  she  was  a  vessel  just 
arrived  from  America,  and  went  down  with  two  or 
three  soldiers  of  his  company. 

He  was  in  great  haste  to  be  the  first  to  board  her, 
in  order  to  regale  himself  with  rum  punch,  a  beverage 
of  which  he  was  unhappily  much  too  fond.  He  was 
made  a  prisoner  the  instant  his  foot  touched  the  deck 
of  the  vessel,  but  the  captain  and  the  officers  behaved 
towards  him  with  the  greatest  civility. 

He  was  a  little  shocked  at  first,  but  they  made  him 
so  very  welcome,  treating  him  to  the  best  of  wine 
and  brandy,  that  he  soon  lost  the  remembrance  of 
his  situation.  He  gave  the  captain  all  the  informa- 
tion he  wanted,  and  it  was  of  a  nature  to  encourage 
him  to  proceed.  He  told  him  that  the  soldiers  were 
dispersed  without  any  commander,  for  the  captain 
and  lieutenant  were  both  absent,  as  well  as  himself. 
He  was  sure  it  would  be  very  easy  to  surprise  my 
house,  for  I  had  no  one  near  enough  to  help  me  but 
my  own  family.     Upon  the  strength  of  this  informa- 


No.  15] 


A  P 


nvateer 


39 


tion,  the  captain  prepared  for  going  ashore,  and 
sent  eighty  men  in  three  boats,  commanded  by  two 
lieutenants. 

They  quitted  the  ship  at  midnight,  and  landed  be- 
fore it  was  light.  They  commenced  their  march  about 
daybreak,  in  perfect  silence,  and  stooping  very  low, 
in  order  that  they  might  be  neither  seen  nor  heard. 
An  Irish  servant  who  was  fetching  home  the  cows 
was  the  first  person  to  discover  them,  marching  in 
good  order,  and  only  the  distance  of  a  long  musket 
shot  from  the  house.  He  ran  home  as  fast  as  he 
could,  and  cried  out  that  we  were  all  lost,  for  a  number 
of  armed  men  were 
in  sight. 

We  got  up  di- 
rectly, and  I  ordered 
every  door  to  be 
shut,  but  there  was 
so  much  confusion 
that  the  gates  of  the 
large  court  in  front, 
and  even  the  house 
door  below  the  tower 
were  forgotten  and 
left  open  for  some 
time.  This  was  per- 
ceived by  the  enemy 
as  we  afterwards 
learned  ;  but  it  was 
supposed  to  have 
been  done  on  pur- 
pose as  a  feint,  and 
that  we  must  have  a 
loaded  cannon  with-  portrait  ok  a  pirate. 


4-0  On  the  Sea  [No.  i5 

in  ready  to  fire  if  any  one  approached.  When  the 
men  were  near  enough  to  hear  me,  I  hailed  them 
through  a  speaking-trumpet.  I  told  them  if  they 
were  friends  to  stop,  and  let  us  know  who  they  were, 
and  if  enemies,  to  come  forward,  and  we  would  re- 
ceive them  with  vigor. 

In  the  meantime  my  children  were  busily  engaged 
loading  our  arms  and  putting  them  in  order.  The 
men  continued  to  advance.  I  ordered  my  son  James 
to  fire  upon  them  from  a  garret  window  with  our 
largest  gun,  which  was  six  feet  long.  This  made 
them  lower  their  heads ;  they  then  separated  into  six 
detachments  and  took  various  posts.  Some  of  them, 
under  cover  of  hedges  and  ditches,  contrived  to  get 
round  to  the  back  of  the  house.  They  had  deter- 
mined to  root  us  out  this  time,  for  their  first  act  was 
to  set  fire  to  the  malt-house,  which  was  towards  the 
east,  then  to  the  stacks  of  hay,  straw  and  grain  which 
were  at  the  north  and  east,  and  after  that  to  the  cow- 
house, stable,  and  long  fish-press  which  were  at  the 
west  of  my  house. 

These  were  all  very  combustible.  In  less  than 
half  an  hour  we  were  encompassed  with  flames  on 
every  side  but  one.  By  reason  of  the  fire  and  smoke 
between  them  and  us,  we  were  unable  to  see  our 
enemies,  and  we  suffered  much  from  the  smoke, 
which  found  its  way  to  us  through  every  crevice. 

I  ordered  the  servants  to  put  water  in  every  tub 
and  bucket  that  could  be  found,  and  then  immerse 
sheep-skins  with  wool  upon  them,  and  ox-skins,  of 
both  which  we  had  many  in  the  house.  When  these 
were  thoroughly  saturated  I  had  them  placed  in  the 
windows,  as  being  the  most  exposed  parts  of  the 
house.     My  dear  wife  superintended  these  arrange- 


no.  i5]  A  Privateer  4 1 

ments.  The  roof  was  slated,  so  there  appeared  but 
little  danger  of  fire  being  communicated  to  us  through 
that  channel. 

The  whole  garrison  consisted  of  my  wife  and  my- 
self, our  children  and  four  servants.  Two  of  the 
latter  were  mere  cowboys,  and  the  other  two  had 
never  seen  a  battle.  We  fired  hap-hazard,  as  fast  as 
we  could  load.  We  did  so,  because  we  could  actually 
see  nothing  but  fire  and  smoke,  and  therefore  could 
not  aim  at  our  enemies. 

My  chief  apprehension  arose  from  the  fear  that 
they  might  possess  themselves  of  our  cannon  and 
turn  them  against  ourselves.  Therefore  I  thought 
that  while  unable  to  see  what  our  assailants  were 
doing,  I  could  not  employ  myself  better  than  in  firing 
my  large  blunderbuss  every  few  minutes  in  the  direc- 
tion of  the  cannon. 

While  I  was  firing  at  random,  I  had  a  glimpse  of  a 
man  setting  fire  to  the  covering  of  the  fish-press.  I 
took  deliberate  aim  at  him  with  my  blunderbuss,  loaded 
as  usual  with  swan-shot,  and  wounded  him  in  several 
places,  but  not  seriously. 

While  we  were  blinded  and  suffocated  by  the  smoke 
from  the  burning  stacks,  our  adversaries  raised  a  small 
mound  of  turf  and  wood,  behind  which  they  intrenched 
themselves.  They  set  to  work  with  long  poles  to 
detach  the  slates  from  the  roof  of  the  north-east  tower. 
As  soon  as  they  uncovered  a  portion,  they  applied  fire 
to  it,  by  means  of  burning  straw  at  the  end  of  their 
poles,  and  in  this  way  the  roof  was  on  fire  three  times, 
and  we  as  often  extinguished  it  from  within. 


4.2  On  the  Sea  [No.  16 

1 6.    How  the  Boys  fought  the 
Privateersmen 

By  John  Fontaine  (1708) 

About  two  o'clock  in  the  afternoon,  they  accom- 
plished making  a  breach  in  the  wall  of  this  same  north- 
east tower.  We  could  see  them  at  work  with  iron 
bars.  While  they  were  so  engaged  my  children  fired 
upon  them.  They  formed  a  sort  of  rampart  with  a 
mattress  on  the  top  of  a  large  basket,  such  as  is  used 
in  the  country  for  carrying  peat.  They  knelt  behind 
this  rampart,  and  fired  as  fast  as  they  could  one  after 
the  other,  without  daring  to  show  their  noses. 

The  enemy  still  continued  at  work  with  their  long 
poles  and  firebrands  endeavoring  to  set  the  roof  on 
fire.  When  the  smoke  had  subsided  a  little,  I  hit  upon 
a  position  from  which  I  could  see  to  take  aim  at  their 
hands,  as  they  raised  them  above  their  intrenchment 
to  guide  the  poles. 

I  fired,  and  I  thought  I  hit  them,  but  as  they  still 
persevered  in  their  work  I  began  to  think  it  proba- 
ble that  I  had  not  put  a  sufficient  charge  in  the  piece, 
so  when  I  loaded  again  I  put  in  a  double  quantity  of 
powder.  I  had  no  sooner  loaded  than  I  had  the  oppor- 
tunity of  aiming  at  a  hand  I  saw  raised.  I  fired,  but 
my  piece  was  overloaded,  and  it  burst,  by  which 
unfortunate  accident  I  was  thrown  down  with  much 
violence.  Three  of  my  ribs  and  my  right  collar-bone 
were  broken,  and  the  flesh  of  my  right  hand  was  much 
torn.  I  was  so  completely  stunned  that  I  had  no  power 
to  move,  or  even  to  breathe  for  some  seconds. 

My  wife  saw  me  fall,  and  she  naturally  concluded 


no.  16]  Boys'  Defe/ice  43 

I  had  been  struck  by  a  ball  from  the  enemy.  She  ran 
to  my  assistance,  and  raised  me  up  without  making 
any  noise  whatever.  As  soon  as  I  was  able  to  articu- 
late, I  told  her  how  it  had  happened.  After  I  was 
prostrated,  my  dearest  wife  assumed  the  command. 
She  had  an  eye  to  every  thing.  She  went  round  to 
furnish  ammunition  as  it  was  required,  and  she  gave 
courage  as  well  by  her  exhortations  as  by  her  example. 

My  sons  defended  the  breach  by  an  incessant  fire 
from  behind  their  mattress  rampart.  At  last,  a  gre- 
nade was  thrown  in  at  the  breach,  which  ran  under 
the  basket.  It  overturned  the  whole  affair,  but  with- 
out doing  any  harm,  thanks  be  to  God,  except  giving 
the  boys  a  fright  which  made  them  abandon  their  post; 
but  only  for  a  very  short  time. 

One  of  them  ran  to  me,  in  great  dismay,  to  tell  me 
that  the  hole  was  as  large  as  any  door,  and  that  the 
enemy  were  entering  by  it.  The  other  boys  were  still 
firing  from  the  dormer  windows. 

I  immediately  rose  from  my  bed,  and  asked  them 
to  give  me  a  pistol  ready  cocked  and  loaded,  which  I 
took  in  my  left  hand,  the  right  being  useless.  I  called 
my  family  around  me,  and  I  said  to  them,  "  I  see,  my 
dear  children,  that  we  must  be  overpowered  by  the 
great  number  of  those  who  are  attacking  us.  It  is 
inevitable  ;  but  we  will  not  stand  quietly  to  be  killed 
like  dogs.  Let  us  rather  sell  our  lives  dearly,  and  die 
like  lions."  I  was  advancing  towards  the  breach  while 
I  said  these  words. 

As  soon  as  I  had  done  speaking,  my  poor  boys 
re-entered  the  room,  and  took  up  their  old  position 
without  a  word  or  a  gesture  indicative  of  fear.  They 
replaced  their  basket  and  mattress,  exposed  to  the  fire 
of  more  than  ten  muskets.      It  was,  indeed,  a  melan- 


44 


On  the  Sea  [No.  16 


choly  sight !  At  the  same  time,  I  was  gratified  with 
their  display  of  unflinching  courage.  Blessed  be  thou, 
O  my  God  !  who  preserved  them  from  injury  amid 
such  a  shower  of  balls. 

When  they  resumed  the  fire,  the  enemy  retreated 
from  the  breach,  and  did  not  dare  to  show  their  heads, 
or  even  their  hands.  This  caused  all  their  fire  to  be 
thrown  away  ;  for,  by  not  raising  the  butt-end  of  their 
muskets,  they  carried  too  high,  and  the  shot  went  far 
above  us  every  time.  Seeing  that  we  did  not  give  way 
in  the  least,  they  began  to  tire  of  our  obstinate  resist- 
ance. They  might  possibly  have  heard  me  speak  to 
the  children,  and  it  is  very  certain  they  overrated  our 
force  extremely.  From  the  constant  fire  in  all  direc- 
tions, as  well  as  upon  the  main  point  of  attack,  they 
concluded  that  we  must  have  at  least  twenty  men. 
They  called  out  to  us  to  surrender,  and  they  would 
give  us  good  quarter. 

I  held  a  conversation  with  my  wife  and  children, 
and  we  determined,  at  any  rate,  to  hear  what  terms 
they  offered.  The  firing  was  stopped  on  both  sides, 
and  I  advanced  to  the  breach  to  hold  parley  with  them. 
One  of  the  lieutenants  came  forward  and  took  aim  at 
me.  My  second  son,  Peter,  saw  what  he  was  about, 
before  I  observed  him.  He  immediately  caught  hold 
of  me  and  drew  me  to  one  side,  barely  in  time  to  save 
me  from  being  the  victim  of  their  treachery  ;  for  the 
ball  passed  within  two  or  three  inches  of  my  stomach. 

I  was  extremely  indignant,  and  said,  "  Ah  !  you 
traitors  !  was  it  then  merely  with  the  view  of  surpris- 
ing me,  that  you  proposed  a  parley  ?  Fire  upon  these 
traitors,  my  sons.  Fire,  I  say."  The  boys  obeyed 
me  without  loss  of  time,  and  fired  upon  the  deceitful 
miscreants.    I  had  foolishly  exposed  myself  to  a  very 


no.  i6j  Boys'  Defence  45 

great  danger,  by  placing  confidence  in  the  good  faith 
of  an  enemy  whom  I  might  have  known  was  destitute 
of  all  honorable  feeling.  The  ever  watchful  provi- 
dence of  God  again  interposed  for  my  deliverance. 

We  kept  up  an  incessant  fire  for  another  quarter  of 
an  hour,  when  the  enemy  called  out  to  us  again,  and 
made  a  second  offer  of  good  quarter.  I  reproached 
them  with  their  recent  perfidy,  and  told  them  I  could 
not  trust  persons  who  had  already  attempted  to  betray 
the  confidence  I  had  reposed  in  them. 

They  then  threatened  that,  if  we  refused  to  surren- 
der, they  would  throw  a  barrel  of  powder  in  the  breach, 
and  blow  us  all  up. 

"  I  have  three  or  four  at  your  service  here,"  said  I, 
"and  I  intend  to  scatter  their  contents  over  this  floor 
and  the  inner  hall,  and  whenever  you  are  pleased  to 
enter,  I  will  throw  a  lighted  turf  upon  it,  and  make 
you  dance.  You  may  depend  upon  it,  I  will  not  per- 
ish without  you." 

The  desperate  tone  of  this  reply  made  them  repeat 
once  more  their  offer  of  good  quarter.  So  we  had 
a  cessation  of  hostilities  on  both  sides.  Their  propo- 
sition was,  that  they  should  have  the  plunder,  to  which 
I  assented.  I  demanded  life  and  liberty  for  myself 
and  all  who  were  with  me. 

He  was  to  guarantee  life  and  liberty  to  all  of  us, 
and  to  promise  on  their  part  the  most  strictly  honora- 
ble deportment  while  in  possession,  and  they  were  to 
have  the  plunder.  They  swore  to  the  observance  of 
these  terms.  I  then  had  the  doors  opened,  and  ranged 
myself,  my  wife,  my  sons  and  four  servants  in  regu- 
lar order,  to  surrender  our  arms  to  the  Commander, 
as  he  entered. 

Oh,  God!  our   Preserver!   thou   knowest,  and  none 


46 


On  the  Sea 


[No.   17 


else  can  know  the  state  of  my  feelings  at  that  moment, 
to  see  my  beloved  wife  and  dear  children,  at  the  mercy 
of  enemies,  fourteen  of  whom  we  had  wounded.  Oh  ! 
what  everlasting  praises  do  we  owe  to  thee  for  our 
preservation.  It  was  thou  who  restrained  our  blood- 
thirsty enemies  from  executing  the  vengeance  which 
they  had  sworn  against  us.  Oh,  my  God  !  I  beseech 
thee  to  sanctify  the  lives  which  thou  hast  so  miracu- 
lously preserved,  and  assist  us  to  devote  them  to  thy 
service ! 

The  Commander,  and  a  good  many  of  the  men  came 
in,  and  seeing  only  five  youths,  and  four  cowherds, 
they  looked  anxiously  around,  and  asked  me  where 
all  my  men  were,  evidently  fearing  an  ambuscade. 

"  You  need  not  fear  anything  dishonorable  from 
me,"  said  I,  "you  now  see  our  whole  garrison." 
"Impossible,"  said  he,  "these  children  could  never 
have  kept  up  all  the   firing." 

My  wife  then  spoke  to  him,  and  said,  "  I  am  in  hopes, 
sir,  that  the  fact  of  so  few  persons  having  made  this 
gallant  defence,  will  be  an  inducement  to  you  —  whom 
I  trust  we  shall  find  a  man  of  honor  —  to  treat  us  with 
the  more  consideration."  Struck  with  her  courage  the 
Commander  ordered  a  guard  to  protect  us,  and  con- 
tented himself  with  sweeping  away  what  remained  of 
our  place. 


*7< 


A  Pirate's  Fate 


By  Benjamin  Colman  (1726) 

In  many  The    story   of    these   wretched    men  is   short   and 

cases  piracy    tragical.       They    sailed    from     Jamaica    on    board    a 

began  with  °  J  * 

mutiny  and      snow,   John  Green,    Commander,    bound   to   Guinea. 


No.  17] 


Pirate  s  Fate 


47 


They  had  not  been  long  at  sea  before  they  conspired  the  seizure 
to  seize  the  captain  and  mate  and  then  go  a-pirating.    oftheshlPby 

r  °  r  °      the  sailors. 

On   the   27th   of   May,    1726,    they  put  in  execution 

their  wicked  design,  in  a  most  cruel  and  barbarous 

manner.     About  one  o'clock  in  the  morning,  William 

Fly,  then  boatswain  of  the   snow  "Elizabeth,"  after  a  snow  is  a 

he   had    been   for   some    time   forward    with    several    sortofbns- 

of  the  sailors,  came  aft  with  Alexander  Mitchel  and 

others,  and  said  to  Morrice  Cunden  (gunner  of  the 

ship),    then    at    the    helm.      "You,    dog,   if   you   stir 

hand  or  foot,  or  speak  a  word,  I'll  blow  your  brains 

out!" 

And  immediately  thereupon  he  went  into  the 
cabin  where  Captain  Green  was  in  bed,  and  Alex- 
ander Mitchel  followed  him  ;  and  while  they  were 
there  Morrice  Cunden  heard  the  captain  cry  out: 
"What's  the  matter?"  But  they  soon  hauled  him 
upon  deck,  and  were  about  to  throw  him  overboard ; 


A   Sill!'   OF   WAR, 


4§ 


On  the  Sea  [No.  i7 


he  was  heard  calling  earnestly  to  the  doctor  to  hand 
him  a  rope.  But  the  doctor  was  by  this  time  himself 
in  irons.  Thus  bloodily  these  inhuman  creatures  be- 
gan their  piracy,  but  vengeance  followed  them  and 
suffered  them  not  to  live. 

William  Fly,  the  chief  and  worst  (we  may  suppose) 
of  these  barbarous  rogues,  took  on  him  the  command, 
and  named  the  snow  the  "  Fame's  Revenge."  They 
were  well  stored  with  powder,  and  rum  and  pro- 
visions, but  wanted  a  better  vessel ;  and  in  quest  of 
this  it  is  likely  they  bent  their  course,  first  to  Caro- 
lina, and  from  thence  to  New  England.  On  the 
third  of  June  they  took  a  sloop  at  anchor  off  North 
Carolina,  on  board  of  which  was  Mr.  William  Atkin- 
son, a  passenger ;  who  was  afterwards  the  happy 
instrument  in  the  hand  of  God  for  their  destruction. 
They  very  much  needed  one  so  well  skilled,  as  Atkin- 
son was  both  a  mariner  and  pilot ;  and  Fly  treated 
him  well  on  that  account,  but  kept  a  strict  eye  upon 
him,  forbidding  him  to  have  any  conversation  with 
the  forced  men ;  and,  lest  he  should  talk  to  them,  he 
had  a  hammock  hung  for  him  in  the  cabin. 

They  commanded  him  to  carry  them  to  Martha's 
Vineyard  in  order  to  wood  and  water  there,  and  in 
hopes  to  meet  with  some  sloop  fitting  for  their  purpose. 
But  he  resolved  to  run  the  venture  of  carrying  them 
past  the  Vineyard,  and  run  them  up  into  or  near  the 
bay  before  they  were  aware  of  it.  When  they  per- 
ceived it  they  began  to  look  upon  him  with  an  evil 
eye,  and  spake  of  throwing  him  overboard.  But  as 
Fly  was  uttering  his  rage  at  him  the  next  morning 
on  this  account,  and  telling  him  what  death  he  should 
die  if  anything  ill  befell  them  through  his  conduct, 
a  schooner  came  in  sight,  which  put  an  end  to  Fly's 


no.  i7]  Pirate  s  Fate  49 

rage,  for  the  joy  of  a  good  prize.  They  found  it  a 
schooner  of  Marblehead,  George  Girdler,  Master. 

Mr.  Atkinson  had  some  time  before  this  meditated 
the  seizing  on  Fly  and  his  company,  and  found  means 
secretly  to  communicate  his  mind  to  some  on  board, 
whom  he  thought  he  might  trust ;  particularly  to 
Samuel  Walker,  and  Thomas  Streaton  ;  and  Walker 
had  spoken  of  it  to  James  Benbrook  ;  who  all  con- 
sented if  a  fair  opportunity  should  offer. 

It  was  very  necessary  to  his  design  to  ingratiate 
himself,  as  far  as  he  honestly  and  with  a  good  con- 
science could,  with  Fly  and  his  pirates.  Yet  in  doing 
this  he  ran  a  risk  both  of  his  innocence  and  his  life ; 
of  his  innocence,  for  "  with  a  furious  man  thuU  shalt 
not  go,  lest  thou  learn  his  ways  and  get  a  snare  to 
thv  soul ;  "  and  of  his  life,  for  as  some  of  the  pirates, 
the  captain  especially,  began  to  think  friendly  of 
him  and  to  hearken  to  his  advice  (they  all  depending 
on  him  to  navigate  the  ship).  If  a  ship  of  war  had 
taken  them,  it  is  to  be  feared  that  he  had  in  vain 
pleaded  his  innocence  and  good  intentions.  But  the 
good  God  who  preserved,  has  also  pleaded  his  inno- 
cence. And  we  ought  to  praise  his  virtue,  conduct 
and  courage,  and  give  God  the  glory  of  it. 

Fly  had  no  sooner  taken  the  schooner  of  Marble- 
head,  when  they  discovered  another  at  a  distance  from 
them.  Whereupon  he  put  three  men  on  board  the 
schooner,  and  purposed  to  bear  down  on  the  new 
sail  with  both  his  vessels.  But  Mr.  Atkinson  with 
a  read}'  thought  advised  him  to  put  six  men  into  the 
schooner,  and  send  her  down  on  the  fishing  vessels, 
for  the  schooner  had  been  one  of  their  company  but 
a  day  before,  and  so  there  would  be  no  likelihood  of 
their  flying  from  her:   "but,"  said  he,  "if  the  snow 

E 


5  o  On  the  Sea  [No.  i7 

and  the  schooner  now  bear  down  together,  they'll 
take  you  for  what  you  are,  and  make  away  from  you." 
Fly  came  into  his  advice  and  put  three  men  more 
into  the  schooner,  and  parted  with  her,  standing  a 
course  wide  from  her. 

Now  Atkinson's  thoughts  were  hard  at  work  how 
to  draw  Fly  away  from  his  arms  on  the  quarter-deck. 
For  there  he  kept  alone,  nor  would  suffer  Atkinson 
to  step  up,  so  much  as  to  set  down  the  bowl  of 
punch  after  he  had  drank  to  him.  And  probably 
a  message  which  he  received  from  a  chief  pirate  on 
board  the  schooner,  "  To  have  a  special  care  of  his 
friend,"  did  increase  his  jealousy;  though  he  seemed 
only  to  laugh  at  it. 

Within  a  little  while  Atkinson  spied  a  sail  ahead 
to  the  leeward,  and  informed  Fly  of  it.  And  pres- 
ently after  he  pretended  to  discover  two  or  three 
more  sail,  and  told  him  he  would  have  a  fleet  of 
prizes.  But  Fly  with  his  glass  could  see  but  one. 
"Why,"  said  Atkinson,  "if  you  were  but  here,  sir, 
with  your  glass,  ahead,  you  would  easily  see  them 
all."  On  a  sudden  Fly  forgot  his  caution,  and  comes 
off  the  quarter-deck,  where  his  arms  lay,  and  sits 
him  down  ahead  to  spy  the  sails  spoken  of.  Then 
Atkinson  gave  the  sign  to  his  friends,  and  Walker 
followed  by  Benbrook  came  up,  pretending  at  first 
to  direct  the  captain  to  look  a  point  or  two  on  such 
a  side,  while  Atkinson  (a  spare  and  slender  man) 
passed  aft  toward  the  arms,  and  in  the  instant  that 
Walker  laid  hold  of  Fly  he  took  the  fire-arms,  and 
returned  pointing  the  gun  to  the  pirate's  breast,  and 
telling  him  "  He  was  a  dead  man  if  he  did  not  im- 
mediately submit  himself  his  prisoner."  The  wicked 
Fly  earnestly  begged  for  his  life,  and  now  found  that 


no.  i7]  Pirate  s  Fate  5  1 

mercy  which  he  had  so  barbarously  denied  to  his 
innocent  captain. 

When  Fly  found  himself  chained  down  and  effectu- 
ally secured,  he  fell  at  times  into  the  most  desperate 
ragings ;  the  same  blasphemer  now  in  his  furious 
despair,  or  worse  than  he  ever  was  before  in  his 
jollity  and  pride ;  when  he  would  sometimes  even 
dare  to  ridicule  the  noise  of  God's  thunder,  as  it 
rattled  over  him,  saying,  "  That  they  were  playing 
bowls  in  the  air,"  etc.,  and  as  the  lightnings  some- 
times flashed  upon  them,  he  would  say  —  "  Who  fires 
now?  Stand  by,"  etc.  —  So  he  dared  the  dreadful 
vengeance,  which  pursued  him  swift  as  the  lightnings 
and  suddenly  struck  him. 

But  Capt.  Atkinson  and  his  brave  mates  are  much 
to  be  praised,  that  they  dealt  so  mercifully  with  these 
bloody  men ;  and  neither  "  blew  their  brains  out " 
(their  own  phrase)  nor  threw  them  overboard.  Blessed 
be  God  that  kept  them  that  day  from  shedding  blood, 
and  from  avenging  themselves  with  their  own  hands. 
It  was  much  better  to  reserve  the  murderers  to  the 
judgment  of  the  law,  in  the  proper  course  of  it.  Capt. 
Atkinson  and  his  company  now  made  the  best  of 
their  way  for  the  port  of  Boston. 


52 


On  the  Sea 


[No.  18 


Rev.  George 

Whitefield, 

the  great 

preacher, 

describes 

some  of  the 

incidents 

of  his  voyage 

to  America 

in  1737. 


18.    Sharks  and  Water  Spouts 

By  Rev.  George  Whitefield  (1737) 

My  dear  Friends,  — 

Though  I  know  no  reason  why  you  should  be  solic- 
itous about  anything  that  happens  to  such  a  dead 
dog  as  I  am,  yet  as  your  love  (O  unmerited  Kindness) 
abounds  exceedingly  towards  me,  I  send  you  a  full 
and  particular  account  of  my  voyage. 

Monday,  Feb.  20,  1737.  —  I  spent  the  morning  on 
board  in  writing  letters  to  my  dear  friends  in  England. 
Went  in  the  afternoon  on  shore  to  Gibralter,  and  was 
unspeakably  delighted  with  the  prospect  of  the  place. 
The  seeing  persons  of  all  nations  and  languages  gave 
me  great  pleasure. 

Saturday,  March  18.  —  The  weather  being  exceed- 
ingly fair,  and  the  sea  calm,  I  went  with  the  Captain 
on  board  the  Lightfoot.  Dined  with  the  gentlemen 
belonging  to  the  ship ;  married  a  couple  ;  dispersed 
Bibles,  testaments  and  soldiers'  monitors  amongst  the 
men.  Exchanged  some  books  for  some  cards  which 
I  threw  overboard.  Preached  a  sermon  against  drunk- 
enness which  God  enabled  me  to  finish  yesterday ; 
and  returned  in  the  evening  highly  delighted  with 
seeing  the  porpoises  roll  about  the  great  deep. 

Monday,  March  20. —  To-day  the  Colonel  came  to 
dine  with  us,  and  in  the  midst  of  our  meal  we  were 
entertained  with  a  most  agreeable  sight.  It  was  a 
shark  about  the  length  of  a  man.  It  followed  our 
ship,  and  was  attended  with  five  little  fishes,  called 
the  pilot  fish,  much  like  a  mackerel,  but  larger. 

These  I  am  told  always  keep  the  shark  company. 
And  what  is  most  surprising,  though  the  shark  is  so 


no.  is]  Water  Spouts  5  3 

ravenous  a  creature,  yet  let  it  be  never  so  hungry,  it 
never  touches  one  of  them.  Nor  are  they  less  faith- 
ful to  him.  For  if  at  any  time  the  shark  is  hooked, 
these  little  creatures  will  not  forsake  him.  They 
cleave  close  to  his  fins  and  are  often  taken  up  with 
him.  Go  to  the  pilot-fish,  thou  that  forsakest  a  friend 
in  adversity.     Consider  his  ways  and  be  abashed. 

Tuesday,  April  18. —  Was  greatly  delighted  in  see- 
ing two  water  spouts,  which  ran  along  for  several 
miles,  and  by  the  especial  Providence  of  God  escaped 
us.  We  saw  one  of  them  coming,  and  were  surprised 
to  observe  a  sudden  calm  for  about  six  minutes. 

The  other  parts  of  the  sea  boiled  like  a  pot.  But 
surely  the  everlasting  I  AM  said  to  the  sea  at  that 
instant,  "  Let  there  be  a  calm  in  that  place."  For 
by  that  means  our  ship  was  immediately  stopped  in 
her  course.  So  the  water  spout  passed  by  before  we 
came  up  to  it.  Otherwise  it  would  have  torn  our  sail 
in  pieces.  God's  hand  was  so  visible  in  this,  that 
several  said  they  never  beheld  the  like  before. 

Saturday,  April  22. —  Fled  as  it  were  on  the  wings 
of  the  wind  for  three  days  past.  I  find  that  God 
generally  sends  us  strongest  winds  when  nearest  our 
port. 

Friday,  May  5.  —  This  afternoon,  after  having  lain 
about  a  week  on  this  coast,  we  saw  Savannah  River, 
and  sent  off  for  a  pilot.  Oh  what  joy  appeared  in 
everyone's  countenance  ! 

Sunday,  May  7. —  Last  night,  by  the  blessing  of 
God,  we  cast  anchor  near  Tyby  Island  about  four- 
teen miles  off  Savannah.  After  this  I  took  boat  and 
arrived  safe  at  Savannah,  having  a  most  pleasant 
passage,  about  seven  in  the  evening. 


II   if"   ft'  I^S^ps^i.^ 


AN   INDIAN    TOWN. 


PART    III 

IN    THE    WILDERNESS 


19.    How  to  grow  Indian  Corn 

By  Henry  Spelman  (1689) 

The  Indians  have  houses,  but  few  of  the  greatest  The  early 
towns   have    more    than    twenty   or    thirty  of    them,   settierscaiied 

J  J  _  the  Indian 

Their  buildings  are  made  like  an  oven,  with  a  little  chiefs 
hole  through  which  they  go  out  and  in.      In  the  midst   "kinss- 
of  the  house  there  is  a  hole  through  which  the  smoke 
goes  out.     The  king's  houses  are  broader  and  longer 
than  those  of    the  other  people,  having  many  dark 
windings  and  turnings. 

When  the  Indians  go  hunting,  the  women  go  to  a 
place  assigned  beforehand  to  build  wigwams  for  their 
husbands  to  sleep  in  at  night.  They  carry  mats  to 
cover  these  huts,  and  as  the  men  go  further  in  their 
hunting,  the  women  go  on  ahead,  carrying  the  mats. 

By  the  side  of  their  dwelling-houses  the  Indians 
commonly  make  a  place  to  plant  their  corn.  If  there 
be  much  wood  in  that  place,  they  cut  down  the  larger 
trees,  and  the  smaller  trees  they  burn  to  the  root, 
pulling  most  of  the  bark  from  them  so  as  to  make 
them  die.  In  these  cornfields  they  used  to  dig  holes 
with  a  crooked  piece  of  wood.     Since  then  the  Eng- 

55 


5° 


The  Wilderness 


[No.  19 


"  Their 
wheat" 
means 

Indian  corn; 
the  Indians 
did  not  have 
real  wheat. 


The  Indian 
King,  that  is, 
the  chief. 


The  beads 
were  brought 
from  Europe, 
and  the 
Indians 
greatly 
valued  them ; 


lish  have  brought  them  shovels  and  spades.  They 
put  into  these  holes  ordinarily  four  or  five  kernels  of 
their  wheat,  and  two  beans.  When  the  wheat  has 
grown  up,  having  a  stalk  as  big  as  a  cane  reed,  the 
beans  run  up  on  them,  like  our  hops  on  poles. 

The  ear  of  the  wheat  is  long  and  thick,  and  yet  for 
all  its  coarseness,  the  stalk  has  commonly  four  or  five 
ears.  Their  corn  is  planted  and  gathered  at  about 
the  same  time  as  ours,  but  their  manner  of  harvesting 
is  like  our  way  of  gathering  apples.  First  they  put 
the  ears  in  hand  baskets,  then  empty  them  into  larger 
baskets,  made  of  the  bark  of  trees  or  of  hemp.  Then 
they  lay  the  corn  upon  thick  mats  in  the  sun  to  dry, 
and  every  night  they  make  a  great  pile  of  it,  covering 
it  with  mats  to  protect  it  from  the  dew.  When  it  is 
safely  weathered,  they  pile  it  up  in  their  houses,  and 
daily  as  they  want  to  use  some  of  the  corn  they  rub 
the  kernels  off  into  a  great  basket,  wringing  the  ears 
between  their  hands.  A  great  basket  of  this  takes 
up  the  best  part  of  some  of  their  houses.  Shelling 
corn  is  chiefly  women's  work,  for  the  men  only  hunt 
to  get  skins  in  winter  and  dress  them  in  summer. 

But  though  now  it  is  out  of  our  purpose,  we  may 
not  forget  altogether  the  planting  of  the  King's  corn, 
for  which  a  day  is  appointed.  On  that  day  a  great 
party  of  the  country  people  meet  and  work  so  hard 
that  the  greater  part  of  the  King's  corn  is  planted  in 
one  day.  After  the  planting  is  over  the  King  takes 
the  crown  which  the  King  of  England  sent  him,  and 
puts  it  upon  his  head.  This  done,  the  people  go 
backwards  and  forwards  among  the  corn  hills,  che 
King  following.  Their  faces  are  always  towards  the 
King,  expecting  that  he  will  throw  some  beads  among 
them.     It  is  his  custom  at  such  a  time  to  make  those 


No.  20] 


Indian  Com 


57 


who  had  been  planting  corn  scramble  for  the  beads,  before  the 

Some  of  his  favorites  he  calls  to  him  and  gives  the  English  came 

0  they  had 

beads   into  their  own    hands.      This  is  the  greatest  only  little 

courtesv  which  he  offers  to  his  people.     When   his  shells  and 

.    '     .  .  .  .   .  .  fresh-water 

curn  is  ripe  the  country  people  come  to  him  again  pearis. 


AN    INDIAN    DANCE. 

and    gather,  dry,  and  rub  out  all  his  corn  for  him,   The  English 
and  then  store  it  in  the  houses  abounding  for  that  ver-v  soon 

learned  to 

purpose.  eat  the 

♦  Indian 

"  pone  "  or 

20.     Delights  of  New  England       SSdhTIhe 

ashes. 
Bv  Rev.  Francis  Higginson  (1630) 

The  variety  of  the  soil  of  New  England  is  to  be   The  writer  of 
admired.       It    appears    in    the    abundance    of    grass   '!"s  plece  1S 

'  the  same 

which  grows  everywhere,  very  thick  and  very   high    Francis 


58 


The  Wilderness 


[No.  20 


Higginson, 
whose 
voyage  we 
read  about 
in  the  last 
chapter.     He 
is  here  writ- 
ing home  to 
his  friends, 
urging  them 
to  come; 
and  thou- 
sands of 
English 
people  did 
come  over  at 
that  time. 


in  different  places ;  but  it  grows  very  wild  with  a 
great  stalk  and  broad  wide  blade,  because  it  has 
never  been  cropped  by  cattle,  nor  mown  with  the 
scythe,  and  seldom  trampled  under  foot.  It  can 
scarcely  be  believed  how  our  cows  and  goats,  horses 
and  pigs,  do  thrive  and  prosper  here  in  this  country. 

In  our  plantation  we  can  already  buy  a  quart  of 
milk  for  a  penny.  The  abundant  increase  of  grain 
proves  this  country  to  be  a  wonder.  Thirty,  forty, 
and  sixty  fold  harvests  are  ordinary  here.  Our  plant- 
ers hope  to  have  more  than  a  hundred-fold  here  this 
year.  Our  children,  by  planting  corn,  may  earn 
more  than  their  own  support. 

This  country  abounds  with  roots  of  great  variety 
which  are  good  to  eat.  Our  turnips,  parsnips,  and 
carrots  are  both  bigger  and  sweeter  than  those  ordi- 
narily found  in  England.  Barberries  grow  in  plenty, 
and  pennyroyal,  sorrel  and  water-cress,  leeks  and 
onions.  There  also  is  an  abundance  of  other  wild 
herbs,  delightful  to  smell,  whose  names  we  do  not 
know.  There  is  a  plenty  of  single  damask  roses, 
very  sweet ;  and  two  kinds  of  herbs  which  bear  two 
kinds  of  flowers,  which  they  say  are  as  good  to  make 
cordage  or  cloth  as  our  hemp  or  flax.  We  have  mul- 
berries, plums,  raspberries,  currants,  chestnuts  and 
walnuts,  all  of  which  grow  in  plenty  here. 

New  England  has  water  enough,  both  salt  and 
fresh,  as  the  Atlantic  sea  runs  all  along  this  coast. 
We  have  a  number  of  excellent  harbors,  such  as  Cape 
Ann  and  Massachusetts  Bay  and  Salem.  The  abund- 
ance of  sea-fish  is  almost  beyond  believing,  and  usu- 
ally I  can  scarce  believe  it  with  my  own  eyes.  I 
often  see  a  great  number  of  whales,  mackerel,  and 
codfish  taken  in.     Then  there  is  a  fish  called  bass,  as 


no.  21]  New  K?igland  59 

sweet  and  wholesome  a  fish  as  ever  I  did  eat.  It  is 
altogether  as  good  as  our  fresh  herring.  They  come 
in  June,  and  again  three  months  later.  Of  this  fish 
one  may  take  many  hundreds  together.  Indeed,  their 
nets  ordinarily  take  more  than  the  fishermen  are  able 
to  haul  to  land,  so  that  they  want  for  boats  and  men, 
and  often  are  forced  to  let  many  go  that  they  have 
taken.  Besides  bass,  we  took  plenty  of  thornbacks, 
and  an  abundance  of  lobsters,  so  that  the  smallest  boy 
in  the  plantation  may  both  catch  and  eat  as  many 
as  he  may  wish  of  them. 

The  air  of  New  England  is  one  special  thing  that 
commends  this  place.  Experience  shows  that  there 
is  hardly  a  more  healthful  place  to  be  found  in  the 
world,  or  one  that  agrees  better  with  our  English 
bodies.  Many  who  were  weak  and  sickly  in  Old 
England,  by  coming  hither,  have  been  safely  healed, 
and  grown  healthful  and  strong.  A  sup  of  New 
England's  air  is  better  than  a  whole  draught  of  Old 
England's  ale. 

■*■ 

21.    All  Sorts  of  Creatures 

By  John  Josselyn  (1663-1672) 

The  humming  birds,  the  smallest  of  all  birds,  are  John 
of   changeable  colors,   and   are  found   in    New    Eng-  Josse]ynwas 

0  °      very  fond  01 

land.     They  feed  upon  honey  which  they  suck  out   thecountry, 
of   flowers   with    their    long   needle-like   bills.     They   and  also  fond 

11         •  of  tolling  a 

sleep    all    winter    and    are    not    to    be    seen    until    the    bigstory,  the 

spring,  at  which  time  they  brood  in  little  nests,  made 

of    soft,    silk-like    stuff.      Their    eggs    are    no    bigger 

than    white    peas,    and   they    hatch    four  or   five   at  a   winter, 

,•  because  they 

time.  ,, 

1M>  south. 


humming- 
birds dis- 
appear in 


6o 


The  W^ilderness 


[No.  21 


Wild 
turkeys. 


Young 
turkeys  are 
still  thought 
very  hard  to 
raise. 


Two  cen- 
turies later 
such  pigeon 
roosts 

existed  near 
the  Ohio 
River. 


The  turkeys  are  blacker  than  ours.  I  have  heard 
several  trustworthy  persons  say  that  they  have  seen 
turkey-cocks  that  weighed  forty,  even  sixty  pounds. 
Out  of  my  personal  experience,  I  can  assure  you  that 
I  have  eaten  my  share  of  a  turkey  that  weighed 
thirty  pounds  after  he  was  dressed.  I  have  also 
seen  sixty  broods  of  young  turkeys  on  the  side  of  a 
marsh,  sunning  themselves  early  in  the  morning.  The 
English  and  the  Indians  have,  by  this  time,  nearly  de- 
stroyed the  breed,  so  that  it  is  very  rare  to  meet  with 
a  wild  turkey  in  the  woods.  Some  of  the  English 
people,  however,  have  numbers  of  them  in  their  yards. 

The  wild  turkeys  hatch  twice  or  three  times  in  a 
year.  If  you  would  keep  the  young  alive,  you  must 
give  them  little  water,  for  if  they  have  their  fill  of 
water,  they  will  grow  weak,  and  you  will  never  be 
able  to  raise  any  of  them.  The  squaws  weave  coats 
of  turkey  feathers  for  their  children. 

Of  pigeons  there  are  millions  upon  millions.  In 
the  spring  and  in  the  fall  when  they  return  south- 
ward. I  have  seen  a  flight  of  pigeons  four  or  five 
miles  long.  To  my  thinking,  they  had  neither  begin- 
ning nor  ending.  So  thick  they  were  that  I  could 
see  no  sun.  In  one  tree  might  be  seen  nest  after 
nest.  And  one  tree  after  another  for  miles  among 
the  pine  trees,  I  have  seen,  filled  with  these  nests. 
But  they  are  fewer  now. 

The  owl  is  the  dullest  bird  there  is.  Of  these 
there  are  three  sorts,  a  great  grey  owl  with  ears,  a 
little  gray  owl,  and  a  white  owl.  Poor,  ragged  birds 
they  are,  and  have  no  glittering,  golden  feathers. 

Of  beasts  of  the  earth  there  are  not  many  kinds 
here.  The  wolves  have  their  kennels  under  thick 
bushes  by  great  trees,  in  far-off  places  in  the  swamps. 


no.  21]  Wild  Beasts  6 1 

A  dog  caught  a  wolf  which  had  got  into  the 
sea,  and  held  him  there  until  some  one  went  in  and 
led  him  out.  The  dog  kept  his  hold  upon  the  wolf 
until  they  had  tied  its  legs.  When  they  brought  the 
wolf  into  the  house,  they  unbound  his  legs,  and  he 
did  not  offer  to  bite.  He  did  not  so  much  as  show 
his  teeth.  He  put  his  head  down,  and  looked  toward 
the  door,  as  if  he  would  willingly  have  his  liberty. 
But  they  killed  him,  as  they  did  other  wolves. 

The  bear  at  certain  seasons  is  a  terrible  creature. 
When  hunted  with  dogs,  he  goes  up  a  tree,  where  he 
is  shot.  When  he  is  fat,  which  is  in  acorn  time,  and 
in  winter,  he  makes  good  food.  But  then  there  is 
no  one  who  dares  to  kill  him  but  the  Indians. 

The  bear  makes  his  den  among  thick  bushes,  push-  The  white 
ins:   in  here  and  there  a  lot   of   moss.      This  moss,   PeoPle  kllled 

0  lots  of  them. 

being  covered  with  snow,  melts  in  the  daytime  with 
the  heat  of  the  sun  :  but  in  the  night  it  is  frozen  in 
a  thick  coat  of  ice.  The  mouth  of  the  den  is  very 
narrow.  Here  they  lie  single,  never  two  in  a  den  all 
winter. 

The  Indian,  as  soon  as  he  finds  them,  creeps  in 
upon  all  fours.  With  his  left  hand,  he  seizes  the 
neck  of  the  sleeping  bear,  drags  him  to  the  mouth  of 
the  den,  where  with  a  club  or  small  hatchet  he  kills 
him,  before  he  can  open  his  eyes.  But  sometimes 
the  bear  is  too  quick  for  the  Indian,  as  one  of  them 
called  Black  Robin  can  tell.  He  was  badly  hurt  by 
the  bear  before  he  could  strike  it. 

The  females  among  beasts  and  birds  of  prey,  in 
size  and  beauty,  surpass  the  males.  So  do  they 
especially  among  fishes. 

To   speak    of    fishes    I    shall    begin    first   with    the   Thewhaleis 

whale.     The  whale  is  a  kingly  fish  as  all  fishes  of   "otafish. 

°  J  but  an 


62 


The  Wilderness 


[No.  21 


animal  living 
in  the  water ; 
it  cannot 
stay  long 
under  water 
without 
rising  to  take 
breath. 


No  such  big 
lobsters  are 
left  now. 


great  size  are.  There  was  one  of  them  thrown  up 
on  the  shore  about  eight  miles  from  where  I  lived. 
This  whale  was  fifty-five  feet  long.  These  sea  crea- 
tures are  of  great  strength  and  size. 

The  herring  are  very  numerous.  The  people 
catch  them  all  summer  long.  We  saw  them  once 
driven  into  the  harbour  by  other  great  fish  that  feed 
upon  them  near  the  shore.  It  was  at  the  time  of 
high  water.  They  threw  themselves  upon  the  land 
in  such  great  numbers  that  we  could  have  gone  up 
to  the  knee  among  them  for  a  quarter  of  a  mile. 

I  have  seen  a  lobster  that  weighed  twenty  pounds. 
They  cast  off  their  shell-coats  in  the  spring,  and  so 
do  crabs.     They  have,   underneath,  a  thin,  red  skin 

_,..,.,.,..-..        _ _ which     grows     thick 

and  hard  in  a  short 
time,  and  forms  a  new 
shell-coat.  The  Ind- 
ians feed  much  upon 
the  lobster.  Some 
they  roast  and  some 
they  dry. 

The  starfish  has 
five  points  like  a  star. 
The  whole  fish  is  no 
bigger  than  the  palm 
of  a  man's  hand.  It 
is  of  a  tough  sub- 
stance, like  leather. 
It  is  about  an  inch  in 
thickness,  whitish  un- 
derneath, of  the  color 
of  a  cucumber  above 
a  big  colonial  tree.  and  somewhat  rough. 


no.  22]  Tobacco  6  3 

When  it  is  warm  in  one's  hand,  you  may  see  it 
make  a  stiff  motion,  turning  down  one  of  its  points 
and  putting  up  another.  The  starfish  is  very  com- 
mon, and  is  found  thrown  up  on  the  rocks  by  the 
sea-tide. 


22.    How  to  raise  Tobacco 

By  Alsop  (1666) 


we  ought  to 
know  how  it 
was  grown. 


The  three  main  commodities  this  country  affords  Tobacco  was 

for  trade,   are    tobacco,    furs,    and    flesh.      Furs    and  croT^inthe 

skins,    as    those    of    beavers,    otters,    musk-rats,   rac-  South  in  the 

coons,    wild-cats,    and    elk    or    buffalo,    with    several  colomal 

time,  and 

others,  were  first  sold  by  the  Indians  of  the  country,    therefore 
They  were  sold  to  the  white  people  living  near,  and 
by  them  to  the  merchants  who  carried  them  into  Eng- 
land and  other  places  where  they  became  salable. 

Tobacco  is  the  only  regular  article  of  trade  of  this 
province.  The  use  of  it  was  first  found  out  by  the 
Indians  many  ages  ago.  Its  use  was  brought  into 
the  Christian  world  by  that  great  discoverer  of 
America,  Columbus.  It  is  generally  made  by  all  Sir  Walter 
the  people  of  this   province.       Between  the  months   Ralelsi 

•        '  i  introduced 

of    March  and  April,  they  sow    the    seed,   which    is   smoking  into 

much  smaller  than   mustard-seed,  in   small  beds  and    Ensland- 

patches.     These  patches  are  dug  up  and  made  with 

care.     About  May  the  plants  commonly  appear  green 

in   those  beds.      In  June  they  are  transplanted  from 

their  beds,  and  set  in   little  hillocks   in  distant  rows, 

dug  up  for  the  same  purpose.  To  top 

Twice  or  thrice  they  are  weeded,   and  freed  from    tobacco  = 
poor   leaves  that  are  peeping  out   from   the  body  of   younggrow. 
the  stalk.      They   cut    off    the    tops    of     the    several    ing  heads. 


64 


The  Wilderness  [No.  22 


plants  as  they  find  occasion,  when  they  grow  too  fast. 
About  the  middle  of  September  they  cut  the  tobacco 
down,  and  carry  it  into  houses,  made  for  that  purpose, 
to  bring  it  to  its  purity.  And  after  time  has  brought  it 
to  perfection,  it  is  then  tied  up  in  bundles,  and  packed 
into  hogsheads.     It  is  then  laid  away  for  trade. 

Between  November  and  January  there  arrive  in 
this  province  ships  to  the  number  of  twenty  sail 
and  upwards.  All  are  trading  vessels  loaded  with 
goods  to  sell  or  trade.  They  trade  with  the  planter 
for  silks,  hollands,  woolens,  and  broadcloths,  and  other 
necessary  goods,  at  such  rates  as  shall  be  thought  fail' 
and  lawful  for  tobacco  at  so  much  the  pound.  Ad- 
vantage on  both  sides  is  considered.  The  planter  has 
given  his  work,  and  the  merchant  has  risked  coming 
with  his  goods  into  a  far  country.  Thus  is  the  trade 
on  both  sides  made  in  a  fair  and  honest  way. 

The  people  of  this  province  are  seldom  or  never 
put  to  the  fear  of  being  robbed  of  their  money,  nor 
of  dirtying  their  fingers  by  counting  vast  sums.  They 
have  more  bags  to  carry  corn  than  coin  ;  but  the 
very  product  of  the  dirty  ground  of  this  province 
affords  as  great  a  profit  to  the  inhabitants  as  the 
gold  of  Peru  does  to  the  Spaniard. 

Our  shops  of  Maryland  are  the  merchants'  store- 
houses, where  with  few  words  goods  are  bought  and 
delivered.  They  are  not  like  those  shop-keepers' 
boys  in  London  that  continually  cry,  "What  do  ye 
lack,  sir  ?     What  do  ye  buy  ?  " 

Tobacco  is  the  coin  of  Maryland,  and  will  purchase 
goods  from  the  merchant  quicker  than  money.  I 
must  confess  the  New  England  men  that  trade  into 
this  province,  had  rather  have  fat  pork  for  goods, 
than  tobacco  or  furs. 


No.  23] 


Wild  Things 


65 


23.     Carolina  Beasts 

By  Thomas  Ash  (1680) 

Fireflies. — There  are  in  Carolina  great  numbers 
of  fireflies,  who  carry  their  lanterns  in  their  tails,  in 
dark  nights  flying  through  the  air,  shining  like  streaks 
of  fire,  and  lighting  it  with  their  golden  spangles.  I 
have  seen  a  larger  sort  at  Jamaica.  These  have  two 
lights  upon  their  eyes  and  a  third  in  their  tails  ;  on 
dark  nights  they  shine  like  candles,  so  that  I  have 
often,  at  a  distance,  mistaken  their  sparkle  for  the 
lights  of  some  distant  plantation.  Amongst  large 
orange  trees  in  the  night  I  have  seen  many  of  those 
flies  whose  lights  have  appeared  like  hanging  candles 
or  hanging  torches  which  amidst  the  leaves  yielded  a 
sight  truly  curious.  With  three  of  these  fireflies 
secured  in  a  glass  bottle  in  a  very  dark  night  I  have 
read  very  small  print. 

Turtles.  —  The  tortoises,  more  commonly  called  by 
our  Indians  the  turtles,  are  of  three  sorts :  the  hawks- 
bill,  whose  shell  is  that  which  we  call  the  tortoise 
shell;  the  green  turtle,  whose  flesh  is  good  to  eat; 
the  third  kind  is  called  the  loggerhead  turtle,  and 
neither  its  shell  nor  its  flesh  is  of  worth.  The  kind  of 
creatures  who  live  both  on  the  land  and  on  the  sea, 
in  the  day  usually  keep  in  the  sea,  swimming  on  the 
surface.  In  fair  weather  they  delight  to  expose  them- 
selves to  the  sun,  oftentimes  falling  asleep,  lying  there 
without  any  motion  on  the  water,  until  they  are  dis- 
turbed by  the  approach  of  some  ship.  Then,  as  they 
arc  very  quick  of  hearing,  they  awaken  quickly  and 
dive  away.  In  the  night  they  often  come  on  shore 
to  feed,  and  lay  their  eggs  in  the  sand,  which  once 


Thomas  Ash 
was  born  in 
England  in 
1650,  and 
came  over  to 
the  part  of 
the  coast  at 
first  con- 
sidered the 
southern  part 
of  Virginia, 
but  which  in 
1676  was 
chartered  as 
the  colony  of 
Carolina.  He 
was  Gov- 
ernor of  that 
colony  from 
1689  to  1694, 
and  wrote 
one  of  the 
best  accounts 
of  the  coun- 
try that  has 
come  down 
to  us. 

Fireflies  were 
not  known  in 
England. 
The  turtles  of 
which  Ash 
speaks  are  all 
water  turtles. 
The  colonists 
found  them 
very  useful 
for  food,  but 
at  the  present 
day  very  few 
come  ashore. 


66 


The  JVilder?iess 


[No.  23 


The  sea  cow 
is  also  called 
the  manatee ; 
it  is  now  very 
scarce  in  the 
waters  of  the 
coast  of  the 
United 
States. 


A  rifle-ball 
will  penetrate 
the  alligator's 
hide. 


covered  they  leave  for  the  sun  to  hatch.  The  little 
turtles  dig  their  passage  out  of  the  sand,  immediately 
making  their  way  towards  the  water. 

Sea  Cow.  —  There  is,  farther  to  the  southward  of 
Carolina,  a  fish  called  the  sea  cow,  of  extraordinary 
size,  sometimes  of  a  thousand  pounds.  It  feeds  on 
the  banks  on  the  grassy  herbage.  She  has  a  head  like 
a  cow  and  is  of  a  green  color.  Her  flesh  is  said  to 
be  sweeter  than  the  tenderest  veal.  Its  skin  makes 
excellent  whips  for  horses,  which  are  very  serviceable 
and  lasting. 

Alligator  or  Crocodile.  —  There  are  in  the  mouths 
of  their  rivers,  or  in  the  lakes  near  the  sea,  creatures 
which  are  little  known  in  the  West  Indies  and  are 
called  alligators  or  crocodiles.  Their  backs  are  scaly 
and  impenetrable,  so  that  a  musket  ball  cannot  pierce 
them.  It  lives  both  on  land  and  on  water,  and  is 
such  a  greedy  creature  that  it  devours  everything  it 
sees.  Man,  however,  it  dares  to  take  on  land  only 
by  surprise  or  when  asleep.  In  the  water  the  croco- 
dile is  more  dangerous.  It  sometimes  grows  to  great 
length,  from  sixteen  to  twenty  feet,  and  has  a  long 
mouth  set  with  sharp  teeth.  Its  body,  when  full 
grown,  is  as  large  as  that  of  a  horse,  growing  smaller 
towards  the  tail.  Nature  has  given  land  creatures  an 
instinct  to  avoid  the  crocodile,  warning  them  by  its 
strong  musky  smell,  which  can  be  perceived  at  con- 
siderable distance,  so  that  poor  cattle,  smelling  it  in 
time,  can  get  out  of  harm's  way. 


no.  24]        A  JVomari *s   Travels  6y 

2\,    The  Dangers  of  the  Way 

By  Madam  Sarah  Knight  (1704) 

Monday,  October  2nd,  1704. 

About  three  o'clock  afternoon  I  began  my  journey  This  brave 
from  Boston  to  New  Haven,  being  about  two  hundred  ,ad-v  started 
miles.      When  we  had  ridden  about  an  hour,  we  came  for  her  lono. 
into  a  thick  swamp,  which  by  reason  of  a  great  fog,  and  dan- 
very  much  startled  me,  for  it  was  now  very  dark.  fournev- 

In  about  an  hour,  or  something  more,  after  we  left  there  were 

the  swamp,  we  came  to  Billing's  tavern,  where  I  was  tienifew 

1  °  roads  in 

to  lodge.      My  guide  dismounted   and  very  complai-   New  Eng- 
santly  helped  me  down,  and  showed  the  door,  signing   land'  and 

.   1     1  •     1  ,  •  i  •    i     t      1     n        i'i  v  bridges. 

to  me  with  his  hand  to  go  in  ;  which  1  gladly  did. 

But  I  had  not  gone  many  steps  into  the  room  ere  I 
was  interrogated  by  a  young  lady  (I  understood  after- 
wards she  was  the  elder  daughter  of  the  family). 
These  were  her  words. 

"  Law  for  me  —  what  in  the  world  brings  you  here 
at   this  time  a'  night?     I  never  see  a  woman  on   the    See  for  saw. 
road  so  dreadful  late  in  all  the  days  of  my  versall   life.   Versaii  = 
Who  are  you  ?     Where  are  you  going?      I'm  scared   probably  urn- 

j  J  o         o  versal 

out  of  my  wits."     With  much  more  of  the  same  kind. 

I  told  her  she  treated  me  very  rudely,  and  I  did  not 
think  it  my  duty  to  answer  her  unmannerly  questions. 
But  to  get  rid  of  them  I  told  her  I  came  there  to 
have  the  mail  carrier's  company  with  me  tomorrow  on 
my  journey.  I  begged  the  Miss  to  show  me  where  I 
must  lodge. 

She  conducted  me  to  a  parlor  in  a  little  back 
lean-to,  which  was  almost  filled  with  the  bedstead.  It 
was  so  high  that  I  was  forced  to  climb  on  a  chair  to 
get  up  to  the  wretched  bed  that  lay  on   it.      Having 


68 


The  Wilde?~?iess 


[No.  24 


Lot's  wife 
was  turned 
into  salt  for 
looking  back. 


stretched  my  tired  limbs  on  it,  and  laid  my  head  on  a 
sad  colored  pillow,  I  began  to  think  on  the  transactions 
of  the  past  day. 

Tuesday,  October  3rd.  About  eight  in  the  morn- 
ing I,  with  the  mail  carrier,  proceeded  forward  with- 
out anything  remarkable.  And  about  two  in  the 
afternoon,  we  arrived  at  the  carrier's  second  stage, 
where  the  western  postman  met  him  with  letters. 

Here,  having  called  for  something  to  eat,  the 
woman  brought  a  twisted  thing  like  a  cable,  but  a 
little  whiter,  which  proved  to  be  a  loaf  of  bread.  Lay- 
ing it  on  the  table  she  tugged  for  life  to  bring  it  into 
a  capacity  to  spread.  Having  with  great  pains  accom- 
plished this,  she  served  also  a  dish  of  pork  and  cab- 
bage.    I  suppose  this  was  the  remains  of  dinner. 

The  sauce  was  of  a  deep  purple,  as  I  thought,  be- 
cause it  was  boiled  in  her  dye  pot.  The  bread  was 
of  Indian  meal  and  everything  on  the  table  service 
in  keeping.  As  I  was  hungry,  I  got  a  little  down. 
But  my  stomach  was  soon  cloyed. 

About  three  in  the  afternoon  I  went  on  with  my 
third  guide,  who  rode  very  hard.  We  came  to  a 
river  which  they  generally  ride  through.  But  I  dared 
not  venture.  So  the  mail  carrier  got  a  lad  and  canoe 
to  carry  me  to  the  other  side,  and  he  rode  through 
and  led  my  horse.  The  canoe  was  very  small  and 
shallow,  so  that  when  we  were  in  it  seemed  ready  to 
take  in  water,  which  greatly  terrified  me. 

This  caused  me  to  be  very  circumspect,  sitting 
with  my  hands  fast  on  each  side,  my  eyes  steady.  I 
did  not  dare  so  much  as  to  lodge  my  tongue  a  hair's 
breadth  more  on  one  side  of  my  mouth  than  on  the 
other.  I  dared  not  so  much  as  to  think  of  Lot's  wife, 
for  a  wry  thought   would  have  overset  our  wherry. 


no.  24]        A  IVoman  s  Travels 


69 


But  I  was  soon  put  out  of  this  pain  by  feeling  the 
canoe  on  shore,  and  I  as  soon  almost  saluted  the  land 
with  my  feet. 

Rewarding  my  canoeman,  again  I  mounted  and 
we  made  the  best  of  our  way  forward.  The  road 
here  was  very  even  and  the  day  pleasant,  near  the 
sunset.  The  carrier  now  told  me  we  had  nearly 
fourteen  miles  to  ride  to  the  next  stopping  place, 
where  we  were  to  lodge. 

I  asked  him  about  the  rest  of  the  road,  forseeing 
that  we  must  travel  in  the  night.  He  told  me  there 
was  a  bad  river  which  we  were  to  ride  through  with 
a  current  so  very  fierce  that  a  horse  could  hardly 
stem  it ;  he  said  it  was  narrow,  and  we  should  soon 
be  over. 

I  cannot  express  the  concern  of  mind  caused  by 
this  account.  No  thoughts  but  those  of  the  danger- 
ous river  could  entertain  my  imagination.  They  tor- 
mented me  with  blackest  ideas  of  my  approaching 
fate.  Sometimes  I  saw  myself  drowning,  other  times 
drowned,  and  at  the  best  like  a  holy  sister  just  come 
out  of  a  spiritual  bath  in  dripping  garments. 

Now  was  the  glorious  sun,  with  his  swift  courses, 
arrived  at  the  end  of  his  day's  journey,  leaving  poor 
me  with  the  rest  of  this  part  of  the  lower  world  in 
darkness,  with  which  we  were  soon  surrounded. 
The  only  glimmering  we  now  had  was  from  the 
spangled  skies  of  which  imperfect  reflections  ren- 
dered every  object  formidable. 

Each  lifeless  tree  trunk  with  its  shattered  limbs, 
appeared  an  armed  enemy,  and  every  little  stump 
like  a  ravenous  devourer.  Nor  could  I  so  much  as 
see  my  guide,  when  at  any  distance  which  added  to 
the  terror. 


70  The  Wilderness  [No.  24 

Thus  absolutely  lost  in  thought,  and  dying  with 
the  very  fear  of  drowning,  I  came  up  with  the  post- 
man, whom  I  did  not  see  till  I  was  beside  his  horse. 
He  told  me  that  he  was  stopping  for  me  ;  and  we 
rode  on  very  deliberately  a  few  paces  when  we  entered 
a  thicket  of  trees  and  shrubs. 

I  perceived  by  the  horse's  gait  that  we  were  on  the 
descent  of  a  hill.  As  we  came  nearer  the  bottom 
it  was  totally  dark,  from  the  trees  that  surrounded  it. 
But  I  knew  by  the  going  of  the  horse,  we  had  entered 
the  water,  and  my  guide  told  me  that  this  was  the 
hazardous  river  of  which  he  had  been  talking. 

Riding  up  close  to  my  side  he  bid  me  not  to  fear 
for  we  should  be  over  immediately.  I  now  rallied  all 
the  courage  I  was  mistress  of.  I  knew  I  must  either 
venture  the  fate  of  drowning  or  be  left  like  the  chil- 
dren in  the  wood. 

So,  as  the  postman  bade  me,  I  gave  reins  to  my  nag, 
and  sitting  as  steady  as  just  before  in  the  canoe,  in  a 
few  minutes  got  safe  to  the  other  side,  which  was  the 
Narragansett  country. 


no.  25]  Wild  Creatures  7 1 

25.     Creatures  of  the  Wilderness 

By  Colonel  William  Byrd  (1728) 

We  came  to  the  banks  of    a  creek   called   in   the   Colonel 
Indian  language,   "  Ohimpa-moni,"  signifying    Tumi)-     yrd  was 

»       o    '  1  >  &        J       o    J  ia  great 

ing  Creek,  from  the  frequent  jumping  of  fish  during  traveller  in 
the  spring  season.  the  back~ 

t  T  1  1  1         1  11  woods  oi 

Here  we  encamped,  and  by  the  time  the  horses  were  Virginia,  and 

hobbled,  our  hunters  brought  us  no  less  than  a  brace  got  beyond 

and  a  half  of  deer,  which  made  great  plenty  and  conse-  ments  im0e" 

quently  great  content  in  our  quarters.      Some  of  our  the  wild 

people  had  shot  a  great  wild  cat  which  was  at  the  woods-xvnich 

11  &  arc  here 

fatal  moment  making  a  comfortable  meal  upon  a  fox-   described, 
squirrel.  A  brace  and 

The  wild  cat  is  as  big  again  as  any  household  cat,  ,hree< 
and  much  the  fiercest  inhabitant  of  the  woods.  When- 
ever it  is  disabled  it  will  tear  its  own  flesh  for  mad- 
ness. Although  a  panther  will  run  away  from  a  man, 
a  wild  cat  will  only  make  a  surly  retreat  before  him. 
Now  and  then  he  will  face  about  if  he  be  not  too 
closely  pursued.  He  will  even  pursue  in  his  turn,  if 
he  observe  the  least  sign  of  fear  or  even  of  caution 
in  those  that  pretend  to  follow  him.  The  flesh  of 
this  beast,  as  well  as  of  the  panther,  is  as  white  as 
veal,  and  altogether  as  sweet  and  delicious. 

One    day   a   great   flock   of    cranes   flew   over    our   of  course 
quarters.     They  were  exceedingly  noisy  in  their  flight.    therecould 

2,.  ,     J  ,       .  &  J  }  .       .  &     ,       be  neither 

I  hey  seemed  to  steer  their  course  toward  the  south    robbers  nor 
(they  are  birds  of  passage)  in  quest  of  warmer  weather,    beggars 

t-i  1      .       1     ti  •  .  1  t>i  where  there 

1  hey  only  took  this  country  on  their  way.      1  hey  are   were  no 
as  rarely  met  with  in  this  part  of  the  world  as  a  high-   people. 
wayman   or  a   beggar.      These  birds  travel   generally 
in  lloeks.    When  they  roost  they  place  upon  the  high- 


7  2  The  Wilder?iess  [No.  25 

est  trees  sentinels,  which  constantly  stand  upon  one 
leg  to  keep  themselves  waking. 
i.e.  Several  We  forded  several  runs  of  excellent  water.     After- 

streams,  wards  we  crossed  a  large  level  of   high  land  full  of 

lofty  walnut,  poplar,  and  white  oak  trees.  As  we 
marched  along  we  saw  many  buffalo  tracks,  but  could 
not  have  the  pleasure  of  seeing  the  animals.  They 
either  smelt  us  out,  having  that  sense  of  smell  very 
lively,  or  else  they  were  alarmed  at  the  noise  which 
so  many  people  must  necessarily  make  in  marching 
along.  At  the  sight  of  a  man  they  will  snort  and 
grunt,  cock  up  their  ridiculous  short  tails,  and  tear 
up  the  ground  with  a  fury  of  fear.  These  wild  cattle 
hardly  ever  range  alone,  but  herd  together  like  tame 
cattle. 

We  had  been  so  refreshed  by  a  day  of  rest  that  we 
broke  camp  one  morning  earlier  than  usual  and  passed 
the  several  fords  of  the  Hico  River.  The  woods  were 
very  thick  a  great  part  of  this  day's  journey,  so  that 
we  were  forced  to  scuffle  hard  to  advance  seven  miles. 
We  took  up  our  quarters  again  on  Sugar-tree  Creek. 
A  little  distance  from  this  creek  one  of  the  men  had 
the  luck  to  meet  with  a  young  buffalo  of  two  years 
old.  Notwithstanding  he  was  no  older  he  was  as  big 
as  an  ordinary  ox.  His  legs  were  very  thick  and 
very  short  and  his  hoofs  exceeding  broad.  His  back 
rose  into  a  kind  of  bunch  a  little  above  the  shoulders. 
This  I  believe  contributes  not  a  little  to  that  crea- 
ture's enormous  strength. 

The  portly  figure  of  this  animal  is  disgraced  by  a 
shabby  little  tail,  not  above  twelve  inches  long.  This 
he  cocks  up  on  end,  whenever  he  is  in  a  passion  ; 
and  instead  of  lowing  or  bellowing,  grunts  with  no 
better  grace  than  a  hog. 


No.  25] 


The  Buffalo 


73 


The  hair  growing 
on  his  head  and  neck 
is  long  and  shaggy, 
and  so  soft  that  it 
will  spin  into  thread 
not  unlike  mohair. 
Some  people  have 
stockings  knit  of  it, 
that  would  have 
served  an  Israelite 
during  his  forty  years' 
march  through  the 
wilderness. 

Its  horns  are  short   and   strong,  and   the    Indians   i.e.  they  are 
make  large  spoons  out  of  them,  which  they  say  will   strong  and 
split  and  fall  to  pieces  whenever  poison  is  put  into   Therewa 
them.     The  color  of  the  buffalo  is  a  dirty  brown,  and  ground  for 
its  hide  is  so  thick  that  it  is  scarcely  penetratable.   thlsbelief- 
Buffaloes  may  be  easily  tamed  when  they  are  taken 
young. 

As  thick  as  this  poor  beast's  hide  was,  a  bullet  made 


THE    SUPPOSED    BUFFALO. 


^^fflffii^gt^ 


T1IK   REAL   BUFFALO. 


shift  to  enter  it 
and  fetch  him 
down.  He  was 
found  all  alone, 
though  buffa- 
loes seldom 
are.  The  men 
were  so  de- 
lighted with 
this  new  diet, 
that  the  grid- 
iron and  the 
frying  pan  had 


74  The  Wilderness  [No.  25 

no  rest  all  night.  Before  we  marched  this  morn- 
ing, every  man  took  care  to  pack  up  some  buffalo 
steaks  in  his  knapsack,  besides  what  he  crammed 
into  himself. 

Another  day  we  encamped  on  a  pleasant  hill,  over- 
looking a  river  which  seemed  to  be  deep  everywhere 
except  where  we  forded.  The  Indian  killed  a  very 
fat  doe,  and  came  across  a  bear  which  had  been  put 
to  death  and  half  devoured  by  a  panther. 

The  last  named  of  these  brutes  reigns  absolute 
monarch  of  the  woods.  In  the  keenness  of  his  hun- 
ger he  will  venture  to  attack  a  bear;  though  then  it 
is  always  by  surprise,  as  beasts  of  the  cat  kind  come 
upon  their  prey. 

Their  play  is  to  take  the  poor  bears  napping.  The 
bears  are  very  drowsy  animals.  And  though  they 
are  exceedingly  strong,  yet  their  strength  is  heavy  ; 
while  the  panthers  are  too  nimble  and  cunning  to 
trust  themselves  within  their  hug. 

As  formidable  as  the  panther  is  to  his  fellow  brutes, 
he  never  has  the  confidence  to  venture  upon  a  man. 
He  retires  from  him  with  great  respect  if  there  be  a 
way  open  for  his  escape.  ■  However  it  must  be  con- 
fessed his  voice  is  a  little  contemptible  for  a  monarch 
of  the  forest.  It  is  not  a  great  deal  louder  or  more 
awful  than  the  mewing  of  a  household  cat. 

Not  far  from  our  quarters  one  of  the  men  picked 
up  a  pair  of  elk's  horns,  not  very  large,  and  discov- 
ered the  track  of  the  elk  that  had  shed  them.  The 
elk  is  as  big  as  a  horse  and  of  the  deer  kind.  Only 
the  stags  have  horns  and  those  exceedingly  large  and 
spreading. 

Their  swiftest  speed  is  a  fast  trot.  In  that  motion 
they  turn  their  horns  back  upon  their  necks,  and  cock 


No.  26] 


The  Beaver 


75 


their  noses  aloft  in  the  air.  Nature  has  taught  them 
this  attitude  to  save  their  antlers  from  being  caught 
in  the  thickets. 

The  Indians  say  if  one  of  the  drove  happen  by 
some  wound  to  be  disabled  from  making  his  escape, 
the  rest  will  forsake  their  fears  to  defend  their  friend. 
This  they  will  do  with  great  obstinacy  till  they  are 
killed  on  the  spot,  although  otherwise  they  are  so 
alarmed  at  the  sight  of  a  man,  that  to  avoid  him  they 
will  sometimes  throw  themselves  down  very  high 
precipices  into  the  river. 


26.     Beavers  and  Bears 

By  Colonel  William  Byrd  (1728) 

We  had  difficulty  in  passing  a  water  called  Yapat- 
sco  or  Beaver  Creek.  Those  industrious  animals, 
the  beavers,  had  dammed  up  the  water  so  high  that 
we  had  much  ado  to  get  over.  It  is  hardly  credible 
how  much  work  of  this  kind  they  will  do  in  the 
space  of   one  night. 

They  bite  young  saplings  into  proper  lengths 
with  their  fore-teeth,  which  are  exceedingly  strong 
and  sharp.  Afterwards  they  drag  them  to  the  place 
where  they  intend  to  stop  the  water.  Then  they 
know  how  to  join  timber  and  earth  together  with 
so  much  skill  that  their  work  is  able  to  resist  the 
most  violent  flood  that  can  happen. 

In  this  they  are  qualified  to  instruct  their  betters. 
It  is  certain  their  dams  will  stand  firm  when  the 
strongest  that  are  made  by  men  will  be  carried  down 
the  stream. 


The  beaver 
had  the  mis- 
fortune to 
carry  a  coat 
of  beautiful 
fur,  and 
hence  has 
been  hunted 
almost  out  oi 
the  world. 
Very  few  are 
now  to  be 
found  in  the 
United 
States. 


76 


The  IVilderness  [No.  26 


On  our  return  journey  we  again  had  difficulty 
in  crossing  the  Yapatsco.  The  beavers  had  dammed 
up  the  water  much  higher  than  we  found  it  at 
our  going  up.  So  we  were  obliged  to  lay  a  bridge 
over  a  part  that  was  shallower  than  the  rest,  to 
facilitate  our  passage. 

Beavers  have  more  of  instinct  —  that  half  brother 
of  reason  —  than  any  other  animal,  especially  in 
matters  of  self-preservation.  In  their  houses  they 
i.e.  a  gate  of  always  contrive  a  sally-port,  both  towards  the  land 
exlt-  and  towards  the  water.     This  enables  them  to  escape 

by  one,  if  their  retreat  should  happen  to  be  cut 
off    by  the  other. 

They  perform  all  their  works  in  the  dead  of 
night  to  avoid  discovery.  They  are  kept  diligently 
to  it  by  the  master  beaver,  which  by  his  age  or 
strength  has  gained  to  himself  an  authority  over 
the  rest. 

If  any  of  the  gang  happen  to  be  lazy,  or  will 
not  exert  himself  to  the  utmost  in  felling  of 
trees,  or  dragging  them  to  the  place  where  they 
are  to  be  made  use  of,  this  superintendent  will 
not  fail  to  chastise  him.  This  he  does  with  the 
flat  of  the  tail,  with  which  he  is  able  to  give 
unmerciful  strokes. 

The  beavers  lie  snug  in  their  houses  all  day, 
unless  some  unneighborly  miller  chance  to  disturb 
their  repose,  by  demolishing  their  dams  to  supply 
his  mill  with  water.  It  is  rare  to  see  one  of  them. 
The  Indians,  for  that  reason,  have  hardly  any 
way  to  take  them,  except  by  laying  snares  near  the 
place  where  they  dam  up  the  water. 

Both  beavers  and  wolves,  we  know,  when  one  of 
their  legs  is  caught  in  a  trap,  will  bite  it  off,  that 


No.  26] 


The  B 


ear 


11 


they  may  escape  with  the  rest.  The  fur  of  the 
beaver  is  very  valuable,  especially  in  the  more  north- 
ern countries,  where  it  is  longer  and  finer. 

Our  Indian  killed  a  bear  that  was  feasting 
upon  the  wild  grapes.  In  the  fall,  the  flesh  of 
this  animal  has  a  very  high  relish,  different  from 
that  of  other  creat- 
ures ;  but  in  its  taste 
it  inclines  nearest  to 
that  of  pork.  This 
beast  is  in  truth  a 
very    clean    feeder,  beaver. 

living,  while  the  season  lasts,  upon  acorns,  chestnuts 
and  chinquapins,  wild  honey  and  wild  grapes.    About 

January,  when  there 
is  nothing  to  be  got 
in  the  woods,  they 
retire  into  some 
cave  or  hollow  tree. 
There  they  sleep 
away  two  or  three 
months  very  com- 
fortably. 

One  of  the  young 
fellows  whom  we 
sent  to  bring  up  the  tired  horses  entertained  us  in 
the  evening  with  a  remarkable  adventure  of  that  day. 
He  had  strayed,  it  seems,  from  his  company  in  a  bog, 
and  made  a  bear  cub  a  year  old  betake  itself  to  a  tree. 
While  he  was  new-priming  his  gun  with  intent  to  fetch 
the  cub  down,  the  old  gentle-woman  appeared.  Per- 
ceiving her  son  in  distress,  she  advanced  open  mouthed 
to  his  relief.  The  man  was  so  intent  on  his  game 
that  she  had  approached  very  near  before  he  saw  her. 


Chinqua- 
pins are  a 
kind  of 
acorn. 


^A^: 


78 


The  Wilderness  [No.  26 


But  finding  his  danger,  he  faced  about  upon  the 
enemy.  She  immediately  reared  upon  her  hind  legs 
and  put  herself  in  battle  array.  The  man,  won- 
dering at  the  bear's  assurance,  endeavored  to  fire 
upon  her.  But  owing  to  the  dampness  of  the  prim- 
ing, his  gun  did  not  go  off. 

He  cocked  it  a  second  time,  and  had  the  same 
misfortune.  After  missing  fire  twice  he  had  the 
folly  to  punch  the  beast  with  the  muzzle  of  his 
gun.  But  mother  Bruin  was  on  her  guard,  seized 
the  weapon  with  her  paws,  and  by  main  force 
wrenched  it  out  of  the  fellow's  hands. 

The  man  being  thus  fairly  disarmed,  thought 
himself  no  longer  a  match  for  the  enemy.  There- 
fore he  retreated  as  fast  as  his  legs  could  carry  him. 
The  brute  naturally  grew  bolder  upon  the  flight  of  her 
adversary,  and  pursued  him  with  all  her  heavy  speed. 

For  some  time  it  was  doubtful  whether  fear 
made  one  run  faster  or  fury  the  other.  But  after 
an  even  run,  the  man  had  the  mishap  to  stumble  over 
a  stump  and  fell  down  at  his  full  length.  He  now 
would  have  sold  his  life  a  pennyworth. 

But  the  bear  fearing  there  might  be  some  trick 
in  the  fall,  instantly  halted,  and  looked  with  much 
attention  on  her  prostrate  foe.  In  the  meanwhile, 
the  man  had  with  great  presence  of  mind  resolved 
to  make  the  bear  believe  he  was  dead.  So  he  lay 
breathless  on  the  ground,  in  hopes  that  the  beast 
would  be  too  generous  to  kill  him  over  again. 

To  carry  on  the  farce,  he  lay  motionless  for 
some  time  without  daring  to  raise  his  head  to  see 
how  near  the  monster  was  to  him.  But  in  about 
two  minutes,  to  his  remarkable  comfort,  he  was 
raised  from  the  dead  by  the  barking  of  a  dog.     The 


no.  27]  The  Alligator  79 

dog  belonged  to  one  of  his  companions  who  came 
seasonably  to  his  rescue  and  drove  the  bear  from 
pursuing  the  man  to  take  care  of  her  cub.  For 
she  feared  it  mijrht  now  fall  into  a  second  distress. 


27.    The  Alligator  in  Georgia 

(1755) 

The  crocodile,  which  seems  to  be  the  chief  of  rep- 
tiles, abounds  in  all  the  rivers  of  Georgia.  They 
call  them  alligators.  I  have  seen  some  of  these 
twelve  feet  long,   I  believe. 

A  number  of  various  errors  are  commonly  reported 
about  these  creatures.  One  is  that  their  scales  are 
musket  proof ;  whereas  I  have  frequently  seen  them 
killed  with  small  shot.  Nay,  I  have  heard  from  peo- 
ple of  good  credit,  that  when  they  have  found  one  at 
a  distance  from  the  water,  they  have  killed  him  with 
sticks.     They  did  not  think  him  worth  a  shot. 

Mr.  Horton  has  more  than  once  struck  one  through 
with  a  sword.  The  watermen  often  knock  them  on 
the  head  with  their  oars,  as  the  alligators  lie  sleep- 
ing upon  the  banks.  For  they  are  very  sluggish  and 
timid  ;  though  they  can  make  one  or  two  springs  in 
the  water  with  nimbleness  enough. 

They  can  also  snap  with  strength  whatever  comes 
within  their  jaws.  They  are  terrible  to  look  at, 
stretching  open  a  horrible  large  mouth,  big  enough 
to  swallow  a  man.  They  have  rows  of  dreadful  large 
sharp  teeth. 

Their  feet  are  like  those  of  dragons,  armed  with 
great  claws.     They  have  a  long  tail  which  they  throw 


80  The  Wilderness  [No.  27 

about  with  great  strength,  and  which  seems  to  be 
their  best  weapon.  For  their  claws  are  weakly  set 
on ;  and  the  stiffness  of  their  necks  hinders  them 
from  turning  nimbly  to  bite. 

When  Mr.  Oglethorpe  was  at  Savannah  for  the 
first  time,  he  tried  to  make  an  end  of  the  fear  which 
the  people  had  for  the  crocodiles.  So  he  wounded 
and  caught  one  about  twelve  feet  long,  and  had  him 
Bait  =  worry,  brought  up  to  the  town.  He  set  the  boys  to  bait 
him  with  sticks. 

The  creature  gaped  and  blew  hard,  but  had  no 
heart  to  move.  It  only  turned  about  its  tail,  and 
snapt  at  the  sticks. 

At  our  first  coming  they  would  stare  at  the  boats, 
and  stay  still  till  they  came  up  close  to  them  ;  so 
that  Mr.  Horton  killed  five  in  one  day.  But  after 
frequent  attacks,  they  grew  more  shy.  They  destroy 
a  great  many  fish,  and  will  seize  a  hog  or  a  dog  if 
they  see  him  in  the  water.  But  their  general  way 
of  preying  is  to  lie  still,  with  their  mouths  open  and 
their  noses  just  above  water.  So  they  watch  till  the 
stream  brings  something  down  as  prey  to  them. 
They  swallow  anything  that  comes  into  their  mouths, 
a  kind  of  and  upon  opening  them,  knots  of  lightwood  have  been 
pme.  found  inside  of  them. 

They  lay  eggs  which  are  smaller  than  those  of  a 
goose.  They  scrape  together  a  number  of  leaves, 
and  other  trash,  of  which  nature  has  taught  them 
to  choose  such  as  will  be  warm.  Of  these  they  make 
a  hot-bed,  in  the  midst  of  which  they  leave  their 
eggs  covering  them  with  a  sufficient  thickness.  The 
heat  of  the  heap,  helped  by  the  warmth  of  the  climate, 
hatches  the  eggs  and  the  young  crocodiles  creep  out 
like  small  lizards. 


no.  28]  Tamed  Creatures  8 1 

28.    Colonial  Pets 

By  Peter  Kalm  (1748) 

Upon  trial  it  has  been  found  that  the  follow- 
ing animals  and  birds  which  are  wild  in  the  woods 
of  North  America  can  be  made  nearly  as  tame  as 
domestic  animals.  The  calves  of  the  wild  cows,  i.e.  buffalo, 
which  are  found  in  Carolina,  and  other  provinces 
to  the  south  of  Pennsylvania,  can  be  brought  up 
among  tame  cattle.  When  they  are  grown  up 
they  are  perfectly  tame  but  at  the  same  time 
very  unruly,  so  that  no  enclosure  is  strong  enough 
to  hold  them  if  they  try  to  break  through.  As 
they  possess  great  strength  in  their  necks  it  is 
easy  for  them  to  overthrow  the  fences  with  their 
horns,  and    to    get    into    the    cornfields. 

The  American  deer  can  likewise  be  tamed.  A 
farmer  in  New  Jersey  had  one  in  his  possession, 
which  he  caught  when  it  was  very  young  ;  at  present, 
it  is  so  tame  that  in  the  daytime  it  runs  into  the 
woods  for  its  food,  and  towards  night  returns  home, 
frequently  bringing  a  wild  deer  out  of  the  woods, 
giving  its  master  an  opportunity  to  hunt  at  his 
very  door. 

Beavers  have  been  tamed  to  such  an  extent  that 
they  have  brought  home  what  they  caught  by  fish- 
ing to  their  masters.  This  is  often  the  case  with 
otters,  of  which  I  have  seen  some  that  were  as  tame 
as  dogs,  and  followed  their  master  wherever  he 
went ;  if  he  went  out  in  a  boat  the  otter  went  with 
him,  jumped  into  the  water  and  after  a  while  came 
up  with  a  fish. 

The  raccoon  can  in   time  be   made  so  tame  as  to 

G 


8  2  The  Wilderness  [No.  28 

run  about  the  streets  like  a  domestic  animal ;  but  it  is 
impossible  to  make  it  leave  off  its  habit  of  stealing. 
In  the  dark  it  creeps  to  the  poultry,  and  kills  a  whole 
flock  in  one  night.  Sugar  and  other  sweet  things 
must  be  carefully  hidden  ;  for  if  the  chests  and  boxes 
are  not  always  locked,  it  gets  into  them  and  eats  the 
sugar  with  its  paw.  The  ladies,  therefore,  have  some 
complaint  against  it  every  day. 

The  gray  and  flying  squirrels  are  so  tamed  by  the 
boys  that  they  sit  on  their  shoulders  and  follow 
them  everywhere. 

The  turkey  cocks  and  hens  run  about  in  the  woods 
of  this  country  and  differ  in  no  respect  from  our 
tame  ones,  except  in  their  superior  size  and  more 
palatable  flesh.  When  their  eggs  are  found  in  the 
woods  and  put  under  tame  turkey  hens,  the  young 
ones  become  tame  ;  however,  when  they  grow  up,  it 
sometimes  happens  that  they  fly  away  ;  their  wings  are 
therefore  commonly  clipped  when  they  are  young. 

Wild  geese  are  likewise  tamed  in  the  following 
manner.  When  the  wild  geese  first  come  hither  in 
the  spring  and  stop  a  little  while  the  people  try  to 
shoot  them  on  the  wing.  They  then  row  to  the 
place  where  the  wild  goose  falls,  catch  it  and  keep  it 
for  some  time  at  home  ;  by  this  means  many  of  them 
have  been  made  so  tame  that  when  they  were  let  out 
in  the  morning  they  returned  in  the  evening ;  but  to 
be  more  sure  of  them,  their  wings  are  commonly 
clipped. 

Partridges  which  are  here  in  abundance,  can  be  so 
far  tamed  as  to  run  about  all  day  with  the  poultry, 
coming  along  with  them  to  be  fed.  In  the  same 
manner  I  have  seen  wild  pigeons  so  tame  that  they 
will  fly  out  and  return  again. 


no.  2g]  The  Mosquito  83 

?9.     Gossip  about  Bears  and 
Mosquitoes 

By  Peter  Kalm  (174S) 

Bears  are  very  numerous  higher  up  in  the  country, 
and  do  much  mischief.     Mr.   Bartram  told  me,  that 
when  a  bear  catches  a  cow,  he  kills  her  in  the  follow- 
ing manner.     He  bites  a  hole  into  the  hide,  and  blows   This  does 
with  all  his  power  into  it,  till  the  animal  swells  exces-  notsf.^m 

\  '  very  likely; 

sively  and  dies ;  for  the  air  expands  greatly  between   and  Pro- 
the  flesh  and  the  hide.  fessor  Kalm 

1      O  1  111       TVTM  /—  >  d'd    n0t    Say 

An  old  bwede,  called  JN  lis  u u stave  s  son,  who  was   that  he  had 
ninety-one  years  of  age,  said,  that  in   his  youth,  the   ever  seen  it. 
bears    had    been  very  frequent  hereabouts,  but  that 
they  had  seldom  attacked  the  cattle.     Whenever  a 
bear  was  killed,  its  flesh  was  prepared  like  pork,  and 
it  had  a  very  good  taste. 

The  flesh  of  bears  is  still  prepared  like  ham,  on  the 
river  Morris.  The  environs  of  Philadelphia,  and 
even  the  whole  province  of  Pennsylvania  in  general, 
contain  very  few  bears,  for  they  have  been  extirpated 
by  degrees.  In  Virginia  they  kill  them  in  several 
different  ways.  Their  flesh  is  eaten  by  both  rich  and 
poor,  since  it  is  reckoned  equal  in  goodness  to  pork. 
In  some  parts  of  this  province,  where  no  hogs  can  be 
kept,  on  account  of  the  great  numbers  of  bears,  the 
people  are  used  to  catch  and  kill  them,  and  to  use 
them  instead  of  hogs.  The  American  bears,  however, 
arc  said  to  be  less  fierce  and  dangerous  than  the 
European  ones. 

The  gnats,  which  are  very  troublesome  at  night 
here,  are  called   mosquitoes.      The)'   are  exactly   like 


84 


The  W^ilderness  [No.  29 


the  gnats  in  Sweden,  only  somewhat  smaller.  In 
daytime  or  at  night  they  come  into  the  houses  and 
when  the  people  have  gone  to  bed  they  begin  their 
disagreeable  humming,  approach  nearer  to  the  bed, 
and  at  last  suck  up  so  much  blood  that  they  can 
hardly  fly  away.  Their  bite  causes  blisters  on  peo- 
ple with  delicate  skins. 

When  the  weather  has  been  cool  for  some  days, 
the  mosquitoes  disappear.  But  when  it  changes 
again,  and  especially  after  a  rain,  they  gather  fre- 
quently in  such  quantities  about  the  houses  that  their 
numbers  are  astonishing.  The  chimneys  which  have 
no  valves  for  shutting  them  out  afford  the  gnats  a 
free  entrance  into  the  houses  of  the  English.  In 
sultry  evenings  the  mosquitoes  accompany  the  cattle 
in  great  swarms  from  the  woods  to  the  houses,  or  to 
town,  and  when  the  cattle  are  driven  past  the  houses 
the  gnats  fly  in  wherever  they  can. 

In  the  greatest  heat  of  the  summer  they  are  so 
numerous  in  some  places,  that  the  air  seems  to  be 
quite  full  of  them,  especially  near  swamps  and  stag- 
nant water,  such  as  the  river  Morris  in  New  Jersey. 
The  inhabitants  therefore  make  a  big  fire  before  the 
houses  to  expel  these  disagreeable  guests  by  the  smoke. 
The  old  Swedes  here  say  that  gnats  have  formerly 
been  much  more  numerous  ;  that  even  at  present  they 
swarm  in  vast  quantities  on  the  seashore  near  the 
salt  water ;  and  that  those  which  troubled  us  this 
autumn  in  Philadelphia  were  of  a  more  poisonous 
kind  than  they  commonly  used  to  be.  This  last 
quality  appeared  from  the  blisters  which  were  formed 
on  the  spots  where  the  gnats  had  made  their  sting. 
In  Sweden  I  never  felt  any  other  inconvenience  from 
their   sting  than  a  little   itching  while   they  sucked. 


No.  30] 


The  Bullft 


uiijrog 


85 


But  when  they  stung  me  here  at  night  my  face  was 
so  disfigured  by  little  red  spots  and  blisters  that  I 
was  almost  ashamed  to  show  myself. 


3°« 


Bullfi 


rogs 


By  Peter  Kalm  (1749) 

Bullfrogs  are  a  large  species  of  frogs  which  I  had 
an  opportunity  of  hearing  and  seeing  to-day.  As  I 
was  riding  out,  I  heard  a  roaring  before  me  ;  and  I 
thought  it  was  a  bull  in  the  bushes,  on  the  other  side 
of  the  dyke,  though  the  sound  was  rather  more  hoarse 
than  that  of  a  bull.  I  was  however  afraid,  that  a  bad 
goring  bull  might  be  near  me,  though  I  did  not  see 
him. 

I  continued  to  think  so  till  some  hours  after,  when 
I  talked  with  some  Swedes  about  the  bullfrogs,  and, 
by  their  account,  I  immediately  found  that  I  had 
heard  their  voice.  The  Swedes  told  me,  that  there 
were  numbers  of  them  in  the  dyke.  I  afterwards 
hunted  for  them.  Of  all  the  frogs  in  this  country, 
this  is  doubtless  the  greatest. 

I  am  told,  that  towards  autumn,  as  soon  as  the  air 
begins  to  grow  a  little  cool,  they  hide  themselves 
under  the  mud,  which  lies  at  the  bottom  of  ponds  and 
stagnant  waters,  and  lie  there  torpid  during  winter. 
As  soon  as  the  weather  grows  mild,  towards  summer, 
they  begin  to  get  out  of  their  holes,  and  croak. 

If  the  spring,  that  is,  if  the  mild  weather,  begins 
early,  they  appear  about  the  end  of  March  ;  but  if  it 
happens  late,  they  tarry  under  water  till  late  in  April. 
Their  places  of  abode  are  ponds  and  bogs  of  stagnant 


This  seems 
like  a  large 
story :  this 
kind  of  bull- 
frogs must 
have  disap- 
peared, for 
nobody  sees 
them  now. 


8  6  The  Wilderness  [No.  3o 

water ;  they  are  never  in  any  flowing  water.  When 
many  of  them  croak  together,  they  make  an  enormous 
noise. 

Their  croak  exactly  resembles  the  roaring  of  an  ox 
or  bull  which  is  somewhat  hoarse.  They  croak  so 
loud  that  two  people  talking  by  the  side  of  a  pond 
cannot  understand  each  other.  They  croak  all  to- 
gether ;  then  stop  a  little,  and  begin  again. 

It  seems  as  if  they  had  a  captain  among  them : 
for  when  he  begins  to  croak,  all  the  others  follow ; 
and  when  he  stops,  the  others  are  all  silent.  In  day- 
time they  seldom  make  any  great  noise,  unless  the 
sky  is  covered. 

The  night  is  their  croaking  time ;  and,  when  all  is 
calm,  you  may  hear  them,  though  you  are  near  a 
mile  and  a  half  off.  When  they  croak,  they  com- 
monly are  near  the  surface  of  the  water,  under  the 
bushes,  and  have  their  heads  out  of  the  water.  There- 
fore, by  going  slowly,  one  may  get  close  up  to  them 
before  they  go  away.  As  soon  as  they  are  quite 
under  water,  they  think  themselves  safe,  though  the 
water  be  very  shallow. 

Sometimes  they  sit  at  a  good  distance  from  the 
pond ;  but  as  soon  as  they  suspect  any  danger,  they 
hasten  with  great  leaps  into  the  water.  They  are 
very  expert  at  hopping.  A  full-grown  bullfrog  takes 
near  three  yards  at  one  hop.  I  have  often  been  told 
by  the  old  Swedes  the  following  story,  which  hap- 
pened here,  at  the  time  when  the  Indians  lived  with 
the  Swedes. 

It  is  well  known,  that  the  Indians  are  excellent 
runners.  I  have  seen  them,  at  Governor  Johnson's, 
equal  the  best  horse  in  its  swiftest  course,  and  almost 
pass  by  it.     Therefore,  in  order  to  try  how  well  the 


no.  30]  The  Bullfrog  87 

bullfrogs  could  leap,  some  of  the  Swedes  laid  a  wager 
with  a  young  Indian,  that  he  could  not  overtake  the 
frog,  provided  it  had  two  leaps  before  hand. 

They  carried  a  bullfrog,  which  they  had  caught  in 
a  pond,  upon  a  field,  and  burnt  his  back.  The  fire, 
and  the  Indian,  who  endeavored  to  keep  close  up 
to  the  frog,  had  such  an  effect  upon  the  animal, 
that  it  made  its  long  hops  across  the  field,  as  fast  as 
it  could.  The  Indian  began  to  pursue  the  frog  with 
all  his  might  at  the  proper  time. 

The  noise  he  made  in  running  frightened  the  poor 
frog.  Probably  it  was  afraid  of  being  tortured  with 
fire  again  ;  therefore  it  redoubled  its  leaps,  and  by 
that  means  it  reached  the  pond  before  the  Indian 
could  overtake  it. 

In  some  years  they  are  more  numerous  than  in 
others.  Nobody  could  tell,  whether  the  snakes  had 
ever  ventured  to  eat  them,  though  they  eat  all  the 
lesser  kinds  of  frogs.  The  women  are  no  friends  to 
these  frogs,  because  they  kill  and  eat  young  duck- 
lings and  goslings. 

Sometimes  they  carry  off  chickens  that  come  too 
near  the  ponds.  I  have  not  observed  that  they  bite 
when  they  are  held  in  the  hands,  though  they  have 
little  teeth.  When  thev  are  beaten  they  cry  out 
almost  like  children.  I  was  told  that  some  eat  the 
thighs  of  the  hind  legs,  and  that  they  are  very 
palatable. 


88 


The  Wilderness 


[No.  31 


Rattlesnakes 
were  very 
common  in 
all  the  rough 
and  stony 
parts  of  the 
country,  but 
have  now 
almost  dis- 
appeared in 
settled 
regions. 


Probably 
nature 
intended  the 
snake  to 
frighten  his 
enemies  by 
the  sound. 


31.    Rattlesnakes 

(1756) 

I  will  give  here  an  account  of  that  infamous  reptile, 
the  rattle-snake,  which  is  considered  the  most  danger- 
ous of  any  poisonous  creature  known  in  this  part  of 
the  world. 

The  rattle-snake  hardly  ever  measures  out  six  feet 
in  length.  He  has  a  gorgeous  skin  or  coat,  that  may 
vie  with  any  rich  brocade.  His  summer  haunt  is  in 
meadows  and  swampy  grounds  among  long  grass. 

During  the  winter  season  he  harbors  in  the  ground 
or  in  the  sides  of  hills  where  there  are  craggy  stones. 
They  are  said  to  lie  together  in  numbers.  Their  age 
may  be  known  by  the  number  of  rings  upon  their  tail. 

But  it  is  certainly  a  mistake  that  the  rings  grow 
single,  one  every  year.  Were  that  the  case,  some 
that  I  have  seen  must  have  been  eight  or  ten  years 
old.  But  having  had  the  curiosity  to  take  in  pieces 
one  of  these  rattles,  I  found  the  parts  which  must  be 
of  one  year's  growth,  to  consist  of  two  rings  and  a 
small  tip. 

The  next  year  there  grows  such  another  part  under 
the  first,  which  thrusts  it  off  from  the  flesh,  and  it 
remains  like  a  cap  upon  it.  That  protuberance  which 
is  next  the  tip  holds  it  on.  In  like  manner  the  suc- 
ceeding growths  are  made. 

This  curious  member  nature  has  designed  for  giv- 
ing persons  warning,  when  they  happen  unwarily  to 
approach  too  near  the  snake.  A  man  has  just  time 
to  recollect  himself,  and  stop  his  pace  before  he 
comes  in  immediate  danger  of  a  bite;  which  will  be 
within  distance  of  the  snake's  length. 


no.  3i]  Rattlesnakes  8  9 

For  if  he  lay  at  his  full  stretch  before,  as  soon  as 
any  one  comes  near  him,  he  draws  himself  in.  He 
is  then  wound  up  in  a  close  coil,  with  his  tail  pointed 
upward,  and  his  head  laid  back.  And  he  gives  his 
rattle  such  a  brisk  shake,  that  it  sounds  like  the 
tremulous  motion  of  a  musical  chord. 

Then  if  the  person  does  not  stop  or  divert  his 
course,  he  instantly  flings  out  upon  him.  The  teeth 
of  this  snake  are  curved,  exquisitely  fine  and  sharp, 
two  on  each  side  the  gum.  They  are  shut  up  like 
a  cat's  claw  till  when  he  goes  to  bite. 

Sometimes  the  mowers  happen  to  stumble  over 
them  and  receive  no  hurt  ;  but  they  always  give  the 
signal  when  they  are  prepared  for  mischief. 


AN    INDIAN    BOY. 


PART    IV 

BIG    INDIANS    AND    LITTLE 
INDIANS 


32.    A  King's  Nephews  and  Nieces 

By  Captain  Arthur  Barlowe  (15S4) 

The  twenty-seventh  day  of  April  in  the  year  1584, 
we  departed  from  England,  with  two  barks  well  fur- 
nished with  men  and  victuals,  after  receiving  our  last 
directions  by  your  letters  and  also  your  commands 
delivered  by  yourself  upon  our  leaving  the  river 
Thames. 

The  second  of  July,  we  found  shoal  water,  where 
we  smelt  as  sweet  and  as  strong  a  smell  as  if  we  had 
been  in  the  midst  of  some  delicate  garden  abounding 
with  all  kinds  of  flowers,  by  which  scent  we  were 
assured,  that  the  land  could  not  be  far  distant.  Keep- 
ing good  watch,  and  bearing  but  slack  sail,  the  fourth 
day  of  the  same  month  we  arrived  upon  a  coast,  which 
we  supposed  to  be,  a  continent.  We  sailed  along  this 
coast  for  a  hundred  and  twenty  English  miles  before 
we  could  find  any  entrance  or  any  river  issuing  into 
the  sea.  The  first  opening  that  appeared  to  us  we 
entered,  though  not  without  some  difficulty,  casting 
anchor  about  three  harquebus  shot  within  the  haven's 

9' 


This  account 
is  a  part  of  a 
letter  written 
by  Captain 
Barlowe  to 
Sir  Walter 
Raleigh,  who 
fitted  out  the 
expedition. 


This  makes 
the  voyage 
sixty-eight 

days. 

Harquebus 
=  a  short 
gun,  with  a 
range  <>t  pe*« 
haps  seven 
hundred  feet. 


92 


Indians 


[No.  32 


This  was 
Ocracoke 
Inlet,  now 
North 
Carolina. 

Queen 

Elizabeth 
England. 


of 


mouth  on  the  left  hand  side.  After  we  had  given 
thanks  to  God  for  our  safe  arrival  thither,  we  manned 
our  boats,  and  went  to  view  the  land  next  adjoining, 
and  "to  take  possession  of  the  same,  in  the  right  of 
the  Queen's  most  excellent  Majesty,  as  rightful  Queen 
and  Princess  of  the  same."  This  being  performed, 
according  to  the  ceremonies  used  in  such  enterprises, 
we  viewed  the  land  about  us,  finding  it  very  sandy 
and  low  toward  the  water's  side,  but  so  full  of  grapes 
that  the  very  beating  and  surge  of  the  sea  overflowed 
the  fruit. 

We  passed  from  the  sea  side  towards  the  tops  of 
those  hills  next  adjoining,  and  from  thence  beheld 
the  sea  on  both  sides,  to  the  north  and  to  the  south, 
finding  no  end  in  either  direction.  This  land  we 
found  to  be  only  an  island,  twenty  miles  long  and 
nearly  six  miles  broad.  Under  the  bank  or  hill 
whereon  we  stood,  we  beheld  the  valleys  filled  with 
goodly  cedar  trees,  and  having  discharged  our  har- 
quebus-shot, a  flock  of  white  cranes  arose  under  us, 
with  such  a  cry  redoubled  by  many  echoes,  as  might 
be  made  if  an  army  of  men  shouted  altogether. 

We  remained  by  the  side  of  this  island  two  whole 
days  before  we  saw  any  people  of  the  country  :  on 
the  third  day  we  espied  one  small  boat  rowing  towards 
us,  having  in  it  three  persons.  This  boat  came  to 
the  island  side,  four  harquebus-shot  from  our  ships, 
and  two  of  the  people  remaining  there,  the  third 
came  along  the  shore  side  toward  us.  We  were  all 
on  board  ;  he  walked  up  and  down  upon  the  point 
of  the  land  next  to  us.  Then  the  master  and  the 
pilot  of  the  "  Admiral,"  Simon  Ferdinando,  and  the 
Captain  Philip  Amadas,  myself,  and  others  rowed  to 
the  land.     Our  coming:  did  not  make  this  fellow  show 


No.  32] 


A  Chief 


93 


any  fear  or  doubt.     After  he  had  spoken  of    many   i.e.  in  a  lan- 
things  not  understood  by  us,  we  brought  him  with   suagewh'ch 

°  -Till-  ,lleV   COU,d 

his  own  good  liking  aboard  the  ships,  and  gave  him   notunder- 
a  shirt,  a  hat  and  some  other  things,  and  made  him   stand- 
taste  of  our  wine  and  our  meat,  which  he  liked  very 
well.     After  looking  carefully  at  both  barks,  he  de- 
parted, and  went  to  his  own  boat  which  he  had  left 
in  a  little  cove  or  creek  nearby.     As  soon  as  he  was 


INDIAN    WARRIORS. 


two  bow  shot  into  the  water,  he  fell  to  fishing,  and  in 

less  than  half  an  hour,  he  had  laden  his  boat  as  deep 

as  it  could  swim.     With  this  he  came  again  to  the 

point  of  land,  and  there  he  divided  his  fish  into  two 

parts,   pointing  out   one   part   for  the   ship,  and   the 

other  for  the  pinnace.     Thus,  after  he  had  requited   The  pinnace 

as  far  as  he  could  the  benefits  he  had  received,  he 

departed  out  of  our  sight. 

The  next  day  there  came  unto  us  divers  boats,  and 


was  .1  large 
boat,  with  a 
sail. 


94 


Indt 


tans 


[No.  32 


King  here  = 
chief. 

Raleigh 
named  it 
Virginia  for 
Queen 

Elizabeth  the 
virgin  queen. 


in  one  of  them  the  King's  brother,  accompanied  with 
forty  or  fifty  men,  very  handsome  and  goodly  people, 
and  in  their  behaviour  as  mannerly  and  civil  as  any 
in  Europe.  His  name  was  Granganimeo,  and  the 
King  is  called  Wingina,  the  country  Wingandacoa, 
and  now  by  her  Majesty, Virginia. 

The  King  is  greatly  obeyed,  and  his  brothers  and 
children  reverenced.  The  King  himself  in  person 
was  at  the  time,  sorely  wounded  in  a  fight  which  he 
had  had  with  the  King  of  the  next  country.  A  day 
or  two  after  this,  we  fell  to  trading  with  them,  ex- 
changing some  things  that  we  had,  for  deer  skins. 
When  we  showed  him  our  whole  store  of  merchandise, 
of  all  the  things  that  he  saw.,  a  bright  tin  dish  pleased 
him  most. 

After  two  or  three  days  the  King's  brother  came 
aboard  the  ships  and  drank  wine,  and  ate  of  our  meat 
and  of  our  bread,  and  liked  it  exceedingly.  Then 
after  a  few  days  had  passed,  he  brought  his  wife  with 
him  to  the  ships,  his  daughter  and  two  or  three  chil- 
dren. His  wife  was  very  well  favored,  of  medium 
stature  and  very  bashful.  She  had  on  her  back  a 
long  cloak  of  leather,  with  the  fur  side  next  to  her 
body.  About  her  forehead  she  had  a  band  of  white 
coral.  In  her  ears  she  had  bracelets  of  pearls  hang- 
ing down  to  her  waist.  The  rest  of  her  women  of 
the  better  sort  had  pendants  of  copper  hanging  in 
either  ear,  and  some  of  the  children  of  the  King's 
brother  and  other  noblemen,  had  five  or  six  in  either 
ear.  He  himself  had  upon  his  head  a  broad  plate  of 
gold  or  copper,  for  being  unpolished  we  knew  not 
which  metal  it  might  be,  neither  would  he  by  any 
means  suffer  us  to  take  it  off  his  head.  His  apparel 
was  like  his  wife's,  only  the  women  wear  their  hair 


no.  33]  Home  Life  95 

long  on  both  sides  of  the  head,  and  the  men  on  but 
one  side.  They  are  of  color  yellowish,  and  their  hair 
black  for  the  most  part,  and  yet  we  saw  children  who 
had  very  fine  auburn  and  chestnut  colored  hair. 


33.    Indian  Home  Life 

By  William  Strachey  (1610-1612) 

The  drink  of  the  Indians  is  like  that  of  the  Turks, 
clear  water.  For  although  they  have  grapes  in 
abundance,  they  have  not  learned  the  use  of  them. 
They  have  not  found  out  how  to  press  them  into 
wine.  Pears  or  apples  they  have  none  with  which 
to  make  cider. 

The  men  spend  their  time  in  fishing,  hunting,  wars, 
and  such  manlike  exercises  out  of  doors.  They  scorn 
to  be  seen  in  any  woman's  work.  This  is  the  reason 
why  the  women  are  very  busy  and  the  men  so  idle. 

Their  fishing  is  often  much  in  boats  which  they 
call  quintans.  They  make  one  out  of  a  tree  by 
burning  and  scraping  away  the  coals  with  bones  and 
shells,  till  they  have  made  it  in  the  form  of  a  trough.   These  are 

Instead  of  oars  they  use  paddles  and  sticks.     They   "dug°",s 

J  i    l  -'or  wooden 

row  faster  than  we  can  in  our  barges.     They  have   canoes;   fur- 
nets  for  fishing,  which  are  made  of  the  barks  of  cer-   ther  north 
tain  trees,  and  of  deer  sinews.     There  is  a  kind  of  were  used, 
grass   out   of   which    their   women   spin  a  very  even 
thread,  rolling  it  with  their  hands. 

This  thread  serves  for  many  purposes.  They  use 
it  to  make  coverings,  to  sew  their  garments  of 
feathers,  and  to  make  their  leggings.  With  it,  also, 
they  make  lines  for  fishing. 


96 


Indi 


tans 


[No.  33 


In  England 
game  laws 
forbid  the 
killing  of 
birds  at  cer- 
tain times. 
Bandy  = 
hockey : 
the  game 
was  probably 
lacrosse. 
Football  in 
England  was 
very  rough, 
and  there 
was  plenty 
of  foul 
tackling. 


In  the  time  of  their  hunting,  they  leave  their  habi- 
tations and  gather  themselves  into  companies ;  and 
then  they  go  to  the  wildest  places  with  their  families. 
There  they  pass  their  time  in  hunting  and  getting 
wild  fowl.  In  the  time  of  hunting  every  man  will 
try  to  do  his  best  to  show  his  skill.  For  by  excelling 
in  the  chase  they  obtain  the  favor  of  the  women. 

While  they  are  hunting  in  deserts  or  wildernesses 
there  are  commonly  two  or  three  hundred  together. 
With  the  sunrising  they  call  up  one  another  and  go 
forth  searching  for  the  herd  of  deer.  When  they 
have  found  it  they  encircle  it  with  many  fires.  Be- 
tween the  fires,  they  place  themselves,  making  the 
most  terrible  noise  that  they  can.  The  deer,  fright- 
ened by  the  fires  and  the  voices,  betake  them  to  their 
heels.  The  Indians  chase  them  so  long  within  that 
circle,  that  many  times  they  kill  six,  eight,  ten,  or  fif- 
teen in  a  morning. 

Hares,  partridges,  turkeys,  fat  or  lean,  young  or 
old,  even  in  laying  or  in  brooding  time,  they  devour. 
At  no  time  do  they  spare  any  that  they  can  catch. 

There  is  a  kind  of  exercise  that  they  have  among 
them  much  like  that  which  boys  call  bandy  in  Eng- 
lish. Likewise,  they  have  the  exercise  of  football. 
In  this  they  only  use  the  foot  forcibly  to  carry  the 
ball  from  the  one  to  the  other.  They  kick  it  to  the 
goal  with  a  kind  of  skill  and  swift  footman  ship,  to 
excel  in  which  is  thought  a  great  honor.  But  they 
never  strike  up  one  another's  heels,  as  we  do.  They 
do  not  consider  it  praiseworthy  to  win  a  goal  by  such 
an  advantage. 

The  spare  time  between  their  sleep  and  meals  they 
usually  use  in  gayety,  dancing,  and  singing.  For 
their  kind  of  music,  they  have  different  instruments. 


no.  33]  Amusement  9  7 

They  have  a  kind  of  cane  on  which  they  pipe.  A  sort  of 
These  can  hardly  be  sounded  without  great  strain-  flute- 
ing  of  the  breath.  Upon  these  instruments  they 
keep  a  certain  rude  time.  But  their  chief  instru- 
ments are  rattles,  made  of  small  gourds  or  of  shells. 
These  mingled  with  their  voices,  sometimes  twenty 
or  thirty  together,  make  such  a  terrible  howling  as 
would  rather  frighten  than  give  pleasure  to  any  man. 

The  women  love  children  very  dearly.  To  make 
their  children  hardy  they  wash  them  in  the  coldest 
mornings  in  the  rivers.  By  painting  and  ointments, 
they  so  tan  their  skin,  that  after  a  year  or  two  no 
weather  will  hurt  them. 

To  practise  their  children  in  the  use  of  their  bows 
and  arrows,  the  mother  does  not  give  them  their 
breakfast  in  a  morning  until  they  have  hit  a  mark 
which  she  sets  for  them  to  shoot  at. 

So  skilful  do  they  expect  the  children  to  become, 
that  the  mother  often  throws  up  in  the  air  a  piece 
of  moss  which  the  boy  must  hit  as  it  falls,  with  his 
arrow.  If  he  does  not  succeed  he  cannot  have  his 
breakfast. 


98 


hicL 


icins 


[No.  34 


34.    The  Capture  of  Pocahontas, 
the  Little  Indian  Princess 


The  author 
of  ihis  piece 
lived  among 
the  Indians. 
Powhatan 
was  the  most 
powerful 


By  Raphe  Hamor  (1613-1614) 

It  chanced  that 
Powhatan's  delight 
and  darling,  his 
daughter  Pocahon- 
tas, whose  fame 
has  been  spread 
even  in  England, 
took  the  pleasure 
to  visit  her  friends 
at  the  Potomac. 
Her  friends  had 
been  sent  thither 
like  shopkeepers  at 
a  fair,  to  exchange 
some  of  her  father's 
commodities  for 
those  of  this  re- 
gion. She  came 
in  the  absence  of 
Captain  Argall. 
When  she  had  been  staying  here  some  three  months 
or  longer,  it  happened  that  Captain  Argall  arrived 
in  search  either  of  hope  or  profit.  Pocahontas,  desir- 
ous to  renew  her  familiarity  with  the  English,  and 
delighting  to   see  them,  said  she  would  gladly  visit 


POCAHONTAS. 


Indian  living  them,  keeping  herself  unknown,  perhaps  because  she 
Eneiishin       was  aira^  °f  being  seized.     No  sooner  had  Captain 


No.  34] 


Pocahontas 


99 


Argall  received  intelligence  of  her,  than  he  planned 
with  an  old  friend  and  adopted  brother  of  his,  called 
Japazeus,  how  and  by  what  means  he  might  procure 
her  as  a  captive. 

He  told  the  Indian  that  now  or  never  was  the  time 
to  give  pleasure  to  his  friend,  if  he  really  possessed 
that  love  of  which  he  had  made  profession.  Captain 
Argall  told  him  that  as  a  ransom  for  Pocahontas  he 
might  recover  some  of  our  English  men  and  arms, 
now  in  the  possession  of  her  father.  He  promised  to 
use  her  fairly  and  with  gentle  treatment. 

Japazeus,  fully  assured  that  his  brother  would  use 
her  courteously  as  he  promised,  gave  in  turn  his  word 
that  he  would  use  his  best  endeavors  and  secrecy  to 
accomplish  this  desire.  And  thus  he  wrought  it,  mak- 
ing his  own  wife  an  instrument  to  aid  his  plot.  For 
Japazeus  agreed  that  his  wife,  Pocahontas,  and  him- 
self would  accompany  his  brother,  Captain  Argall,  to 
the  waterside.  Then,  according  to  the  plan,  his  wife 
should  feign  a  great  and  longing  desire  to  go  aboard 
the  ship,  for  although  it  had  been  in  port  three  or 
four  times  before,  she  had  never  seen  it.  She  was 
to  be  earnest  with  her  husband,  begging  him  to  give 
her  permission.  Then  he  was  to  seem  angry  with 
her,  and  to  pretend  that  her  request  was  needless, 
especially  since  she  had  women  with  her  to  bear  her 
company  ;  and  she  in  turn  was  to  pretend  to  take  it 
unkindly,  feigning  to  weep  ;  whereupon  her  husband, 
seeming  to  pity  those  counterfeit  tears,  was  to  give 
her  leave  to  go  aboard,  only  if  it  pleased  Pocahontas 
to  accompany  her. 

Now  came  the  greatest  labor,  to  win  Pocahontas  to 
go  with  her,  for  perhaps  she  might  feel  responsible 
on  account  of    her  father's  wrong  treatment  of  the 


the  colony 
of  Virginia. 
Argall  was 
governor. 

Japazeus  was 
an  Indian, 
who  had 
gone  through 
a  ceremony 
of  brother- 
hood with 
Argall. 


The  plot 
was  that 
Japazeus's 
wife  should 
make  it  seem 
a  favor  to  her 
for  Pocahon- 
tas to  go  on 
board. 


i  o  o  Indians  [No.  34 

English,  even  though  she  supposed  herself  unknown. 
By  earnest  persuasions,  Pocahontas  assented,  and 
forthwith  aboard  they   Went. 

The  best  cheer  that  could  be  made  was  seasonably 
provided.  To  supper  they  went,  merry  on  all  hands, 
especially  Japazeus  and  his  wife,  who,  to  express  their 
joy,  would  once  in  a  while  tread  upon  Captain  Argall's 
foot,  as  if  to  say,  "  'Tis  done  ;  she  is  your  own."  Sup- 
per ended,  Pocahontas  was  lodged  in  the  gunner's 
rooms,  where  Japazeus  and  his  wife  left  her,  because 
they  desired  to  hold  a  conference  with  "their  brother." 
This  conference  was  only  to  acquaint  him  by  what 
stratagem  they  had  betrayed  his  prisoner. 

After  this  discourse  they  went  to  sleep,  and  Poca- 
hontas as  well,  mistrusting  nothing  of  their  plot. 
Nevertheless,  a  little  frightened  and  anxious  to  re- 
turn, she  was  up  first  in  the  morning  and  hastened  to 
Japazeus,  urging  him  to  be  gone.  But  Captain  Argal) 
well  rewarded  him  secretly  with  a  small  copper  kettle 
and  some  other  less  valuable  trifles,  which  he  so 
highly  valued  that  doubtless  he  would  have  betrayed 
his  own  father  for  them. 

Argall  permitted  both  Japazeus  and  his  wife  to  re- 
turn on  shore,  and  in  the  hearing  of  others  he  told 
Japazeus  as  he  went  away  that  he  should  keep  Poca- 
hontas because  the  father  of  Pocahontas  held  as  pris- 
oners eight  of  our  Englishmen,  many  swords,  firearms, 
and  other  tools  which  he  had  at  several  times  by 
treacherous  murders  taken  from  our  men. 

Whereupon  she  began  to  be  exceedingly  pensive 
and  discontented,  although  still  ignorant  of  the 
treachery  of  Japazeus  ;  in  outward  appearance,  he 
was  no  less  unhappy  than  she  was  herself  that  he 
should  be  the  means  of  her  captivity. 


no.  35]  Powhatan  i  o  i 

35.    In  Powhatan's  Country 

By  Raphe  Hamor  (161 3-1 614) 

Much  ado  there  was  to  persuade  Pocahontas  to  be  a  continua- 
patient.      With   extraordinary   courteous   usage   they   tlonofthe 

1  .  .  J  °  J     previous 

accomplished  this  little  by  little,  and  so  to  James-  story. 
town  she  was  brought,  and  a  messenger  to  her  father 
was  forewith  despatched  to  tell  him  that  his  only 
daughter  was  in  the  hands  and  possession  of  the  Eng- 
lish. There  she  was  to  be  kept  until  such  time  as  he 
would  ransom  her  with  our  men,  swords,  arms,  and 
other  tools  treacherously  taken  from  us. 

The  news  was  unwelcome  and  troublesome  to  him,    Probably 
partly  for  the  loye  he  bare  to  his  daughter  and  partly  they  had  run 

' ,  ,       ,  .  .  .  c       ,       J     away  to  the 

to  the  love  he  bare  to  our  men  his  prisoners,  or  whom   Indians, 
he  made  great  use  although  with  us  they  seemed  un- 
fitted for  any  employment.     And  those  swords  and 
firearms  of  ours,  though  they  were  of  no  use  to  him, 
delighted  him  just  to  look  upon. 

He  could  not  without  long  advice  and  deliberation 
with  his  council,  resolve  upon  anything,  and  it  is 
really  true  that  we  heard  nothing  from  him  till  three 
months  afterwards.  Then  by  persuasion  of  others 
he  returned  seven  of  our  men,  and  with  each  of  them 
an  unserviceable  musket.  By  them  he  sent  us  word 
that  whenever  we  pleased  to  deliver  his  daughter,  he 
would  give  us  in  satisfaction  of  the  injuries  he  had 
done  to  us,  and  for  the  rest  of  our  firearms  broken 
and  stolen  from  him,  would  pay  five  hundred  bushels 
of  corn  and  be  forever  friends  with  us. 

The  men  and  arms  we  received  in  part  payment, 
and  returned  to  him  for  an  answer  that  his  daughter 
was  very  well,  and  was  kindly  treated,  and  should  be 


i  o  2  Indians  [No.  35 

well  treated,  however  he  dealt  with  us  :  but  we  could 
not  believe  that  the  rest  of  our  arms  were  either  lost 
or  stolen  from  him  and  therefore  until  he  returned 
them  all,  we  would  not  by  any  means  deliver  his 
daughter  Then  it  should  be  at  his  choice  whether 
he  would  establish  peace  or  continue  enemies  with  us. 

This  answer  as  it  seemed  did  not  please  him  very 
well  for  we  heard  no  more  from  him  till  last  March. 
Then  with  Captain  Argall's  ship  and  some  other  ves- 
sels belonging  to  the  colony,  Sir  Thomas  Dale  with 
an  hundred  and  fifty  men  well  equipped  went  up  into 
Powhatan's  river,  where  his  chief  habitations  were. 
We  carried  with  us  his  daughter,  either  to  move  them 
to  fight  for  her,  if  such  were  their  courage  and  bold- 
ness, or  to  restore  the  remainder  of  our  goods,  that  is 
our  swords,  arms,  and  tools. 

We  proceeded  and  had  entered  the  narrows  of  the 
river,  where  the  channel  lay  within  shot  of  the 
shore,  when  from  an  ambush  they  let  their  arrows 
fly  amongst  us  in  our  ship.  We  were  justly  pro- 
voked, and  forthwith  manned  our  boats,  went  ashore 
and  burned  in  that  very  place  some  forty  houses  ;  and 
of  the  things  we  found  therein,  we  made  free  booty 
and  pillage.  As  they  themselves  afterwards  con- 
fessed us,  we  wounded  and  killed  five  or  six  of  their 
men.  With  this  revenge,  we  satisfied  ourselves  for 
their  presumption  in  shooting  at  us. 

The  critical  time  now  came  ;  we  went  the  higher 
up  the  river,  and  anchored  near  Powhatan's  resi- 
dence. Here  at  a  town  called  Matchot  were  as- 
sembled about  four  hundred  men  well  appointed  with 
their  bows  and  arrows  to  welcome  us.  They  dared 
us  to  come  ashore,  a  thing  which  we  had  planned 
before  ;  so  ashore  we  wrent. 


no. 36]  Pocahontas 's   W eddi?ig     103 

36.    The  Wedding  of  Pocahontas 

By  Raphe  IIamok  (1613-1614) 

Two  of  Powhatan's  sons  came  to  us  who  were  very  Ccmthra~n< 
desirous  to  see  their  sister,  there  present  on  the  shore  previoU<! 
with  us.     They  rejoiced  greatly  at  the  sight  of  Poca-  story. 
hontas  and  at  her  well-being,  for  they  had  suspected 
that  she  would  be  badly  treated,  although  they  had 
often  heard  the  contrary.     They  promised  that  they 
would  persuade  their  father  to  redeem  her  and  to  con- 
clude a  firm  peace  forever  with  us.     Upon  this  resolu- 
tion the  two  brothers  went  on  board  our  boat  with  us. 

We  had  already  despatched  two  Englishmen,  Mas- 
ter John  Rolfe  and  Master  Sparkes  to  acquaint  their 
father  with  the  business  in  hand.  The  next  day 
these  men  returned  saying  that  they  had  not  been 
admitted  to  Powhatan's  presence;  but  they  had 
spoken  with  his  brother  Apachamo,  his  successor, 
who  had  already  the  command  of  all  the  people ; 
and  promised  his  best  endeavors  to  further  our  just 
request. 

It  was  then  April  and  the  time  of  year  called  us 
to  our  business  at  home,  to  prepare  ground  and  to 
plant  corn  for  our  winter's  provisions ;  so  we  de- 
parted upon  these  terms,  giving  the  Indians  respite 
till  harvest,  to  decide  what  was  best  for  them  to  do. 
We  told  them  clearly  that  if  a  final  agreement  were 
not  made  between  us  before  that  time,  we  should  re- 
turn again  and  destroy  or  take  away  all  their  corn, 
burn  all  the  houses  upon  that  river,  leave  not  a  fish- 
ing weir  standing  nor  a  canoe  in  any  creek  there- 
abouts, and  kill  as  many  of  them  as  we  could. 

Long  before  this  time,  a   gentleman   of    approved 


104 


Ind\ 


tans 


[No.  37 


The  James- 
town settle- 
ment was 
commonly 
spoken  of  as 
the  Planta- 
tion. 


behavior  and  honest  carriage,  Master  John  Rolfe, 
fell  in  love  with  Pocahontas  and  she  with  him.  Of 
this  fact  I  made  Sir  Thomas  Dale  aware  by  a  letter 
from  Master  John  Rolfe,  even  while  we  were  confer- 
ring and  making  conditions  with  Powhatan's  men. 
In  the  letter  Rolfe  begged  Dale's  advice  and  assist- 
ance in  his  love,  if  it  seemed  to  him  for  the  good  of 
the  Plantation.  Pocahontas  herself  told  her  brothers 
about  it.  Sir  Thomas  Dale's  approval  of  the  match 
was  the  only  reason  why  he  was  so  mild  amongst 
Powhatan's  people.  Otherwise  he  would  not  have 
departed  from  their  river,  without  other  conditions. 

The  rumor  of  this  intended  marriage  soon  came  to 
Powhatan's  knowledge  and  was  acceptable  to  him,  as 
appeared  by  his  sudden  consent  thereto.  Some  ten 
days  after  he  sent  an  old  uncle  of  hers,  named  Opa- 
chisco,  to  give  her  away  in  the  church  as  his  deputy, 
and  two  of  his  sons  to  see  the  marriage  solemnized. 
This  was  done  about  the  fifth  of  April,  and  ever  since 
then  we  have  had  friendly  relations  not  only  with 
Powhatan  himself,  but  also  with  his  subjects  round 
about  us ;  so  that  now  I  see  no  reason  why  the  colony 
should  not  thrive  apace. 


37.     Children  of  Moshup  turned 
into  Fishes 


By  Thomas  Cooper  (1620) 

A  half-blood-       The  first  Indian  who  came  to   Martha's  Vineyard 
ed  Indian        wag  brought  there   with   his  dog   on   a  cake   of  ice. 

about  sixty  °  ° 

years  old  told  When  he  came  to  Gay  Head,  he  found  a  very  large 


no.  37]  A?i   Indian   Story  105 

man  whose  name  was  Moshup.     He  had  a  wife  and  these  stories, 
five  children,  four  sons  and  one  daughter.  He  said  they 

TTi-i-  i  tt  i  iii  i     were  told  to 

He  lived  in  a  den.     He  used  to  catch  whales  and  him  by  his 

then  pull  up  trees  and  make  a  fire  and  roast  them,  grandmother 

The  coals  of  the  trees  and  the  bones  of  the  whales  ^on^iri 

are  now  to  be  seen.     After  he  was  tired  of  staying  when  the 

here,  he  told  his  children  to  go  and  play  ball  on  a  English  first 

0  r      j  came  among 

beach  that  joined  No  Man's  Land  to  Gay  Head.  her  people. 

He  then  made  a  mark  with  his  toe  across  the  beach 
at  each  end.  He  made  it  so  deep  that  the  water 
came  in  and  cut  away  the  beach,  so  that  his  children 
were  in  fear  of  drowning. 

They  took  their  sister  up,  and  held  her  out  of  the 
water.  He  told  them  to  act  as  if  they  were  going  to 
kill  whales,  and  they  were  all  turned  into  fishes. 

The  sister  was  dressed  in  large  stripes.  The  father 
gave  them  a  strict  order  always  to  be  kind  to  her. 
His  wife  mourned  the  loss  of  her  children  so  greatly 
that  he  threw  her  away.  She  fell  upon  Seconet,  near 
the  rocks,  where  she  lived  some  time,  begging  from 
all  who  passed  on  the  water.  After  a  while  she  was 
changed  into  a  stone.  The  entire  shape  of  her  re- 
mained for  many  years. 

But  after  the  English  came,  some  of  them  broke 
off  the  arms  and  head  ;  but  most  of  the  body  is  there 
to  this  day.  Moshup  went  away,  no  one  knew 
where.  He  never  talked  with  the  Indians,  but  he 
was  kind  to  them,  by  sending  whales  ashore  for  them 
to  eat.  But  after  there  grew  to  be  too  many  Indians 
around  him,  he  left  them. 


io6 


Indl 


tans 


[No.  38 


Passaconna- 
way  was 
chieftain  of 
the  Penna- 
cook  Indians, 
in  the 
Merrimac 
River.     No 
one  set  down 
his  speech  at 
the  time,  but 
this  is  the 
spirit  of  his 
words. 

At  the  doors 
of  the  lodges 
the  Indians 
set  up  poles, 
ornamented 
with  the 
scalps  of 
those  whom 
they  had 
killed. 

I  e.  they  went 
west  and 
attacked  the 
fierce 
Iroquois. 

The  English 
muskets 
seemed 
strange  to  the 
Indians  on 
account  of 
the  flash  of 
light  and 
noise  made 
when  one 
was  fired. 


38.    A  Chieftain's  Lament 

By  Passaconnaway  (1660) 

Hearken  to  the  words  of  your  father.  I  am  an 
old  oak  that  has  withstood  the  storms  of  more  than  a 
hundred  winters.  Leaves  and  branches  have  been 
stripped  from  me  by  the  winds  and  frosts.  My  eyes 
are  dim.     My  limbs  totter.     I  must  soon  fall ! 

But  when  young  and  strong,  my  bow  could  be  bent 
by  no  young  man  of  the  Pennacooks.  My  arrows 
would  pierce  a  deer  at  a  hundred  yards,  and  I  could 
bury  my  hatchet  in  a  sapling  up  to  the  handle. 

No  wigwam  then  had  so  many  furs.  No  pole  had 
so  many  scalp  locks  as  Passaconnaway's  !  Then  I 
delighted  in  war.  The  whoop  of  the  Pennacooks 
was  heard  upon  the  Mohawk  —  and  no  voice  so  loud 
as  Passaconnaway's.  The  scalps  upon  the  pole  of 
my  wigwam  told  the  story  of  Mohawk  suffering. 

The  English  came,  they  seized  our  lands ;  I  sat  me 
down  at  Pennacook.  They  followed  upon  my  foot- 
steps. I  made  war  upon  them,  but  they  fought  with 
fire  and  thunder.  My  young  men  were  swept  down 
before  me,  when  no  one  was  near  them. 

I  tried  magic  against  them,  but  they  still  increased 
and  got  the  better  of  me  and  mine.  I  gave  place 
to  them  and  came  to  my  beautiful  island  of  Natti- 
cook. 

I,  that  can  make  the  dry  leaf  turn  green  and  live 
again  —  I,  that  can  take  the  rattlesnake  in  my  palm 
as  I  would  a  worm,  without  harm  —  I,  who  have  had 
communion  with  the  Great  Spirit  dreaming  and  awake 
—  I  am  powerless  before  the  pale  faces.  The  oak 
will  soon  break  before  the  whirlwind.     It  shivers  and 


no. 39]  A  Lament  107 

shakes  even  now.  Soon  its  trunk  will  be  fallen  — 
the  ant  and  the  worm  will  sport  upon  it  ! 

Then  think,  my  children,  of  what  I  say.  I  com- 
mune with  the  Great  Spirit.  He  whispers  to  me 
now  :  "  Tell  your  people  peace,  peace,  is  the  only 
hope  of  your  race.  I  have  given  fire  and  thunder 
to  the  pale  faces  for  weapons.  I  have  made  them 
plentier  than  the  leaves  of  the  forest,  and  still  shall 
they  increase ! 

These  meadows  shall  turn  with  the  plough.  These 
forests  shall  fall  by  the  axe.  The  pale  faces  shall 
live  upon  your  hunting-grounds,  and  make  their  vil- 
lages upon  your  fishing-places  !  "  The  Great  Spirit 
says  this  and  it  must  be  so  ! 

We  are  few  and  powerless  before  them  !  We  must 
bend  before  the  storm  !  The  wind  blows  hard  !  The 
old  oak  trembles  !  Its  branches  are  gone  !  Its  sap 
is  frozen  !  It  bends  !  It  falls  !  Peace,  peace  with 
the  white  men  —  is  the  command  of  the  Great  Spirit 
—  and  the  wish  —  the  last  wish  of  Passaconnaway. 


39.     Indian  School-Boys 

By  Caitain  Daniel  Goukin  (1674) 

PART   I 

That  which   I  shall  here  offer,  may  be  included  Apprentices 

under  two  heads.      First,  that  our  utmost  efforts  be  Nvere  Placed 

used,  with  all  industrv  and  diligence,  that  the  Indians,  parents  or 

especially  the  children  and   youth,  may  be  taught  to  guardians 

,  ,  .  .  , ,        ,,        ..    ,     ,  with  master 

speak,  read,  and  write,  the  English  tongue.  workmen, 

For  this  end  I  propose,  first,  that  as  many  of  their  who  agreed 


io8 


Indi 


tans 


[No.  39 


to  teach  them  children  as  may  be  procured,  with  the  free  consent 
trades  or         Q£  their  parents  and  relations,  be  placed  in  sober  and 

household  L  L 

work.  Christian   families,   as   apprentices,    until   the  youths 

are   twenty-one   years,    and   the    maids   are  eighteen 


INDIAN    WRITINGS. 


years  of  age :  the  boys  to  be  instructed  in  the  trades 
practised  by  their  masters  ;  and  the  girls  in  good 
housewifery  of  all  sorts  :  with  this  provision  in  all 
contracts  and  indentures,  that  they  shall  be  taught  to 
read  and  write  the  English  tongue  at  the  cost  of  their 
masters.  And  this  may  be  easily  accomplished,  be- 
cause servants  are  scarce  in  New  England.  The 
ordering  of  this  affair  must  be  committed  to  the  man- 
agement of  prudent  persons,  who  have  an  interest  in 
the  Indians,  and  who  may  be  able,  by  their  authority 
and  wisdom,  so  to  argue  the  case  with  the  Indians, 
as  to  convince  them  that  such  a  plan  is  for  their  chil- 
dren's good.  For  Indians  are  generally  so  indulgent 
to  their  children,  that  they  are  not  easily  persuaded 
to  give  them  over  to  the  English. 

Secondly,  another  way  for  bringing  this  matter  to 
pass,  is  by  setting  up  one  or  two  free  schools,  to  teach 
them  to  read  and  write  English.     But  this  thins:  hath 


No.  39] 


School-Boys 


109 


some  difficulty  in  it ;  partly  because  a  person  suitable 
to  be  a  schoolmaster  will  not  be  willing  to  leave  the 
English  society,  and  to  live  constantly  among  the 
Indians,  as  such  a  work  would  require.  There  is  also 
the  question  as  to  how  the  Indian  children  that  are 
sent  to  school,  shall  be  provided  with  food  and  cloth- 
ing, without  charge  on  the  Indian  property  of  the 
Indian  tribe.  The  only  exception  to  this  should  be  a  A  blue  coat 
blue  coat  for  each  of  them   once  a  year,  which  will   ",as  f blue 

J  blanket. 

not  cost  much,  but  will  greatly  encourage  the  Indians. 

For  the  accomplishing  of  this  matter  for  the  Ind-  John  E,10t' 

...  ......  r-nT  1  ti  tne  great 

ians  within  the  jurisdiction  of  Massachusetts,  1  have   missionary 
consulted  and  advised  with  Mr.   Eliot;   and  we  both   to  the 
joined  in  a  proposal  to  the  honored  commissioners  of 
the  United  Colonies,  at  their  last  meeting.     I  have 
consulted  also  with  most  of  the  principal  rulers  and 
teachers  of  the  praying  Indians,  and  they  have  gen-   Le. Christian 
erally  agreed  and  approved  the  expedient  following.      Indian=- 


PART   11 

There  is  an  Indian  village,  within  twenty-eight  or 
thirty  miles  from  Boston,  westward  upon  the  road  to 
Connecticut,  called  Okommakamesit,  otherwise  Marl- 
borough, which  lieth  very  near  the  centre  of  most  of 
the  praying  villages.  This  Indian  plantation  joineth  Plantation 
unto  an  English  town  called  Marlborough  ;  so  that  settlement- 
the  English  and  Indian  plantations  bear  the  same 
name.  In  this  Indian  plantation  there  is  a  piece  of 
fertile  land,  containing  above  one  hundred  and  fifty 
acres,  upon  which  the  Indians  have  lived  for  some 
little  time,  and  they  have  planted  apple-trees  there- 
upon which  bear  an  abundance  of  fruit. 

This   parcel  of   land,  with   the  addition  of   twenty 


I  IO 


Indi 


tans 


[No.  39 


Two  hun- 
dred pounds 

=  $  IOOO. 


In  Massa- 
chusetts the 
state  legisla- 
ture has 
always  been 
called  the 
General 
Court. 


acres  of  the  nearest  meadow,  and  a  woodland  of 
about  fifty  acres,  is  well  worth  two  hundred  pounds 
in  money.  Yet  the  Indians  will  willingly  devote  it  to 
this  work  ;  for  it  brings  little  or  no  profit  to  them,  nor 
is  it  ever  like  to  do  so.  The  Englishmen's  cattle 
devour  all  in  it,  because  it  lies  .  open  and  unf  enced  ; 
and  while  the  Indians  planted  there,  it  was  in  a  way 
fenced  by  them  ;  yet  by  their  improvidence  and  bad 
fences,  they  reaped  little  benefit  in  those  times  ;  and 
that  was  one  cause  of  their  removal. 

Now  I  propose  that  the  parcel  of  land  above  de- 
scribed, be  set  apart  for  an  Indian  free  school,  and 
confirmed  by  an  act  of  the  General  Court  of  this 
colony,  for  this  end  forever :  and  that  it  be  fenced 
with  a  stone  wall  into  two  or  three  enclosures  for  cow 
pastures.  This  may  be  done  easily,  because  there 
are  stones  enough  at  hand  upon  it.  Then  to  build  a 
convenient  house  for  a  schoolmaster  and  his  family, 
and  under  the  same  roof  may  be  room  for  a  school  : 
also  to  build  some  outhouses  for  hay,  and  cattle.  The 
cost  of  all  this  will  not  amount  to  above  two  hundred 
pounds  in  money.  When  this  is  done,  the  place  will 
be  fit  to  accommodate  a  schoolmaster  and  his  family, 
without  any  other  salary  than  the  use  of  this  farm. 

Moreover,  it  is  very  probable,  that  the  English 
people  of  Marlborough,  will  gladly  and  readily  send 
their  children  to  the  same  school,  paying  the  school- 
master for  them.  This  will  better  his  income  and  be 
good  for  them,  for  they  have  no  school  in  that  place 
at  the  present.  In  regard  to  this  plan,  I  have  heard 
some  of  the  most  prudent  white  people  lament ;  but 
it  is  expensive  to  raise  a  school  and  support  a  school- 
master for  twenty  or  thirty  children,  and  the  inhabi- 
tants are  backward  in  doino-  it. 


No.  39] 


A  School 


111 


The  laws  of  the  colony  require  every  village  con- 
sisting of  fifty  families,  to  provide  a  school  to  teach 
the  English  tongue  and  to  write  ;  but  these  people  of 
Marlborough,  because  they  have  not  quite  fifty  fami- 
lies, take  that  low  advantage  so  as  to  ease  their 
purses  of  this  common  charge.  But  as  soon  as  this 
school  herein  proposed,  is  set  up,  it  will  be  to  their 
interest  to  put  their  children  to  it,  because  this  will  be 
the  cheapest  and  easiest  way  that  they  can  take. 

By  my  plan  the  schoolmaster  will  reap  an  advan- 
tage in  his  neighborhood,  and  be  in  communion  with 
the  English  church  at  Marlborough.  This  will  tend 
to  remove  the  first  difficulty.  Besides,  the  English 
and  Indian  children  will  learn  together  in  the  same 
school,  and  that  will  promote  the  Indians'  learning  to 
speak  the  English  tongue.  Of  this  we  have  had 
experience,  when  Indian  children  were  taught  by 
English  schoolmasters  at  Roxbury  and  Cambridge, 
in  former  years.  Then  several  Indian  children  were 
kept  at  those  schools.  A  second  difficulty  is  this : 
how  shall  these  Indian  children,  though  they  have 
their  schooling  free,  be  provided  with  diet  and  cloth- 
ing, without  public  charge  ?  I  answer,  that  I  have 
conferred  with  several  of  the  most  prudent  and  judi- 
cious Indians  of  the  other  towns,  who  think  there  will 
be  no  difficulty  to  provide  board  for  their  children, 
by  procuring  it  at  reasonable  rates  from  the  Indians, 
their  countrymen,  who  inhabit  Marlborough.  And 
as  for  clothing,  a  little  serves  them,  and  that  of  a 
poor  sort,  and  their  parents  can  provide  it,  especially 
if  the  Honorable  Corporation  order  them  a  blue  coat 
once  a  year  in  the  beginning  of  winter,  and  also  pro- 
vide them  with  books. 


I.e.  since 
they  were  not 
compelled 
by  law  to 
keep  up  a 
school,  they 
saved  their 
money  by 
neglecting 
the  common 
duty. 


Diet  = 

board. 


112 


Indians 


[No.  40 


Several  per- 
sons who 
have  been 
taken  pris- 
oners by  the 
Indians  tell 
touching 
stories  con- 
cerning the 
goodness 
of  God  in 
carrying 
them  through 
many  dan- 
gers, and  at 
last  setting 
them  in  a 
safe  place 
again.     Here 
is  one  man's 
story  in  his 
own  words. 


40.    Rescued  from  Captivity 

By  Increase  Mather  (1677) 

Between  sunset  and  dark  the  Indians  came  upon 
us.  Another  man  and  I  who  were  together  ran 
away  at  the  outcry  the  Indians  made.  They  were 
shouting  and  shooting  at  some  others  of  the  English 
that  were  close  by.  We  took  for  our  place  of  safety 
a  swamp  that  was  near. 

The  Indians  seeing  us  so  near  them,  ran  after  us 
and  shot  many  guns  at  us.  Three  shots  were  fired 
upon  me,  while  the  Indians  were  quite  close  to  me. 
As  the  swamp  was  muddy  I  slipped  and  fell  down ; 
whereupon  one  of  the  enemy  stepped  up  to  me,  with 
his  hatchet  lifted  up  to  knock  me  on  the  head. 

He  thought  I  was  so  hurt  by  my  fall  that  I  could 
not  go  any  farther.  As  it  happened,  I  had  a  pistol 
with  me,  which  I  pointed  at  the  Indian.  He  stepped 
back  thinking  it  was  loaded,  but  it  was  not.  He  said 
if  I  would  give  myself  up,  I  should  have  no  hurt;  he 
added  that  the  woods  were  full  of  Indians. 

So  I  gave  myself  up  and  by  three  of  them  was  led 
away.  Two  other  Indians  came  running  to  us  ;  and 
one  lifted  up  the  end  of  his  gun  to  knock  me  on  the 
head.  But  the  other  put  up  his  hand  and  stopped 
the  blow,  and  said  I  was  his  friend. 

They  now  took  me,  bound  me,  and  led  me  away. 
Soon  I  was  brought  into  the  company  of  other  cap- 
tives that  were  that  day  brought  away  from  the  town 
of  Hatfield.  It  was  cause  for  both  sorrow  and  joy  to 
see  the  other  people :  for  company  in  such  a  sad  con- 
dition was  a  comfort,  though  of  little  help  in  any  way. 

Then  we  were  all  bound  and  led  away  in  the  night 


no.  4o]  Captives  113 

over  the  mountains.  Through  dark  and  awful  places, 
we  went  at  least  four  miles,  before  we  found  a  place 
for  a  brief  rest.  This  was  in  a  dismal  place  of  woods 
on  the  side  of  the  mountain. 

We  were  kept  bound  all  that  night.  The  Indians 
kept  waking,  and  we  had  little  mind  to  sleep  in  this 
night's  travel.  The  Indians  scattered,  and  as  they 
went  made  strange  noises,  as  of  wolves,  and  owls, 
and  other  wild  beasts.  This  was  so  that  they  would 
not  lose  each  other,  or  be  discovered  by  the  Eng- 
lish. 

About  the  break  of  day,  we  marched  again  and 
went  over  a  great  river.  There  we  rested,  and  the 
Indians  marked  out  upon  trays  the  number  of  their 
prisoners,  as  their  custom  is. 

Here  I  was  again  in  great  danger.  A  quarrel  arose 
about  me  over  a  question  as  to  whose  captive  I  was ; 
for  three  took  me.  I  thought  I  must  be  killed  to  end 
the  trouble  ;  so  when  they  put  it  to  me,  whose  I  was, 
I  said  three  Indians  took  me.  So  they  agreed  to  have 
all  a  share  in  me  ;  and  I  had  now  three  masters.  That 
one  was  my  chief  master  who  laid  hands  on  me  first, 
and  so  I  was  fallen  into  the  hands  of  the  worst  of  all 
the  company. 

In  this  place  they  gave  us  some  food  which  they 
had  seized  from  the  English. 

The  next  night  found  us  in  another  dismal  place.   A  common 
We  were  then  staked  down  and  spread  out  on  our  Prac,iceoi 

x  the  Indians, 

backs;  and  so  we  lay  all  night,  yes,  so  we  lay  many  to  prevent 

nifirhtS  their  captives 

,.,.  ,  .  ,      .       ,  ,  ,         ,  .     ,.  from  escap- 

1  hey   told    me   their   law   was   that   we   should    lie   in„ 
SO   nine   nights.      By   that    time,   it  was   thought,  we 
should  no  longer  know  where  we  were.     The  manner 
of  staking  down  was  this  :  our  arms  and  legs  stretched 

1 


114  Indians  [No.  4o 

out  were  staked  down  fast,  and  a  cord  was  about  our 
necks,  so  that  we  could  not  stir. 

The  next  day  we  crossed  the  river  again,  and  there 
we  took  up  our  quarters  for  a  long  time.  We  were 
now  so  many  miles  away,  that  the  Indians  were  quite 
out  of  all  fear  of  the  English.  But  they  were  now  in 
great  fear  of  other  tribes  of  Indians.  Here  they  built 
a  long  wigwam. 

Here  they  had  a  great  dance,  as  they  call  it,  and 
decided  to  burn  three  of  us.  They  had  got  bark  to 
do  it  with,  and  as  I  understood  afterwards,  I  was  one 
that  was  to  be  burnt.  Though  I  knew  not  which  was 
to  be  burnt,  yet  I  knew  some  were  intended  for  that  : 
so  much  I  understood  of  their  language.  The  next 
day  when  we  were  to  be  burnt,  our  master  and  some 
others  took  our  part,  and  so  the  evil  was  prevented 
in  this  place. 

Here  I  had  a  shirt  brought  to  me  to  make.  One 
of  my  Indian  masters  said  it  should  be  made  this  way, 
a  second  said  another  way,  a  third  his  way.  I  told 
them  I  would  make  it  the  way  my  chief  master  said. 
Then  one  Indian  struck  me  on  the  face  with  his  fist. 
I  suddenly  rose  up  in  anger  ready  to  strike  too  :  upon 
this  there  was  a  great  hubbub.  I  had  to  humble  my- 
self to  my  master  and  so  that  matter  ended. 

While  we  were  here  one  of  the  English  captives 
made  his  escape  from  them  ;  and  when  the  news  of 
his  escape  came,  we  were  all  called  in  and  bound. 
One  of  the  Indians,  a  captain  among  them,  and  always 
our  great  friend,  met  me  coming  in  :  he  told  me  about 
the  run-away.  The  Indians  were  very  angry,  and 
spoke  of  burning  us.  They  held  court,  and  it  was 
decided  that  the  Indian  that  let  the  run-away  go  was 
the  person  to  blame.     So  no  harm  was  done  to  us. 


no.  4o]  Captives  115 

While  we  lingered  here  food  grew  scarce.  One 
bear  foot  must  serve  five  of  us  for  a  whole  day.  Then 
we  parted  into  two  companies.  Some  went  one  way 
and  some  another  way.  We  went  over  a  great  moun- 
tain. We  were  eight  days  going  over  it,  and  travelled 
very  hard.  Every  day  we  had  either  snow  or  rain. 
Here  also  we  lacked  food. 

We  came  to  a  lake  and  stayed  there  a  great  while 
to  make  canoes  to  go  over  the  lake.  Here  I  was 
almost  frozen  and  here  we  almost  starved.  All  the 
Indians  went  hunting  but  got  nothing. 

Then  they  wished  the  English  to  pray  and  see  what 
the  Englishman's  God  could  do.  So  we  prayed.  The 
Indians  came  believingly,  night  and  morning,  to  our 
prayers.  Next  day  they  got  bears.  Then  they  would 
have  us  give  thanks  to  God  at  meals.  But  after  a 
while  they  grew  tired  of  this,  and  the  chief  stopped  it. 

Then  a  storm  overtook  us.  And  I  was  for  several 
days  without  food.  When  I  came  to  travel  in  the  ice 
I  soon  tired.  Two  Indians  ran  away;  and  one  only 
was  left.  He  would  carry  me  a  while  and  then  I 
would  walk  a  while.  He  carried  me  to  a  Frenchman's 
house,  and  set  me  clown.  There  they  gave  me  food 
and  drink  and  sent  for  the  doctor,  who  said  he  could 
cure  me. 

My  Indian  master  was  in  want  of  money,  and 
pawned  me  to  the  white  man  for  fourteen  beaver 
skins.  But  he  could  not  get  the  beavers,  and  so  I 
was  sold.  But  by  being  thus  sold,  I  was  in  God's 
good  time  set  at  liberty  and  returned  to  my  friends  in 
New  England. 


1 16 


hidi 


tans 


[No.  41 


41.    The  Pipe  of  Peace 

By  Monsieur  Jontel  (1679) 

While  we 
halted  on  the 
bank  of  a  river 
to  eat,  we  heard 
the  tinkling  of 
some  small 
bells.  This 
made  us  look 
about  and  we 
spied  an  Indian 
with  a  naked 
sword-blade  in 
his  hand.  It 
was  adorned 
with  feathers 
of  several  colors,  and  two  large  hawks'  bells,  which 
made  the  noise  we  had  heard. 

He  made  sis;ns  for  us  to  come  to  him,  and  gave  us 
to  understand  that  he  was  sent  by  the  leaders  of  the 
Indians  to  meet  us,  and  bring  us  to  their  village.  He 
caressed  us  in  a  strange  way.  I  noticed  that  he  took 
pleasure  in  ringing  the  hawks'  bells. 

Having  travelled  a  while  with  him,  we  saw  a  dozen 
other  Indians  coming  towards  us.  They  made  much 
of  us  and  conducted  us  to  the  village,  to  the  chief's 
cottage.  There  we  found  dried  bear-skins  laid  on  the 
ground.  They  made  us  sit  on  these.  We  were  then 
treated  with  eatables,  and  a  throng  of  women  came  to 
see  us. 

The  next  day  the  elders  came  to  visit  us.  They 
brought  us  two  buffalo  hides,  the  skins  of  four  others, 


PIPE    OF    PEACE 


No.  41] 


Frie?idship 


1 1 


7 


one  white  wild  goat's  skin,  all  of  them  well  dried. 
They  also  gave  us  four  bows.  These  things  they 
gave  in  return  for  the  present  we  had  before  made 
them.  The  chief  and  another  Indian  came  again  some 
time  after,  bringing  two  loaves,  the  finest  and  the 
best  we  had  yet  seen. 

Towards  evening,  we  were  entertained  with  a  cere- 
mony we  had  not  seen  before.  A  company  of  elders, 
with  some  young  men  and  women,  came  to  our  cot- 
tage in  a  body,  singing  as  loud  as  they  could  roar. 
The  foremost  had  a  calumet,  so  they  call  a  very  long 
sort  of  tobacco-pipe,  adorned  with  several  sorts  of 
feathers.  When  they  had  sung  a  while,  before  our 
cottage,  they  entered  it,  still  singing  on  for  about  a 
quarter  of  a  hour. 

After  that  they  took  our  priest,  whom  they  consid- 
ered our  chief,  and  led  him  in  solemn  manner  out  of 
the  cottage,  holding  him  under  the  arms.  When  they 
were  come  to  a  place  they  had  ready,  one  of  them 
laid  a  great  handful  of  grass  on  his  feet.  Two  others 
brought  clean 
waterin  an  earthen 
dish  and  washed 
his  face.  Then 
they  made  him  sit 
down  on  a  skin, 
put  there  for  the 
purpose. 

When  the  priest 
was  seated,  the 
elders  took  their 
places,  sitting 
round  about  him. 
The  master  of  the 


i  i  8  Indians  [No.  4i 

ceremonies  fixed  in  the  ground  two  little  wooden  forks. 
He  laid  a  stick  across  these;  all  the  things  were 
painted  red.  He  placed  on  them  a  buffalo  hide  dried, 
a  goat's  skin  over  that,  and  then  laid  the  pipe  thereon. 

The  song  was  begun  again,  the  women  joining  in 
the  chorus.  The  concert  was  made  louder  by  great 
hollow  gourds,  in  which  there  were  large  gravel 
stones. 

The  Indians  struck  upon  these,  keeping  time  with 
the  notes  of  the  choir.  And  the  most  amusing  of  all 
was  that  one  of  the  Indians  placed  himself  behind 
our  priest,  to  hold  him  up ;  at  the  same  time  he 
shook  and  dandled  him  from  side  to  side,  doing  all 
in  time  with  the  music. 

The  concert  was  hardly  ended,  when  the  master  of 
the  ceremonies  brought  two  maids,  one  having  in  her 
hand  a  sort  of  collar,  and  the  other  an  otter's  skin. 
These  they  placed  on  the  wooden  forks,  at  the  ends 
of  the  pipe.  Then  he  made  them  sit  down  on  each 
side  of  our  priest,  facing  each  other  and  with  their 
feet  spread  out  on  the  ground. 

Then  one  of  the  elders  fastened  a  dyed  feather  to 
the  back  part  of  the  priest's  head,  tying  it  to  his  hair. 
The  singing  went  on  all  that  time.  But  the  priest 
grew  tired  of  all  this  and  made  signs  to  us.  We 
made  it  known  to  the  chief  that  the  priest  was  not 
well.  So  two  of  the  Indians  took  hold  of  him  under 
the  arms  and  led  him  back  to  the  cottage.  They 
made  signs  to  him  to  take  a  rest. 

This  was  at  about  nine  in  the  evening  and  the  Ind- 
ians spent  all  that  night  singing.  In  the  morning 
they  went  again  to  the  priest,  took  him  again  out  of 
the  cottage,  with  the  same  ceremony,  but  made  him 
sit  down  while  the  sinking-  was  £0ino;  on. 


no.  42]  Pipe  of  Peace  119 

Then  the  master  of  the  ceremonies  took  the  pipe, 
filled  it  with  tobacco  and  lighted  it,  next  he  offered 
it  to  the  priest ;  but  he  drew  back  and  came  forward 
six  times  before  he  gave  it  to  him.  Having  at  last 
put  it  in  his  hands,  the  priest  made  motions  as  if  he 
were  smoking,  and  gave  it  back  to  them.  Then  they 
made  us  all  smoke  round,  every  one  of  them  in  his 
turn,  the  music  still  going  on. 

The  sun  was  growing  very  hot,  and  the  bare  headed 
priest  made  signs  that  it  did  him  harm.  Then  at  last 
they  stopped  singing  and  took  him  back  into  the  cot- 
tage. They  took  the  pipe  and  put  it  into  a  case  made 
of  wild  goat's  skin,  with  the  two  wooden  forks  and 
the  red  stick  that  lay  across  them.  All  of  these  one 
of  the  elders  offered  the  priest. 

They  told  him  that  he  might  pass  through  all  the 
Indian  nations  which  were  their  friends.  Because  he 
had  this  sign  of  peace,  he  would  every  where  meet 
with  kindness.  This  was  the  first  place  where  we 
saw  the  calumet,  or  pipe  of  peace. 


42.    Saving  a  Flock  of  Children 

By  Daniel  Neal    (1697) 

All  the  plans  of  the  English  during  the  vear  1696 
seemed  to  be  upset  and  nothing  but  murmurings  and 
complaints  were  to  be  heard  from  one  end  of  the 
Massachusetts  province  to  the  other.  The  Indians 
on  the  other  hand  were  strangely  exalted  with  their 
late  success  and  threatened  to  ruin  the  whole  country 
during  the  next  summer.  In  the  meantime  they 
posted    themselves    so    advantageously    that   it    was 


i  2  o  Indians  [No.  ^ 

hardly  safe  for  the  people  on  the  frontiers  to  stir  out 
of  their  houses.  They  killed  many  people  who  were 
at  work  in  their  fields.  To  crown  the  calamities  of 
the  year  there  was  a  very  great  scarcity  of  all  sorts 
of  grain,  and  the  poor  were  ready  to  break  out  into 
riot  for  want  of  bread. 

In  the  winter  the  enemy  were  pretty  quiet,  but  upon 
the  fifteenth  of  March,  they  made  a  descent  upon  the 
outskirts  of  Haverhill,  burnt  about  half  a  dozen  houses 
and  captured  thirty-nine  persons.  Among  the  prison- 
erswas  Hannah  Dunston,  who  was  a  very  brave  woman. 
At  this  time  she  was  weak  and  sick  in  her  bed  with 
only  her  nurse  and  eight  small  children  in  the  house, 
when  the  Indians  surrounded  it.  Her  husband  was  at 
work  in  the  field  and  seeing  the  enemy  at  a  distance 
he  ran  home  and  bade  seven  of  his  eight  children  to 
get  away  as  fast  as  they  could  to  some  garrison  in 
the  town.  He  then  informed  his  wife  of  her  danger, 
but  before  she  could  rise  the  enemy  were  so  near  that 
her  husband  despaired  of  being  able  to  carry  her  off. 
He  took  his  horse  and  his  firearms,  resolving  to  live 
or  die  with  his  children.  He  overtook  them  about 
forty  rods  from  his  house  and  drove  them  before  him 
like  a  flock  of  sheep  as  fast  as  their  little  legs  would 
carry  them  till  they  got  to  a  place  of  safety  about  a 
mile  or  two  from  his  house.  The  Indians  pursued 
him  all  the  while,  but  he  kept  in  the  rear  of  his  little 
flock,  and  when  any  of  the  Indians  came  within  reach 
of  his  gun,  he  aimed  at  them  and  they  made  their 
retreat. 


no.  43]  Children  at  Home  121 

43.    Indian  Children  at  Home 

By  John  Fontaine   (1715) 

After  breakfast,  I  went  down  to  the  Saponey 
Indian  town,  which  is  about  a  musket-shot  from  the 
fort.  I  walked  round  to  view  it.  It  lies  in  a  plain 
by  the  riverside.  The  houses  join  all  the  one  to  the 
other,  and  altogether  make  a  circle.  The  walls  are 
large  pieces  of  timber,  squared,  and  sharpened  at 
the  lower  end,  which  are  put  down  two  feet  in  the 
ground,  and  stand  about  seven  feet  above  the 
ground.  These  posts  are  laid  as  close  as  possible 
the  one  to  the  other.  When  they  are  all  fixed  after 
this  manner,  they  make  a  roof  with  rafters,  and  cover 
the  house  with  oak  or  hickory  bark,  which  they  strip 
off  in  great  flakes,  and  lay  it  so  closely  that  no  rain 
can  come  in. 

Some  Indian  houses  are  covered  in  a  circular  map 
ner,  by  getting  long  saplings,  sticking  each  end  in 
the  ground,  and  so  covering  them  with  bark.  For 
entering  into  this  town  or  circle  of  houses  there  are 
three  ways  or  passages  of  about  six  feet  wide,  be- 
tween two  of  the  houses.  All  the  doors  are  on  the 
inside  of  the  ring,  and  the  ground  is  very  level 
within,  making  a  place  which  is  in  common,  for  all 
the  people  to  divert  themselves. 

In  the  centre  of  the  circle  is  a  great  stump  of  a 
tree.  I  asked  the  reason  they  left  that  standing,  and 
they  informed  me  it  was  for  one  of  their  head  men 
to  stand  upon  when  he  had  anything  of  consequence 
to  relate  to  them,  so  that  being  raised,  he  might  the 
better  be  heard. 

The  Indian  women  bind  their  children  to  a  board 


122 


Indians 


[No.  43 


its 


that  is  cut  after  the  shape  of  the  child.  There  are 
two  pieces  at  the  bottom  of  this  board  to  tie  the  two 
legs  of  the  child  to.  The  head  or  top  of  the  board 
is  round,  and  there  is  a  hole  through  the  top  of  it  for 

a  string  to  be 
passed  through, 
so  that  when  the 
women  tire  of 
holding  them,  or 
have  a  mind  to 
work,  they  hang 
the  board  to  the 
limb  of  a  tree,  or 
to  a  pin  in  a  post 
for  that  purpose. 
There  the  chil- 
dren swing  about 
and  divert  them- 
selves, out  of  the 
reach  of  anything 
that  may  hurt 
them.  They  are 
kept  in  this  way 
till  nearly  two 
years  old,  which 
I  believe  is  the 
reason  they  are 
all  so  straight, 
and  so  few  of 
them  lame  or  odd- 
shaped. 

Their  houses  are  pretty  large,  they  have  no  garrets, 
and  no  other  light  than  the  door,  and  that  which 
comes  from  the  hole  in  the  top  of  the  house,  to  let 


INDIAN    M(  )NKY. 


no.  43]  Indians  at  Home  123 

out  the  smoke.  They  make  their  fires  always  in  the 
middle  of  the  house.  The  chief  of  their  household 
goods  is  a  pot,  and  they  have  also  some  wooden 
dishes  and  trays,  which  they  make  themselves.  They 
seldom  have  anything  to  sit  upon,  but  squat  upon  the 
ground.  They  have  small  divisions  in  their  houses 
to  sleep  in,  which  they  make  of  mats  made  of  bull- 
rushes. 

They  have  bedsteads,  raised  about  two  feet  from 
the  ground,  upon  which  they  lay  bear  and  deer  skins, 
and  all  the  covering  they  have  is  a  blanket.  These 
people  have  no  sort  of  tame  creatures,  but  live  en- 
tirely upon  their  hunting  and  the  corn  which  their 
wives  cultivate.  They  live  as  lazily  and  miserably  as 
any  people  in  the  world. 

Between  the  town  and  the  river,  upon  the  river-  Watties  = 
side,  there  are  several  little  huts  built  with  wattles,  in   smal1 

branches 

the  form  of  an  oven,  with  a  small  door  in  one  end  of  woven  in  and 
it.     These  wattles  are  plastered  on  the  outside  very   out- 
closely  with  clay  ;  they  are  big  enough  to  hold  a  man, 
and  are  called  sweating-houses. 

When  they  have  any  sickness,  they  get  ten  or 
twelve  pebble  stones  which  they  heat  in  the  fire,  and 
when  they  are  red-hot  they  carry  them  into  these 
little  huts.  The  sick  man  or  woman  goes  in  with 
only  a  blanket,  and  they  shut  the  door. 

There  they  sit  and  sweat  until  they  are  no  more 
able  to  support  it,  and  then  they  go  out  and  immedi- 
ately jump  into  the  water  over  head  and  ears,  and 
this  is  the  remedy  they  have  for  all  distempers. 

To-day  the  governor  sent  for  all  the  young  boys, 
and  they  brought  with  them  their  bows.  He  got  an 
axe,  which  he  stuck  up,  and  made  them  all  shoot  by 
turns  at  the  eye  of  the  axe,  which  was  about  twenty 


124  India?is  [No.  43 

yards  distant.  Knives  and  looking-glasses  were  the 
prizes  for  which  they  shot,  and  they  were  very  dex- 
trous at  this  exercise,  and  often  shot  through  the  eye 
of  the  axe.     This  diversion  continued  about  an  hour. 

The  governor  then  asked  the  boys  to  dance  a  war 
dance,  so  they  all  prepared  for  it,  and  made  a  great 
ring.  The  musician  came  and  sat  himself  in  the 
middle  of  the  ring.  All  the  instrument  he  had  was 
a  piece  of  board  and  two  small  sticks.  The  board 
he  set  upon  his  lap,  and  began  to  sing  a  doleful  tune  ; 
and  by  striking  on  the  board  with  his  sticks,  he  ac- 
companied his  voice.  He  made  several  antic  motions, 
and  sometimes  shrieked  hideously,  which  was  an- 
swered by  the  boys.  As  the  men  sung,  so  the  boys 
danced  all  round,  endeavoring  who  could  outdo  the 
one  the  other  in  antic  motions  and  hideous  cries,  the 
movements  answering  in  some  way  to  the  time  of 
the  music.  All  that  I  could  remark  by  their  actions 
was,  that  they  were  representing  how  they  attacked 
their  enemies,  and  relating  one  to  the  other  how 
many  of  the  other  Indians  they  had  killed,  and  how 
they  did  it,  making  all  the  motions  in  this  dance  as 
if  they  were  actually  in  the  action. 

By  this  lively  representation  of  their  warring,  one 
may  see  the  base  way  they  have  of  surprising  and  mur- 
dering the  one  the  other,  and  their  inhuman  manner 
of  murdering  all  the  prisoners,  and  what  terrible  cries 
they  have,  they  who  are  conquerors.  After  the  dance 
was  over,  the  governor  treated  all  the  boys,  but  they 
were  so  little  used  to  have  a  stomach  full,  that  they 
simply  devoured  their  victuals.     So  this  day  ended. 

The  next  day  after  breakfast  we  assembled  our- 
selves, and  read  the  Common  Prayer.  With  us  were 
eight  of  the  Indian  boys,  who  answered  very  well  to 


no.  44]  Magic  Bears  125 

the  prayers,  and  understood  what  was  read.  After 
prayers  we  dined,  and  in  the  afternoon  we  walked 
abroad  to  see  the  land,  which  is  well  timbered  and 
very  good.     We  returned  to  the  fort  and  supped. 


44.    The  Indian  Boy  and  the 
Magic  Bears 

The  youngest  of  the  three  brothers  now  decided  to  This  is  a 
go  away,  because  both  he  and  his  sister  feared  that  the   storv  told  by 

.    .         ,  ,-....  ill  •     •  ■        Indians  of 

surviving  bears  would  visit  them  and  do  them  injury  in  our  ovvn 

revenge  for  what  the  buy  hunter  had  clone  to  their  times;  but  it 

people.     The  sister  urged  her  brother  to  go,  and  gave  suchTtories 

him  a  stone  ornament  which  she  wore  in  her  hair,  and  as  were  told 

a  large  handful  of  blueberries.     The  boy  hunter  still  aroundthe 

0  _  J  campnres  or 

had  four  arrows.     These  things  he  was  to  use  as  she   the  Indians 
instructed  him,  at  a  time  which  would  come,  when   whom  °ur 
every  other  means  of  saving  his  life  failed.     Then  he   visited. 
started  away  in  a  direction  new  to  him,  to  find  a  place 
where  he  might  live  in  safety. 

While  he  was  going  along  slowly  one  clay,  he  heard 
behind  him  a  peculiar  sound,  as  of  many  footsteps. 
Looking  back,  he  beheld  some  bears  following  him, 
and  he  at  once  realized  that  they  had  discovered  his 
trail,  and  that  they  were  now  in  pursuit  of  him.  He 
began  to  run,  crying  out,  "What  shall  I  do?  The 
bears  have  found  my  tracks,  and  are  after  me  !  "  The 
country  in  which  he  was  now  passing  was  an  appar- 
ently endless  prairie,  with  nothing  growing  upon  it 
but  short  grass;  but  as  he  flew  onward  he  heard  a 
voice,  which  said,  "So  soon  as  the  bears  catch  you 
they  will  kill  you  ;  now  you  must  use  your  arrows." 


126  Indians  [No.  44 

Immediately  the  boy  hunter  remembered  that  he  had 
his  weapons  and  the  articles  which  his  sister  had  given 
him.  Taking  an  arrow  from  his  quiver,  he  fixed  it  to 
his  bowstring,  and  as  he  was  about  to  shoot  it  into 
the  air  before  him  he  said  to  the  arrow,  "  When  you 
come  down,  there  shall  be  about  you  a  copse  covering 
an  area  as  wide  as  the  range  of  an  arrow.  There  I 
shall  hide  myself." 

Away  flew  the  arrow,  and  the  moment  it  struck  and 
entered  the  earth  there  was  a  small  hole  in  the  ground, 
around  which  sprung  up  a  dense  growth  of  brush. 
The  little  boy  ran  to  the  hole,  crawled  into  it,  and 
then  went  to  the  edge  of  the  brush,  where  he  came 
up  and  hid  by  the  side  of  a  tree  which  also  had  sprung 
out  of  the  ground.  As  the  bears  came  to  the  spot 
where  they  had  seen  the  boy  disappear,  they  began 
to  tear  up  the  brush  until  not  a  piece  remained  stand- 
ing. Not  finding  the  hunter,  the  bears  began  to  search 
for  his  last  footprints,  and  finding  that  they  terminated 
at  the  hole  made  by  the  arrow  they  at  once  followed 
him.  As  the  bears  were  now  in  close  pursuit  of  the 
boy,  he  again  disappeared  in  the  ground  and  started 
away  until  he  had  got  quite  a  distance  from  the  tree, 
when  he  again  emerged  and  started  to  run  away  along 
the  prairie. 

By  the  time  the  bears  reached  the  tree  where  the 
boy  had  rested  for  a  moment,  they  were  again  delayed 
in  trailing  him,  but  they  finally  succeeded  in  tracking 
him  out  to  the  prairie,  where  they  espied  him  running 
in  the  distance.  They  immediately  set  out  in  pursuit, 
but  it  was  a  long  time  before  they  neared  him.  When 
the  bears  approached,  the  hunter  took  his  second  ar- 
row, and  shooting  it  into  the  air  before  him,  said  to  it, 
"  When  you  come  down  there  shall  be  about  you  a 


No.  44] 


Mi 


a?ic 


lg 


B> 


ears 


127 


copse  as  wide  as  the  range  of  an  arrow.     There  I 
shall  hide  myself." 

When  the  arrow  descended  and  entered  the  earth 
there  appeared  a  dense  undergrowth  which  completely 
hid  the  boy,  who  then  went  to  the  hole,  crawled  into 
it,  and  travelled  along  in  the  ground  until  he  had 
passed  beyond  the  end 
of  the  copse,  where  he 
emerged  and  hid  by  a 
tree  which  also  had 
sprung  up. 

As  before,  the  bears 
were  infuriated  at  the 
escape  of  the  boy,  and 
tore  up  the  brush  in 
every  direction  in 
their  search  for  him. 
Finally  they  discov- 
ered the  arrow  hole, 
which  they  entered. 
Following  the  foot- 
steps of  the  boy  they 
soon  found  the  place 
where  he  had  taken 
refuge,  but  before  they 
reached  him  he  found 
himself  pursued,  and, 
face,    he   started   away 


AN    INDIAN    PAPOOSE, 


again  diving  under  the  sur- 
for  some  distance,  when  he 
emerged  from  beneath  the  ground  and  started  away 
over  the  prairie  as  before.  A  second  time  were  the 
bears  baffled,  and  by  the  time  they  found  the  foot- 
prints of  the  boy  he  was  far  off.  They  at  once  started 
in  pursuit,  and  as  the  boy  began  to  tire  a  little  the 
bears  gained  rapidly  on  him,  until  he  found  that  the 


128  Indians  [No.  44 

only  way  to  escape  was  to  use  his  third  arrow.  Tak- 
ing the  shaft  from  his  quiver  and  fitting  it  to  his  bow- 
string, he  aimed  upward  into  the  air  before  him  and 
said,  "  When  you  come  down  there  shall  be  about  you 
a  copse  as  wide  as  the  range  of  an  arrow.  There  I 
shall  hide  myself." 

The  arrow  descended,  making  a  hole  in  the  ground 
as  before,  and  a  copse  appeared  all  around  it,  hiding 
it  from  view.  The  boy  at  once  went  down  into  the 
hole  and  away  to  the  edge  of  the  copse,  where  he  as- 
cended to  the  surface  and  hid  near  one  of  the  trees 
which  had  sprung  up  at  his  command. 

The  chase  was  a  long  one,  and  in  time  the  boy 
began  to  tire  and  the  bears  to  gain  on  him,  so  that  he 
was  compelled  to  take  his  last  arrow,  which  he  fixed 
to  the  string  of  his  bow  and  shot  into  the  air,  saying, 
"  When  you  come  down  there  shall  be  about  you  a 
marsh  filled  with  cat-tails,  from  the  middle  of  which 
there  shall  be  a  trail;  by  that  shall  I  escape." 

When  the  arrow  descended  the  boy  found  himself 
in  the  midst  of  a  large  marsh,  and  from  his  feet  for- 
ward a  trail  of  firm  ground,  which  enabled  him  to 
continue  running  whilst  the  bears  struggled  in  the 
mud  and  amongst  the  cat-tails.  After  a  while  the 
bears  also  found  the  trail,  and  renewed  their  pursuit 
of  the  boy,  giving  him  no  opportunity  for  a  moment's 
rest.  As  they  neared  him,  the  bears  shouted,  "  We 
are  now  close  upon  you,  and  in  a  short  time  we  will 
catch  you  and  kill  you  !  "  Then  the  boy  remembered 
the  stone  which  his  sister  had  given  him,  and  taking 
it  out  of  his  pouch  he  put  it  in  a  strip  of  buckskin  and 
slung  it  round  several  times  above  his  head,  then 
threw  it  forward  on  the  prairie,  saying,  "  As  I  sling 
this  it  will  cause  a  long  high  rock  to  appear,  upon 


no.  44]  Magic  Bears  129 

which  I  shall  take  refuge."  The  little  stone  bounded 
and  rolled  along  over  the  ground  and  suddenly  became 
transformed  into  a  steep,  high  cliff  with  a  flat  top  and 
with  mam*  loose  stones  lying  about  the  edge.  As  the 
boy  reached  the  cliff  he  clambered  to  the  summit  and 
looked  oyer  the  edge  to  watch  the  bears.  The  bears 
ran  around  the  base,  looking  for  the  boy  everywhere, 
and  when  they  appeared  beneath  the  boy,  he  began 
to  roll  oyer  the  large  loose  stones  upon  them,  killing 
a  great  many  and  breaking  the  bones  and  otherwise 
disabling  others.  While  the  unharmed  bears,  who 
were  even  more  astonished  at  what  had  transpired, 
went  to  look  at  their  killed  and  wounded  compan- 
ions, the  boy  hastily  descended  on  the  opposite  side 
of  the  cliff  and  started  out  in  a  new  direction  to 
escape. 

After  gazing  awhile  at  their  dead  and  wounded 
companions  the  unmaimed  bears  began  to  look  for 
the  boy,  but  neither  hearing  nor  seeing  him  they  sus- 
pected that  he  had  escaped,  and  at  once  began  to 
search  for  footprints  leading  away  from  the  rock. 
When  these  were  found,  the  bears  followed  in  pursuit 
until  they  were  almost  certain  of  capturing  their 
enemy. 

Now  the  bears  had  not  eaten  anything  for  a  long 
time,  and  they  began  to  feel  very  hungry  ;  but  there 
was  nothing  in  sight  that  they  could  devour  save  the 
boy,  so  they  tried  their  utmost  to  catch  him,  and  were 
slowly  gaining  on  him  when  he  remembered  the  blue- 
berries which  his  sister  had  given  him.  These  he  took 
from  his  pouch,  and  threw  them  into  the  air,  scatter- 
ing them  far  and  wide,  and  said,  "  When  you  fall  to 
the  ground  there  shall  lie  blueberries  growing  every- 
where ;    these  will  delieer  me."      When  the  berries 


130  Indians  [No.  44 

fell,  surely  enough  there  instantly  appeared  blueberry 
bushes  laden  with  fruit,  which  caused  the  bears  to 
stop.  They  were  so  eager  to  eat  that  they  entirely 
forgot  the  boy  until  they  could  eat  no  more  ;  they 
then  remembered  what  they  had  contemplated  doing 
when  they  first  set  out.  One  old  bear,  observing  dis- 
satisfaction among  his  friends,  said,  "  My  brothers,  we 
had  better  give  up  the  chase ;  the  boy  is  merely  a  mys- 
tery. Let  us  stop  and  live  here,  for  here  we  shall 
have  sufficient  food  without  digging  for  it."  To  this 
the  rest  of  the  bears  assented ;  so  here  they  made 
their  home. 


PART    V 

HOW   THE    COLONIES    GREW 


45.   The  First  Landing  at  Plymouth 

By  Governor  William  Bradford  (1620) 

Omitting  other  things,   I  will  tell   you  that  after  The  May- 
Ions,   beating-  about  at  sea  they  came  to  Cape  Cod  /owerand 

1     1  i-      1       •        r    1        -it       •  1  •         1     'ts  passen- 

and  they  were  not  a  little  joy  ml.  Having  thus  arrived  gers,  carry- 
in  a  good  harbor  and  having  been  brought  safe  to  in§  English 
land,  they  fell  upon  their  knees  and  blessed  the  God  hadbeen  ° 
of  Heaven  who  had  brought  them  over  the  vast  and  living  lately 
furious  ocean,  and  delivered  them  from  all  the  perils   m  ' 

and  miseries  of  the  sea.  Even  now  they  had  no 
friends  to  welcome  them,  nor  inns  to  entertain  or 
refresh  their  weather-beaten  bodies  ;  no  houses  and 
much  less  towns  in  which  to  seek  for  succor. 

It  was  in  the  winter  season,  and  those  who  know   New  Eng- 
about  the  winters  of  that  country  know  them  to  be   landw'nters 

-'  1  •    1      seemed  verv 

sharp  and  violent,  with  cruel  and  fierce  storms,  which  severe  to 
make  it  dangerous  to  travel  even  to  known  places,  Europeans. 
much  more  to  search  an  unknown  coast.  They  knew 
that  thev  were  in  a  desolate  wilderness,  full  of  wild 
beasts  and  wild  men,  in  what  numbers  they  knew  not. 
[f  they  looked  behind  them,  there  was  the  mighty 
ocean  which   they  had  crossed,   seeming  now  like  a 

i33 


i34 


Colonies 


[No.  45 


Clarke's 
Island  in 
Plymouth 
harbor. 


gulf  or  a  bar  to  separate  them  from  all  the  civilized 
parts  of  the  world. 

It  was  on  the  eleventh  day  of  November  that 
they  arrived  at  Cape  Cod  and  necessity  called  them 
to  look  immediately  for  a  place  of  habitation.  They 
had  brought  a  large  shallop  with  them  out  of  Eng- 
land, stowed  away  in  the  quarters  of  the  ship.  Now 
they  took  her  out  and  set  their  carpenters  to  work  to 
trim  her  up.  This  work  they  saw  would  take  a  long 
time  because  the  ship  had  become  much  shattered 
during  the  foul  weather  which  struck  the  big  vessel. 
Whilst  the  ship  was  being  mended  a  few  of  them 
offered  to  go  along  the  land  to  explore  the  places 
near  by.  Some  of  them  thought  that  they  saw  a  river 
as  they  went  into  the  harbor.  Sixteen  men  well  armed 
started  out  under  the  leadership  of  Captain  Standish. 
After  some  hours  sailing  it  began  to  snow  and  rain 
and  the  sea  became  very  rough  ;  they  broke  their 
rudder  and  it  was  as  much  as  two  men  could  do  to 
steer  the  shallop  with  a  couple  of  oars.  Their  pilot 
bade  them  be  of  good  cheer,  for  he  saw  the  harbor, 
but  the  storm  increased  and  the  night  came  on ;  so 
they  put  on  what  sail  they  could  in  order  to  get  there 
while  they  could  see.  By  doing  this  they  broke  their 
mast  in  three  pieces  and  their  sail  fell  overboard. 
The  men  set  things  to  right  as  far  as  they  could,  and 
having  the  current  with  them  they  came  into  the  har- 
bor. Then  the  pilot  saw  that  he  had  been  deceived 
in  the  place  and  that  they  were  in  a  dangerous  rough 
cove,  full  of  breakers.  A  lusty  seaman  who  steered 
bade  those  who  rowed  to  put  the  shallop  about,  or 
else  they  would  all  be  cast  away.  This  they  did  with 
speed,  so  that  he  bade  them  be  of  good  cheer  and  to 
row  bravely  for   there  was   a  fair  bay  before    them 


No. 45]  Plymouth  Rock  135 

which  he  thought  they  might  find,  and  there  ride  in 
safety.  Though  it  was  very  dark  and  rained  hard 
they  got  under  the  lee  of  a  small  island  and  remained 
there  all  night  in  safety. 

They  did  not  know  that  this  was  an  island  until 
morning.  Then  they  were  divided  in  their  minds ; 
some  wished  to  stay  in  the  boat  for  fear  they  might 
be  amongst  the  Indians  ;  others  were  so  weak  and 
cold  that  they  felt  they  could  not  endure  that,  so  they 
went  ashore  to  make  a  fire.  This  they  did  with  great 
trouble,  everything  was  so  wet.  Then  the  rest  were 
delighted  to  come  to  them,  for  the  wind  had  shifted 
to  the  northwest,  and  had  frozen  their  clothing,  which 
had  been  wet  in  the  storm.  So  after  a  day  and  night 
of  much  trouble  and  danger,  God  gave  them  a  morn- 
ing of  comfort  and  hope,  for  the  next  day  was  a  fair 
sunshiny  day.  They  found  themselves  on  an  island 
secure  from  the  Indians,  where  they  might  dry  their 
clothes,  clean  their  firearms  and  rest  themselves.  So 
they  gave  God  thanks  for  his  mercies.  This  being 
the  last  day  of  the  week,  they  prepared  to  keep  the 
Sabbath  the  next  day. 

On  Monday  they  sounded  the  harbor  and  found  it  They  crossed 
fit  for   shipping.     They  marched   up   into   the   land,   the  harbor. 

,  .  ,.    i  i  1...1  .  .  '    westward, 

found  many  cornfields  and  little  running  brooks,  and  landed 
making  it  a  place,  as  they  supposed,  fit  for  a  settle-  onthemain- 
ment.  At  least,  it  was  the  best  they  could  find  and 
both  the  season  and  their  present  necessities  made 
them  glad  to  accept  it,  so  that  they  returned  to  their 
big  ship  again  with  this  news,  which  did  much  to 
comfort  the  hearts  of  the  rest  of  their  people. 

On  the  fifteenth  of  December,  the  big  ship  weighed 
anchor  to  go  to  the  place  which  Miles  Standish  and 
his  exploring  party  had  discovered,  and  came  within 


136 


Colo?iies  [No.  46 


Two  leagues  two  leagues  of  it,  but  they  were  obliged  to  wait  there 

=  six  miles.  a  cjay      Qn  faQ  sixteenth  day  the  wind  came  fair,  and 

Then  they  they  arrived  in  this  harbor.     Afterwards  they  took  a 

landed  at  or  better  view  °f  tne  place  and  decided  where  to  pitch 

near  Flv-  .  1  l 

mouth  Rock,  their  dwelling.     On  the  twenty-fifth  day  they  began 

a  big  boulder  ^0  erect  the  first  house,  for  the  common  use  of  all. 

which  is  still 
in  place. 


46.    The  First  Settlement  of 
Massachusetts 

By  Edward  Johnson  (1628) 

These  new-comers  were  a  supply  of  servants  from 
England  sent  over  in  1628  to  provide  against  the 
wants  of  a  lonely  wilderness.  Among  them  came 
over  a  mixed  crowd  of  people,  by  whom  little  was 
done.  But  the  much  honored  Mr.  John  Endicot  came 
over  with  them  to  govern.  He  was  a  good  person  to 
begin  this  wilderness  work,  for  he  was  courageous, 
bold,  and  fearless ;  yet  sociable  and  of  a  cheerful  dis- 
position. He  could  be  loving  or  austere  as  occasion 
demanded. 

The  place  picked  out  by  this  people  for  a  settle- 
ment was  in  the  midst  of  the  outstretched  arm  of 
Cape  Ann.  Here  they  began  to  build  a  town  which 
is  called  Salem. 

After  some  little  time  they  found  out  how  insignifi- 
cant were  the  neighboring  Indians,  and  the  boldest 
among  the  English  people  gathered  in  different 
places  which  they  began  to  take  up  for  their  own. 
Those  that  were  sent  over  as  servants  had  a  great 
desire  to  see  the  new  sights  in  the  new  world,  and 


No.  46]  Massachusetts  137 

found  it  easier  to  eat  up  of  their  master's  provisions, 
than  to  get  more. 

Those  that  came  over  as  their  own  masters  had  but 
little  food  left.  Most  of  them  began  to  regret  coming 
when  beer  and  corn  began  to  fail.  The  poor  Indians 
could  not  relieve  them  for  they  were  obliged  to  eke 
out  their  own  food  with  acorns. 

What  added  to  the  unhappiness  of  the  settlers  was   i.e.  that  they 
the  thought  that  the  ditch  between  England  and  their   cou.!d  not 

0  ,  °  easily  go 

new  place  of  abode  was  so  wide  that  they  could  not  home  again, 
leap  over  with  a  leaping-stick.  Yet  some  delighted 
their  eye  with  the  novelty  of  things  about  them  ;  and 
they  kept  thinking  of  the  new  discoveries  they  would 
make  when  spring  came.  They  managed  to  get 
through  the  winter's  cold  by  keeping  near  the  fire- 
side, and  found  fuel  enough  groaning  at  their  very 
doors.  They  smoked  burned  tobacco  with  all  the 
comfort  they  could. 

They  talked,  between  one  while  and  another,  of  the 
great  progress  they  would  make  after  the  summer's 
sun  had  changed  the  earth's  white  furred  gown  into 
a  green  garment. 

In  the  year  1629  there  came  over  three  godly  min- 
isters. This  was  to  strengthen  the  faith  of  the  settlers 
in  meeting  difficulties.  Now  although  the  number  of 
the  faithful  people  of  Christ  was  small,  vet  their  long- 
ing desire  to  gather  themselves  into  a  church  was  very 
great.  The  church  of  Christ  being  thus  begun,  the 
Lord  in  His  tender  mercy  caused  it  to  increase  and  be 
fruitful. 

And   now  behold   several    other   regiments  of    the   That  is, more 
soldiers    of    Christ,    shipped    for    His   service   in    the   colonis,s  srt 
western    world.         I  heir    difficulties    were    many    and    writerlikens 
mournful.     The  billows  were  high   and  angry,  cover-   them  to  sol- 


i38 


Colonies 


[No.  46 


diers  of  the 
Lord. 

"  Ship  fever," 
a  very  dan- 
gerous 
disease,  was 
common  in 
the  voyages 
of  that  time. 


ing  them  with  awful  water  and  dashing  their  bodies 
from  side  to  side.  Their  goods  were  thrown  from 
place  to  place  on  the  ships.  After  the  Lord  had 
given  them  these  trials,  He  sent  diseases  to  visit  their 
ships. 

On  the  twelfth  day  of  July  or  thereabouts,  1630, 
these  soldiers  of  Christ  first  set  foot  on  the  western 
end  of  the  world.  There  they  arrived  in  safety,  men, 
women,  and  children.  On  the  north  side  of  the 
Charles  River  they  landed,  near  a  small  island  called 


A  soldier's  outfit. 


No.  46] 


Boston 


*39 


Noddell's   Island.      Lady   Arabella  and   some  other  Now  East 
godly  women  abode  at  Salem  while  their  husbands 
remained  at  Charlestown  to  settle  the  civil  govern- 
ment and  to  form  another  church  of  Christ. 

The  first  court  was  held  aboard  the  ship  Arabella. 
The  much  honored  John  Winthrop  was  chosen  gov- 
ernor for  the  remainder  of  that  year,  1630.  The 
worthy  Thomas  Dudley  was  chosen  deputy  governor. 

Then  sore  sickness  fell  upon  the  people,  so  that  in 
almost  every  family  mourning  and  sorrow  was  heard  ; 
and  they  had  no  fresh  food  to  strengthen  them.  Yet 
it  was  wonderful  to  see  with  what  Christian  cour- 
age these  soldiers  of  Christ  persevered  amidst  all 
calamities. 

Soon  they  had  formed  other  churches  and  towns. 
The  fourth  church  was  seated  at  Boston,  which  be- 
came the  central  town  and  largest  city  of  this  wilder- 
ness. The  form  of  this  town  is  like  a  heart.  It  is 
naturally  situated  for  fortifications.  It  has  two  hills 
on  the  front  part  of  it,  facing  the  sea.  One  is  well 
fortified  with  heavy  cannon.  The  other  has  a  very 
strong  battery  built  of  whole  timber  and  filled  with 
earth. 

At  the  bottom  of  these  hills  lies  a  great  bay  on   Boston 
which  this  town  is  built.     It  is  over-topped  by  a  third   Harbor- 
hill.     From  all  three  of  these  overtopping  towers  a  Beacon  Hill, 
constant  watch  is  kept   to   foresee   the    approach  of 
any  danger  from   strange  enemies.      Each  hill  is  fur- 
nished with  a  beacon   and  land  guns.      By  their  re- 
doubled echoes  these  give  notice  of  any  danger  to  all 
their  sister  towns. 

The  buildings  of  this  city  arc  beautiful  and  large. 
Some  are  pleasingly  built  of  bricks,  tiles,  stone  and 
slate.     They  are  placed   in   an   orderly   fashion   upon 


on  which  the 
State  House 
now  stands. 


140 


Colo 


?ties 


[No.  47 


beautiful  streets.  Much  shipping  is  built  here  yearly, 
and  some  ships  of  good  size.  Both  tar  and  masts, 
the  country  affords  from  its  own  soil  ;  there  is  also  a 
supply  of  food,  both  for  their  own  —  and  for  foreign- 
ers' ships.  This  town  is  the  very  market  of  the  land. 
French,  Portuguese,  and  Dutch  come  here  to  trade. 


47.     How  the  Englishmen  sailed 
past  New  Amsterdam 

By  David  De  Vries  (1632) 

Fort  Amster-  When  we  arrived  before  Fort  Amsterdam,  we  found 
New' York  a  Company's  ship  there  with  a  prize  taken  on  the  way, 
City,  was  the  laden  with  sugar.  She  had  brought  over  the  new  gov- 
pnncipai         ernor,  Wouter  Van  Twiller.     He  had  been  a  clerk  in 


NEW    AMSTERDAM. 


trading  post  the  West  India  Department  at  Amsterdam.      I  went 

e    u  c  i  ashore  t0  j.fo_e  fort   0ut  0f  which  he  came  to  welcome 

in  New  ' 

Netherlands,  us,  and  inquired  of  me  how  the  whale  fishing  suc- 

The"Com-  ceeded. 


no.  47]  New  Amsterdam  141 

A  few  days  later,  on  the  eighteenth  of  April,  an   pany"was 
Englishman  arrived  here,  who  came  from  New  Eng-  „f  ^tc,h 

o  '  o       \V  est  India 

land  to  trade  up  the  Hudson  River.     This  English-   Company, 
man  invited  the  governor  to  come  and  see  him.     I   whlch  man- 

•   ii-  -i  1  aged  the 

went  with  them,  in  company  with  a  number  of  om-  Colony. 
cers,  who  became  drunk  and  got  into  such  high  words 
that  the  Englishman  could  not  understand  how  it  was 
that  there  should  be  such  unruliness  among  the  offi- 
cers of  the  company,  nor  why  the  governor  should 
have  not  more  control  over  them  ;  he  was  not  accus- 
tomed to  such  conduct  among  his  countrymen.  The 
Englishman  and  his  crew  remained  six  or  seven  days, 
lying  before  the  fort,  and  then  said  that  he  wished  to 
go  up  the  river,  and  that  the  land  belonged  to  the 
English.  This  we  denied,  declaring  that  they  had 
never  made  any  settlement  there. 

On  the  twenty-fourth,  however,  the  Englishman 
weighed  anchor  and  sailed  up  the  river  to  Fort  Now  Albany. 
Orange.  Then  Governor  Wouter  Van  Twiller  as- 
sembled all  his  forces  before  his  door,  had  a  cask  of 
wine  brought  out,  filled  a  bumper,  and  cried  out  for 
those  who  loved  the  Prince  of  Orange  and  him  to  do  The  greatest 
the  same  as  he  did,  and  protect  him  from  the  outrage   ™an, ln 

1  Holland. 

of  the  Englishman  who  was  already  out  of  sight,  sail- 
ing up  the  river.  The  people  all  began  to  laugh  at 
him  ;  for  they  understood  well  how  to  drink  dry  the 
cask  of  wine,  but  did  not  wish  to  trouble  the  English- 
man, saying  that  they  were  friends. 

As  I  sat  at  the  table  with  him  at  noon  I  told  him 
that  he  had  been  very  foolish,  as  the  Englishman  had 
no  permission  to  navigate  in  the  river,  but  only  a 
paper  of  a  custom  house,  stating  that  he  had  paid  so 
much  duty  and  might  sail  with  so  many  passengers 
to   New   England,  and  not   to  New   Netherlands.     I 


142 


Colo 


?nes 


[No.  47 


Solid  iron 
beans,  of 
course. 


said,  if  it  were  my  matter,  I  would  have  helped  him 
away  from  the  fort  with  beans  from  eight  pounders, 
and  not  permitted  him  to  sail  up  the  river.  I  told 
him  that  since  the  English  had  troubled  us  in  the 
East  Indies,  we  ought  to  take  hold  of  them  ;  that  I 
had  no  good  opinion  of  that  nation,  for  they  were  so 
proud  that  they  thought  everything  belonged  to  them  ; 
were  it  an  affair  of  mine  I  should  send  a  ship  after 
him  to  make  him  haul  down  the  river.  I  added  that 
the  Englishman  was  only  making  sport  of  the  Gov- 
ernor. 


A    NEW    YORK    LADY. 


no.  48]  Maryland  143 

48.    Maryland,  My  Maryland 

By  Father  Andrew  White  (1634) 

Ox  the  third  of  March  we  sailed  into  the  Chesa- 
peake Bay,  bending  our  course  to  the  north  that  we 
might  reach  the  Potomac  River.  The  Chesapeake 
Bay,  ten  leagues  broad,  and  four,  five,  six,  and  even 
seven  fathoms  deep,  flows  gently  between  its  shores ; 
it  abounds  in  fish  when  the  season  of  the  year  is 
favorable.  A  more  beautiful  body  of  water  you  can 
scarcely  find. 

A  larger  or  more  beautiful  river  than  the  Potomac 
I  have  never  seen.  The  Thames  compared  with  it 
can  scarcely  be  considered  a  rivulet.  It  is  not  made 
impure  by  marshes,  but  on  each  shore  of  solid  earth 
there  are  beautiful  groves  of  trees,  not  choked  up  with 
an  undergrowth  of  brambles  and  bushes,  but  looking 
as  if  the  place  wrere  laid  out  by  hand,  in  a  manner  so 
open  that  you  might  freely  drive  a  four-horse  coach 
in  the  midst  of  the  trees. 

At  the  very  mouth  of  the  river  we  beheld  the  na- 
tives armed.  That  night  fires  were  kindled  through 
the  whole  region,  and  since  so  large  a  ship  had  never 
been  seen  by  them,  messengers  were  sent  everywhere 
to  announce,  "  a  canoe,  as  large  as  an  island,  has 
brought  as  many  men  as  there  are  trees  in  the 
woods."  We  proceeded,  however,  to  the  Heron 
Islands,  so  called  from  the  immense  flocks  of  birds 
of  this  kind. 

The  first  island  that  presented  itself  we  called  by 
the  name  of  St.  Clement's  ;  the  second,  St.  Cather- 
ine's, and  the  third  St.  Cecilia's  ;  for,  having  arrived 
at  the  wished-for  country  we  grave  such  names  as  we 


144 


Colonies 


[No.  49 


Probably  the 
hickory-nut. 


The  writer  of 
this  extract 
was  a  Catho- 
lic priest. 


liked  to  the  places  that  we  found.  We  landed  first 
at  St.  Clement's,  to  which  the  approach  is  difficult, 
except  by  wading,  because  of  the  shelving  nature  of 
the  shore.  Here  the  young  women,  who  had  landed 
for  the  purpose  of  washing,  were  nearly  drowned  by 
the  upsetting  of  the  boat,  and  a  great  portion  of  my 
linen  was  lost  —  no  trifling  misfortune  in  these  parts. 

This  island,abounds  in  cedar,  sassafras,  and  the  herbs 
and  flowers  for  making  salads  of  every  kind,  and  with 
the  nut  of  a  wild  tree,  which  bears  a  very  hard  nut,  in 
a  thick  shell,  with  a  kernel  very  small  but  remarkably 
pleasant  to  taste.  Since  this  island  was  only  four 
hundred  acres  in  extent,  however,  it  did  not  appear 
to  be  a  place  sufficiently  large  for  a  new  settlement. 
Nevertheless,  a  site  was  sought  for  building  a  fort  to 
shut  out  foreigners  from  the  trade  of  the  river,  and 
to  protect  our  boundaries. 

On  the  day  of  the  Annunciation  of  the  Holy  Virgin 
Mary,  on  the  twenty-fifth  of  March,  in  the  year  1634, 
we  offered  in  this  island,  for  the  first  time,  the  sacri- 
fice of  the  mass  :  in  this  region  of  the  world  it  had 
never  been  celebrated  before. 


Christians  = 
Europeans. 


49.    Creatures  in  Pennsylvania 

By  Gabriel  Thomas  (1698) 

The  natives  of  this  country  are  very  charitable  to 
one  another.  The  lame  and  the  blind  amongst  them 
live  as  well  as  the  best.  They  are  also  very  kind  and 
obliging  to  the  Christians. 

In  person  they  are  ordinarily  tall,  straight,  and 
well  formed.     Their  tread  is  strong,  and  they  gener- 


no.  49]  Pennsylvania  145 

ally  walk  with  the  chin  high  up.  Of  complexion, 
they  are  dark,  but  in  features  they  are  gypsy-like, 
greasing  themselves  with  bear's  fat,  and  using  noth- 
ing to  protect  them  against  the  injuries  of  the  sun 
and  weather,  so  their  skins  cannot  fail  to  be  dark. 
Their  eyes  are  small  and  black.  They  have  pleasing 
faces. 

Their  language  is  dignified  and  polite.  But  they 
use  few  words.  One  word  serves  in  the  place  of 
three.     The  language  is  sweet,  and  of  noble  sound. 

Take  here  a  specimen  :  — 

Hodi  hita  nee  Cuska  a  peechi,  nee,  machi 
Pennsylvania  huska  dogwachi,  Keshow  a  peechi 
Nowa,  huska  haly,  Chetena  Koon  peo. 

This  is  the  English  of  it :  — 

Farewell  friend,  I  will  very  quickly  go  to 
Pennsylvania,  very  cold  moon  will  come  presently, 
And  very  great  hard  frosts  will  come  quickly. 

As  soon  as  their  children  are  born,  they  wash 
them  in  cold  water,  especially  in  cold  weather.  To 
harden  them  and  make  them  courageous,  they  plunge 
them  in  the  river.  The  children  find  their  feet  early  ; 
usually  at  nine  months  they  can  walk  alone. 

The  boys  fish  till  they  are  fifteen  years  of  age, 
then  hunt.  When  they  have  given  a  proof  of  their 
manhood  by  getting  together  a  large  lot  of  skins, 
they  may  marry.  This  is  usually  at  the  age  of  seven- 
teen or  eighteen.  The  girls  stay  with  their  mothers, 
and  help  to  hoe  the  ground,  plant  corn,  and  carry 
burdens.  They  marry  when  they  are  about  thirteen 
or  fourteen  years  of  age. 
r. 


146 


Colonies 


[No.  49 


The  next  people  who  settled  in  what  is  now  Penn- 
sylvania after  the  Indians  were  the  Dutch.  They 
called  the  country  New  Netherland.  They  were 
the  first  planters  in  those  parts,  but  they  made  little 
or  no  improvement  in  the  land.     They  gave  them- 


WILLIAM    PENN. 


selves  wholly  to  trading  in  skins  and  furs,  which  the 
Indians  furnished  to  them  for  rum,  strong  liquors, 
sugar,  and  other  things. 

Soon  after  the  Dutch,  came  the  Swedes  and  Fins. 

They  gave  themselves  to  farming,  and  were  the 
first  Christian  people  that  made  any  great  improve- 
ment there. 


no.  49]  Pennsylvania  147 

The  air  in  this  region  is  very  fine  and  pleasant, 
and  healthful.  The  heavens  are  serene,  seldom 
cloudy,  and  somewhat  like  the  better  part  of  France. 
The  corn  harvest  is  ended  before  the  middle  of  July, 
and  most  years  they  have  between  twenty  and  thirty 
bushels  for  every  bushel  they  sow. 

There  are  several  sorts  of  wild  beasts  good  for 
trade  and  for  food.  Panthers,  wolves,  deer,  beaver, 
otter,  hares,  musk-rats,  minks,  wild-cats,  foxes,  rac- 
coons, rabbits,  and  opossums  are  to  be  found.  The 
possum  is  a  strange  creature,  having  a  pouch  to  shel- 
ter her  young  ones.  By  this  means  she  saves  them 
from  danger,  when  anything  comes  to  disturb  them. 

There  are  also  bears,  and  some  wolves.  But  they 
are  now  pretty  well  destroyed  by  the  Indians  for  the 
sake  of  the  reward  given  them  by  the  Christians  for 
so  doing.  Here  is  also  that  wonderful  creature,  the 
flying  squirrel  !  It  has  a  kind  of  skinny  wings,  al- 
most like  those  of  the  bat.  It  has  the  same  kind  of 
hair  and  color  as  the  common  squirrel,  but  is  much 
smaller. 

I  have  myself  seen  it  fly  from  one  tree  to  another 
in  the  woods.  But  how  long  it  can  keep  on  flying  is 
not  exactly  known.  There  are  in  the  woods  many 
red  deer.  I  have  bought  of  the  Indians  a  whole  deer 
—  skin  and  all  —  for  a  little  gunpowder. 

The  venison  is  excellent  food,  most  delicious,  far 
exceeding  that  of  Europe.  This  is  the  opinion  of 
most  careful  and  observing  people. 

There  are  vast  numbers  of  other  wild  creatures, 
such  as  the  elk  and  buffalo.  All  of  these  beasts, 
birds,  and  fish,  are  free  to  any  one  who  will  shoot  or 
take  them  away.  There  is  no  hindrance  or  opposi- 
tion whatever. 


148 


Colo 


flies 


[No.  49 


There   are    among    other    things    various    sorts   of 
frogs.     The  bull-frog  makes  a  roaring  noise  hardly 
to  be  distinguished  from  that  of  the  beast  from  which 
it  takes  its  name. 
Tree-toads.  There  is  another  sort  of  frog  that  crawls  up  to  the 

tops  of  trees.  There  it  seems  to  imitate  the  notes 
of  several  birds.  There  are  many  other  strange  and 
different  creatures. 

Bees  thrive  and  increase  wonderfully  in  that  coun- 
try. The  Swedes  often  get  a  great  supply  of  them 
in  the  woods,  where  they  are  free  to  anybody. 
Philadelphia.  Choice  honey  is  sold  in  the  capital  city  for  five  pence 
a  pound.  Wax  is  also  plentiful  and  cheap ;  they 
have  a  considerable  trade  in  it. 

I  must  needs  say,  even  the  present  encouragements 
are  very  great  and  inviting.  Poor  people,  both  men 
and  women,  of  all  kinds,  can  here  get  three  times  the 
wages  for  their  labor  that  they  can  in  England. 

The  Christian  children  born  here  are  generally 
fine-looking  and  beautiful  to  behold.  In  general 
they  are  seen  to  be  better-natured,  milder,  and  more 
tender-hearted  than  those  born  in  England. 


A    BLOCK-HOUSE. 


no.  5o]  Virginia  149 

50.    Plantation  Life  in  Virginia 

By  Robert  Beverly  (1720) 
As   the   families   live   altogether   at   country-seats,   That  is,  they 

,,  1      1  ^1      •  •  i  i  have  servants 

they  each  have  their  graziers,  seedsmen,  gardeners,    orslaves 
brewers,  bakers,  butchers,   and    cooks.       They  have   for  each  of 
plenty  and   a  variety  of   provisions  for  their   table ;   these  du,les" 
and  as  for  spicery,  and  other  things  that  the  country 
does  not  produce,  they  have  constant  supplies  of  them 
from   England.       The  gentry  pretend   to  have  their 
victuals    served    up    as    nicely    as    if    they    were    in 
London. 

When  I  come  to  speak  of  their  cattle,  I  cannot  for- 
bear charging  my  countrymen  with  exceeding  unthrift. 
By  not  providing  sufficiently  for  them  during  the  win- 
ter, they  starve  their  young  cattle,  or  at  least  stunt 
their  growth. 

Their  fish  is  in   vast   plenty  and  variety,  and  ex- 
traordinarily good  of  its  kind.     Beef  and  pork  are  com-   English 
monly  sold   there,  at  from  one  penny  to  two  pence   Penn-v  =  Uvo 

J  1  •  r  cents.     An 

the  pound,  or   more,   according    to   the   time  of    the   English  six- 
year  ;  their  fattest  and  largest  pullets  at  six  pence  a  Pence  = 

....  .  r  ,  ....  .         twelve  cents. 

piece  ;  their  chickens   at  three  or  tour  shillings  the   An  English 
dozen;  their  ducks  at  eight  pence  or  nine   pence   a   shilling  = 

.1      •  1   "iv  .1  about  twentv- 

piece  ;  their  geese  at  ten  pence  or  a  shilling;  their   fourcents/ 
turkey  hens  at  fifteen  or  eighteen  pence;  their  turkey 
cocks  at  two  shillings  or  half  a  crown.      Oysters  and 
wild  fowl  are  not  so  dear  as  poultry,  and  in  their  sea- 
son are  the  cheapest  food  they  have.     Their  deer  are   That  is,  from 
commonly  sold  from  five  to  ten  shillings  according:  to   £I,25t0 

,  J  °  °  $  2.50  each. 

their  scarcity  or  goodness. 

The  bread  in  gentlemen's  houses  is  generally  made 
of  wheat,  but  some  choose  the  pone,  which  is  the  bread 


I5° 


Colo 


nies 


[No.  50 


Small  drink 
was  anything 
but  distilled 
spirits.     In 
those  days 
everybody 
drank  freely 
(and  often 
too  much) 
of  all  sorts  of 
fermented 
and  distilled 
liquors. 


made  of  Indian  meal.  Many  of  the  poorer  sort  of 
people  have  so  little  regard  for  the  English  grain, 
that  although  they  might  have  it  with  the  least  trou- 
ble in  the  world,  yet  they  do  not  sow  the  ground, 
because  they  will  not  be  at  the  trouble  of  making  a 
fence  particularly  for  it.  And  therefore  their  con- 
stant bread  is  pone,  so  called  from  the  Indian  name 
oppone. 

A  kitchen  garden  does  not  thrive  better  nor  faster 
in  any  part  of  the  universe,  than  in  Virginia.  They 
have  all  the  fruit  plants  that  grow  in  England,  and 
in  greater  perfection  than  in  England.  Besides 
these  they  have  several  roots,  herbs,  vine-fruits,  and 
salad  flowers  peculiar  to  themselves,  most  of  which 
will  neither  increase,  nor  grow  to  perfection  in  Eng- 
land. 

Their  small  drink  is  either  wine  and  water,  beer, 
milk  and  water,  or  water  alone.  The  richer  sort  of 
people  generally  brew  their  small  beer  with  malt, 
which  they  have  from  England,  though  barley  grows 
there  very  well ;  but  for  want  of  the  convenience  of 
malthouses,  the  inhabitants  take  no  care  to  sow  it. 
The  poorer  sort  brew  their  beer  from  molasses  and 
bran ;  from  Indian  corn,  malted  by  drying  it  in  a 
stove ;  from  persimmons  dried  in  cakes  and  baked ; 
from  potatoes ;  or  from  the  green  stalks  of  Indian 
corn  cut  small,  and  bruised. 

Their  strong  drink  is  Madeira  wine,  cider,  mobby 
punch,  made  either  of  rum  from  the  Caribbee  Islands, 
or  brandy  distilled  from  their  apples  and  peaches ; 
besides  brandy,  wine  and  strong  beer,  which  they 
have  constantly  from  England. 

Their  fuel  is  altogether  wood,  which  every  man 
burns  at  pleasure,  for  it  costs  him  only  the  cutting 


no.  5o]  Virginia  151 

and  carrying  it  home.      In  all  new  grounds  it  is  such 

an  incumbrance,  that  they  are  forced  to  burn  great 

heaps  of  it,  to  rid  the  land.     They  have  very  good  About  fifty 

pit-coal  in  several  places  of  the  country,  but  no  man   yearsas°llie 

1  .  J  burning  of 

has  yet  thought  it  worth  his  while  to  make  use  of  it,   this  coal 
as  he  has  wood  in  plenty,  which  is  lying  conveniently  besar|.  and 
near  him. 


since  con- 


They  get  their  clothing  of  all  sorts  from  England,  tinued. 
as  linen,  woolen,  silk,  hats,  and  leather :  yet  flax  and 
hemp  grow  nowhere  in  the  world  better  than  there. 
Their  sheep  yield  good  increase,  and  bear  good 
fleeces ;  but  they  shear  them  only  to  cool  them. 
The  mulberry-tree,  whose  leaf  is  the  proper  food  of 
the  silk  worm,  grows  there  like  a  weed,  and  silk 
worms  have  been  observed  to  thrive  extremely  well. 
Most  of  their  hides  lie  and  spoil,  or  are  made  use  of 
only  for  covering  dry  goods,  in  a  leaky  house.  In- 
deed, some  few  hides  with  much  ado  are  tanned,  and 
made  into  servants'  shoes,  but  in  so  careless  a  fashion, 
that  the  planters  do  not  care  to  buy  them,  if  they  can 
get  others.  Sometimes  perhaps  a  better  manager 
than  ordinary,  will  vouchsafe  to  make  a  pair  of 
breeches  of  a  deerskin.  Nay,  they  are  such  abom- 
inably poor  managers  that  though  their  country  be 
over-run  with  wood,  yet  they  have  all  their  wooden 
ware  from  England  ;  their  cabinets,  chairs,  tables, 
stools,  chests,  boxes,  cart-wheels,  and  all  other  things, 
even  so  much  as  their  bowls  and  birchen  brooms,  to 
the  eternal  reproach  of  their  laziness. 

For  their  recreation,  the  plantations,  orchards,  and 
gardens  constantly  afford  them  fragrant  and  delight- 
ful walks.  In  their  woods  and  fields,  they  have  an 
unknown  variety  of  vegetables,  and  other  rarities  of 
nature  to  discover  and  observe.     They  have  hunting, 


152  Colonies  [No.  51 

fishing,  and  fowling,  with  which  they  entertain  them- 
selves in  a  hundred  ways.  There  is  the  most  good- 
nature and  hospitality  practised  in  the  world,  both 
towards  friends  and  strangers ;  but  the  worst  of  it  is, 
this  generosity  is  attended  now  and  then,  with  a  little 
too  much  intemperance. 

A  neighborhood  is  as  much  scattered  as  in  the 
country  in  England  ;  but  the  goodness  of  the  roads, 
and  the  fairness  of  the  weather,  bring  people  often 
together.  The  inhabitants  are  very  courteous  to 
travellers.  A  stranger  has  only  to  inquire  upon  the 
road,  where  any  gentleman,  or  good  house  keeper 
lives,  and  there  he  may  depend  upon  being  received 
with  hospitality.  This  good  nature  is  so  general 
among  their  people,  that  the  gentry,  when  they  go 
abroad,  order  their  principal  servant  to  entertain  all 
visitors,  with  everything  the  plantation  affords.  And 
the  poor  planters  who  have  but  one  bed  will  very  often 
sit  up,  or  lie  upon  a  couch  all  night,  to  make  room  for 
a  weary  traveller  to  rest  himself  after  his  journey. 


51.    Puritan  Amusements 

By  P.  Bennett  (1740) 

A  chaise  was  Several  families  in  Boston  keep  a  coach,  and  a 
a  one-horse  pajr  0f  horses,  and  some  few  drive  with  four  horses  ; 
as  for  chaises  and  saddle  horses,  considering  the 
size  of  the  place,  they  outdo  London.  They  have 
some  nimble  lively  horses  for  their  coaches  but  not 
any  of  that  beautiful,  large,  black  breed  so  common 
in  London. 

The  common  horses  used  in  carts  about  the  town 


no.  5i]  Puritan  Fun  153 

are  very  small  and  poor.  They  seldom  have  their 
fill  of  anything  but  labor.  The  country  carts  and 
wagons  are  generally  drawn  by  oxen,  from  two  to 
six,  according  to  the  distance  or  to  the  burden  they 
are  loaded  with. 

When  the  ladies  ride  out  to  take  the  air,  it  is  gen-   a  chair  was 
erally  in  a  chaise  or  chair,  and  then  but  a  single  horse   ?'kl"d  of 
is  used.     They  have  a  negro  servant  to  drive  them. 
The  gentlemen  ride  out  here  as  in  England,  some  in 
chairs,  and  others  on  horseback,  with  their  negroes 
to  attend  them. 

They  travel  in  much  the  same  manner  on  business 
as  for  pleasure.  Their  roads  are  exceedingly  good 
in  summer.  Yet  it  is  safe  travelling  night  or  day  ; 
for  thev  have  no  highway  robbers  to  interrupt  them. 
Riding  through  the  woods  is  pleasant,  and  the  coun- 
try is  dotted  with  farm  houses,  cottages,  and  some 
few  gentlemen's  country  houses. 

The  best  of  their  inns  and  public  houses  are  far 
short  of  the  beauty  and  convenience  of  ours  in  Eng- 
land. They  have  generally  a  little  rum  to  drink,  and 
some  of  them  have  a  sorry  sort  of  Madeira  wine. 
For  food  they  have  Indian  corn  roasted,  and  bread 
made  of  Indian  meal.  Sometimes  they  have  a  fowl 
or  fish  dressed  after  a  fashion  ;  they  have  pretty  good 
butter,  and  a  very  sad  sort  of  cheese.  But  those  who 
are  used  to  these  things  think  them  tolerable. 

For  their  amusements,  every  afternoon,  after  drink- 
ing tea,  the  gentlemen  and  ladies  walk  the  Mall. 
From  there  they  go  to  one  another's  houses  to  spend 
the  evening,  that  is,  those  who  are  not  disposed  to 
attend  the  evening  lecture.  This  they  may  do,  if  Lectures 
they  please,  six  nights  out  of  seven,  the   year  round.    "''"' ''  w 

1  -  day  .sermon. 

What  they  call  the  Mall  is  a  walk  on  a  line  green 


A   COLONIAL   KITCHEN. 


No.  52] 


Puritan   Fun 


*55 


common.  It  is  nearly  half  a  mile  over,  with  two 
rows  of  young  trees  planted  opposite  to  each  other. 
There  is  a  fine  footway  between  in  imitation  of  St. 
James's  Park.  Part  of  the  bay  of  the  sea  which 
encircles  the  town,  takes  its  course  along  the  north- 
west side  of  the  Common. 

Their  country  sports  are  chiefly  shooting  and  fish- 
ing. For  the  former  the  woods  afford  them  plenty 
of  game.  The  rivers  and  ponds,  with  which  this 
country  abounds,  yield  them  a  great  plenty  as  well 
as  a  great  variety  of  fine  fish. 

The  government  is  in  the  hands  of  the  Dissenters, 
who  do  not  allow  theatres  or  music  houses.  But 
although  plays  and  such  entertainments  are  not  held 
here,  the  people  don't  seem  to  be  dispirited  or  to 
mope  for  want  of  them.  For  both  the  ladies  and 
gentlemen  dress  and  appear  as  gay,  usually,  as  court- 
iers in  England  on  a  coronation  day  or  birthday. 
And  the  ladies  here  visit,  drink  tea,  and  do  every- 
thing else  in  the  height  of  fashion.  They  neglect 
the  affairs  of  their  families  with  as  good  a  grace  as 
the  finest  ladies  in  London. 


Boston 
Common. 

St.  James's 
Park  in 
London. 
Where  now- 
one  sees  the 
Public 
Garden. 


Proteslants 
who  did  not 
belong  to  the 
Church  of 
ot  England 
were  called 
Dissenters 
and  Puritans. 


52' 


Impressions  of  South   Carolina 


By  Eliza  Lucas  (May  22d,  1742) 


I  AM  now  set  down,  my  dear  brother,  to  obey  your 
commands  and  give  you  a  short  description  of  the 
part  of  the  world  I  now  inhabit. 

South  Carolina  is  an  extensive  country  near  the  sea. 
Most  of  the  settled  part  of  it  is  upon  a  flat.  The  soil 
near  Charlestown  is  sandy  ;  but  further  inland  it  is 


156 


Colonies  [No.  52 


clay  and  swamp  lands.  The  country  abounds  with 
fine  navigable  rivers  and  great  quantities  of  fine  tim- 
ber. At  a  great  distance,  that  is  to  say  about  a  hun- 
dred and  fifty  miles  from  Charlestown,  it  is  very  hilly. 

The  soil  in  general  is  very  fertile  and  there  are  few 
European  or  American  fruits  or  grains  but  what  grow 
here.  The  country  abounds  with  wild  fowl,  deer,  and 
fish.  Beef,  veal,  and  mutton  are  here  in  much  greater 
perfection  than  in  the  islands,  though  not  equal  to 
that  of  England.  Fruit  is  extremely  good  and  grows 
in  profusion.  The  oranges  exceed  any  I  ever  tasted 
West  indies,    in  the  West  Indies  or  from  Spain  or  Portugal. 

The  people  in  general  are  hospitable  and  honest; 
and  the  better  sort  add  to  these  qualities  a  polite  gen- 
teel behavior.  The  poorer  sort  are  the  most  indolent 
people  in  the  world,  or  they  would  never  be  so  wretched 
in  so  plentiful  a  country  as  this. 

The  winters  here  are  fine  and  pleasant.  But  four 
months  in  the  year  are  extremely  disagreeable,  — ■ 
excessively  hot,  much  thunder  and  lightning,  and 
mosquitoes  and  sand  flies  in  abundance.  Charlestown, 
the  metropolis,  is  a  neat  pretty  place.  The  inhabi- 
tants are  polite  and  live  in  a  very  genteel  manner. 
The  streets  and  houses  are  regularly  built.  The 
ladies  and  gentlemen  are  gay  in  their  dress.  Upon 
the  whole  you  will  find  as  many  agreeable  people  of 
both  sexes,  for  the  size  of  the  place,  as  almost  any- 
where. 

St.  Phillips  Church  in  Charlestown  is  a  very  ele- 
gant one  and  much  frequented.  There  are  several 
more  places  of  public  worship  in  the  town,  and  in 
general  the  people  are  of  a  religious  turn  of  mind. 

I  began  in  haste  and  have  shown  no  order  in  writ- 
ing, or  I  should  have  told  you,  before  I  came  to  sum- 


no.  53]  South  Carolina  157 

mer,  that  we  have  a  most  charming  spring  in  this 
country.  Especially  is  this  true  for  those  who  travel 
through  the  country.  For  the  scent  of  the  young 
myrtle  and  yellow  jessamine,  with  which  the  woods 
abound,  is  delightful. 

The  staple  commodity  here  is  rice,  which  is  the 
only  thing  they  export  to  Europe.  Beef,  pork,  and 
lumber  they  send  to  the  West  Indies. 

Mama  and  Polly  join  in  love,  with  dear  brother. 
Yours  affectionately, 

E.  Lucas. 

To  George  Lucas,  Esquire. 


53.    Slavery  in  Virginia 

Letters  of  Peter  Fontaine  (1757) 

As  to  your  query,  whether  enslaving  our  fellow 
creatures  be  a  practice  agreeable  to  Christianity,  I 
shall  only  mention  something  of  our  present  state 
here.  Like  Adam  we  are  all  apt  to  shift  off  the 
blame  from  ourselves  and  lay  it  upon  others,  how 
justly  in  our  case  you  may  judge.  The  negroes  are 
enslaved  by  the  negroes  themselves  before  they  are 
purchased  by  the  masters  of  the  ships  who  bring 
them  here.  It  is  to  be  sure  at  our  choice  whether 
we  buy  them  or  not,  so  this  then  is  our  crime,  folly, 
or  whatever  you  will  please  to  call  it. 

Our  Assembly,   foreseeing   the    bad  consequences   Legislation, 
of  importing  such   numbers  amongst  us,   hath  often 
attempted    to    lay   a   duty    upon    them    which    would 
amount  to  a  prohibition,  such  as  ten  or  twenty  pounds 
a  head  ;   but  no  Governor  dare   pass  such  a  law,  hav- 


158 


Colo?iies 


[No.  53 


The  home 
government 
forbids  the 
Colonies  to 
favor  the 
trade. 


The  home 
government 
did  not  like 
to  have  the 
Colonies  lay 
taxes  on 
things  sent  to 
England. 


About  $  ioo. 
Spend  about 
$  140  and 
you  can  buy 
a  slave. 


ing  instructions  to  the  contrary  from  the  Board  of 
Trade  at  home.  By  this  means  they  are  forced  upon 
us,  whether  we  will  or  will  not.  This  plainly  shows 
the  African  Company  hath  the  advantage  of  the 
colonies,  and  may  do  as  it  pleases  with  the  Ministry. 

Since  we  have  been  exhausted  of  our  little  stock 
of  cash  by  the  war,  the  importation  of  slaves  has 
stopped ;  our  poverty  then  is  our  best  security. 
There  is  no  more  picking  for  their  ravenous  jaws 
upon  bare  bones ;  but  should  we  begin  to  thrive  they 
will  be  at  the  same  business  again. 

All  our  taxes  are  now  laid  upon  slaves  and  on 
shippers  of  tobacco,  which  the  English  wink  at  while 
we  are  in  danger  of  being  torn  from  them  ;  but  we 
dare  not  do  it  in  time  of  peace,  it  being  looked  upon 
as  the  highest  presumption  to  lay  any  burden  upon 
trade. 

This  is  our  part  of  the  grievance,  but  to  live  in 
Virginia  without  slaves  is  morally  impossible.  Before 
our  troubles,  you  could  not  hire  a  servant  or  slave  for 
love  or  money ;  so  that,  unless  you  are  robust  enough 
to  cut  wood,  to  go  to  mill,  to  work  at  the  hoe,  etc., 
you  must  starve,  or  board  in  some  family  where  they 
both  fleece  and  half  starve  you.  There  is  no  set 
price  upon  corn,  wheat,  and  provisions,  so  they  take 
advantage  of  the  necessities  of  strangers,  who  are 
thus  obliged  to  purchase  some  slaves  and  land.  This 
of  course  draws  us  all  into  the  original  sin  and  curse 
of  the  country  of  purchasing  slaves.  This  is  the 
reason  we  have  no  merchants,  traders,  or  artificers  of 
any  sort  who  do  not  become  planters  in  a  short  time. 

A  common  laborer,  white  or  black,  if  you  can  be 
so  much  favored  as  to  hire  one,  is  a  shilling  sterling 
or  fifteen  pence  currency  per  day  ;  a  bungling  car- 


no.  54]  Slaves  159 

penter  two  shillings  or  two  shillings  and  sixpence  per 
day ;  beside  diet  and  lodging.  That  is,  for  a  lazy- 
fellow  to  get  wood  and  water,  ^19.  16.  3,  current 
per  annum ;  add  to  this  seven  or  eight  pounds  more 
and  you  have  a  slave  for  life. 

Nevertheless  I  cannot  help  expressing  my  concern 
at  the  nature  of  our  Virginia  estates,  so  far  as  they 
consist  in  slaves.  I  suppose  we  have,  young  and  old, 
one  hundred  and  fifty  thousand  of  them  in  the  coun- 
try, a  number,  at  least,  equal  to  the  whites.  It  is  a 
hard  task  to  do  our  duty  towards  them  as  we  ought. 
We  run  the  hazard  of  temporal  ruin  if  they  are  not 
compelled  to  work  hard  on  the  one  hand  —  and  on 
the  other,  that  of  not  being  able  to  render  a  good 
account  of  our  stewardship  in  the  other  and  better 
world,  if  we  oppress  and  tyrannize  over  them. 

Besides,  according  to  our  present  method,  which 
every  body  appears  afraid  to  go  out  of,  it  seems 
quite  necessary  to  lay  most  stress  on  that  useless 
weed,  tobacco,  as  our  staple  commodity.  This  is  the 
reason  that  all  other  useful  trades  and  occupations 
are  neglected.  Every  Virginia  tradesman  must  be  at 
least  half  a  planter,  and,  of  course,  not  to  be  de- 
pended upon  as  a  tradesman. 


54.    In  New  Jersey 

By  a  Gentleman  (1756) 

The  province  of  New  Jersey,  of  which  I  come  now 
to  give  you  some  description,  has  been  settled  a  little 
more  than  a  hundred  years.  It  is  as  well  cultivated 
as  any  of  the  colonies,  yet  is  in  a  careless  condition, 


160  Colonies  [No.  54 

or  at  least  seems  so  to  one  who  has  not  seen  newly 
settled  places. 

The  farms  which  lie  interspersed  in  the  bosom  of 
thick  woods,  resemble  the  face  of  the  sky  after  a  tem- 
pest, when  the  clouds  are  breaking  away  and  dispers- 
ing. The  pleasantest  spots  that  you  see  here  are  but 
homely  beauties.  Almost  everywhere  you  pass  upon 
the  roads,  you  are  either  in  woods,  or  have  woods  on 
one  side  of  vou.  And  the  view  which  is  on  the  open 
side  is  terminated  by  trees  within  the  breadth  of  a 
field  or  two.  So  that  the  horizon  is  hardly  any  where 
clear,  and  to  view  the  country  from  an  eminence  it 
seems  to  be  almost  all  woods. 

The  roads  in  most  places  are  very  good,  but  then 
you  travel  in  a  maze.  You  have  neither  milestone 
nor  Mercury  for  your  direction.  Only  here  and  there 
Guide-post,  is  a  tree  marked  with  the  initial  letter  of  the  name  of 
the  next  town,  but  so  ill  cut  that  one  can  hardly  know 
it  to  be  an  alphabetical  character.  A  few  scattered 
houses  make  here  a  village.  And  in  those  towns 
where  the  buildings  stand  in  line  they  are  not  near 
together. 

The  people  are  naturally  brisk  and  of  a  lively  tem- 
per. They  stand  much  upon  a  footing  of  equality 
with  each  other.  Those  of  the  common  sort  by  con- 
versing freely  with  persons  in  office  acquire  a  knowl- 
edge of  things  and  business.  Thus  they  receive  a 
brightening  by  which  they  are  far  superior  to  our 
country  men  of  the  same  rank. 

Religion  is  here  divided  into  many  sects  and  parties. 
The  men  who  are  extremely  kind  husbands  go  com- 
monly the  way  of  the  wife  in  this  matter. 

The  poor  people  in  general  live  better  here  than  in 
most  places,  I  believe.     This  is  because  of  the  plenty 


no.  54]  New  Jersey  i  6  i 

and  cheapness  of  provisions.  They  are  able  to  place 
their  children  in  good  families  by  the  time  they  are 
six  or  seven  years  of  age,  and  they  have  little  experi- 
ence of  what  it  costs  to  bring  them  up.  So  that  very 
few  of  them  turn  beggars,  or  go  to  seek  their  bread 
from  home  :  if  they  do  go,  they  carry  their  working 
tools  upon  their  backs. 

You  must  certainly  think  that  thefts  and  robberies 
cannot  but  be  rife  among  us,  as  these  colonies  are 
obliged  to  take  all  the  rogues  and  villains  that  are 
yearly  transported  from  the  several  jails  in  England. 
But  I  can  assure  you  it  is  far  otherwise.  People  think 
so  little  of  the  danger  of  these  things  that  many  fami- 
lies never  fasten  their  doors  when  they  go  to  bed. 
And  the  good  housewives  that  have  cloth  in  bleach- 
ing never  take  it  in  at  nights.  As  to  picking  of  pock- 
ets, the  practice  is  utterly  unknown,  and  the  roads  are 
perfectly  uninfested  and  secure. 

But  the  wonder  of  this  will  evaporate  when  I  tell   Newgate  was 
you  that  none  of  the  Newgate  gentry  are  landed  here,    aPnson  in 

it-       •    •  r     1  London. 

but  always  either  in  Virginia  or  some  of  the  southern   -Newgate 
colonies,  where  however  they  are  no  calamity.     For  gentry"  were 
the  masters  of   the  transports    make   them   all   bind 

.   .        ,        .      ,  ,        ,  ^,  That  is,  the 

themselves  to  him  by  indenture  tor  tour  years.     Inus  convicts  and 

they  are  obliged  to  honest  labor.  other  bad 

The  spring  here  is  commonly  late,  but  when  the  have' to  agree 

year  does  begin  to  dress,  the  ornaments  of  Nature  are  to  serve  a 

out   all  at  once.      In  a  few  days  the  scene  is  quite  niastei 

-'  l  four  years 

changed.       The    vast    orchards   are   clad    in   a  thick   after  landing, 
bloom  which  makes  the  country  look  and  smell  like 
paradise. 

The  country  is  well  watered  with  fine  streams  and 
rivers,  and  every  house  has  a  well.  The  woods, 
though  abounding  with  very  beautiful   birds,  are  the 

M 


1 6  2  Colonies  [No.  54 

dullest  of  all  sylvan  scenes.  The  mocking  bird  is 
the  mimic  of  them  all,  and  a  complete  joker  in  his 
way. 

Nothing  is  so  beautiful  and  diminutive  as  that  little 
feathered  spark,  the  humming  bird,  who  with  the 
most  gallant  address  courts  the  daughters  of  the  gar- 
den in  a  coat  of  plumage  composed  of  the  finest 
feathers. 

In  summer  time  for  about  two  months  the  air  is 
bespangled  every  night  with  a  kind  of  flies  which 
they  call  fire-flies.  They  abound  in  swamps  and 
woods  of  a  wet  soil.  In  those  gloomy  places  they 
make  an  extraordinary  appearance.  Their  light  is 
not  steady ;  and  in  the  silent  night,  hovering  about 
in  their  bright  form  they  almost  give  the  mind  an 
impression  of  a  haunted  place. 


EDWARD    WINSLOW. 


PART    VI 

LITTLE    FOLKS 


55.    Where  the  First  English  Child 
in  America  was  Born 

By  Governor  John  White  (15S7) 

About   the   sixteenth    of    July,  we   arrived  at  the   These  set- 
mainland  of  Virginia,  which  Simon  Ferdinando  took  ,lers  were 

1  1  x    1  1  r      v-"  t  t  sent  out  ')V 

to   be  the   Island   of    Croatoan.       Here  we   came   to  sir  Waiter 

anchor  and  rode  there  two  or  three  clays.      Finding  Raleigh,  after 

ourselves  deceived,   we  weighed    anchor    and    sailed  to  establish  a 

along  the  coast,  where  in  the  night,  had  not  Captain  colony  in 

Stafford  been  more  careful  in  looking  out  than  our  " hat  1S  now 

0  North  Caro- 

Simon   Ferdinando  was,  we   should   have   been    cast   lina  had 
away  upon  the  coast  at  a  point  called  Cape  of  Fear,   failed-    Fer- 

£  ...  ii>i  r     •  dinando  was 

tor  we  came  within   two  cables    length  of    it;    such   the  pilot, 
was  the  carelessness  and  ignorance  of  our  master.        Master 
The  two  and  twentieth  day  of  July  we  came  safely   meansshiP- 

.  .  J      captain. 

to  Cape  II  atteras  where  our  ship  and  pinnace  anchored. 
The  Governor  went  aboard  the  pinnace  accompanied 
by  forty  of  his  best  men,  intending  to  pass  up  to 
Roanoke.  He  hoped  to  find  those  fifteen  English- 
men whom  Sir  Richard  Grenville  had  left  there  the 
year  before.  With  these  he  meant  to  have  a  confer- 
ence concerning  the  state  of  the  country  and  the  sav- 

165 


i  66  Little  Folks  [No.  55 

ages,  intending  then  to  return  to  the  fleet  and  pass 
That  is,  along  the  coast  to  the  Bay  of  Chesapeake.      Here  we 

northward.  intended  to  make  our  settlement  and  fort  according 
to  the  charge  given  us  among  other  directions  in 
writing  under  the  hand  of  Sir  Walter  Raleigh.  We 
passed  to  Roanoke  and  the  same  night  at  sunset  went 
ashore  on  the  island,  in  the  place  where  our  fifteen 
men  were  left.  But  we  found  none  of  them,  nor  any 
sign  that  they  had  been  there,  saving  only  that  we 
found  the  bones  of  one  of  them,  whom  the  savages 
had  slain  long  before. 

The  Governor  with  several  of  his  company  walked 
the  next  day  to  the  north  end  of  the  island  where 
Master  Ralph  Lane,  with  his  men  the  year  before, 
had  built  his  fort  with  sundry  dwelling  houses.  We 
hoped  to  find  some  signs  here,  or  some  certain  knowl- 
edge of  our  fifteen  men. 

When  we  came  thither  we  found  the  fort  razed,  but 
all  the  houses  standing  unhurt,  saving  that  the  lower 
rooms  of  them,  and  of  the  fort  also,  were  overgrown 
with  melons  of  different  sorts,  and  deer  were  in  rooms 
feeding  on  those  melons.  So  we  returned  to  our  com- 
pany without  the  hope  of  ever  seeing  any  of  the 
fifteen  men  living. 

The  same  day  an  order  was  given  that  every  man 
should  be  employed  in  remodelling  those  houses  which 
we  found  standing,  and  in  making  more  cottages. 

On  the  eighteenth  a  daughter  was  born  in  Roanoke 
to  Eleanor,  the  daughter  of  the  Governor  and  the  wife 
of  Annanias  Dare.  This  baby  was  christened  on  the 
Sunday  following,  and  because  this  child  was  the  first 
Christian  born  in  Virginia  she  was  named  Virginia 
Dare. 

By  this    time   our   shipmasters   had   unloaded   the 


no. 56]  Lost  Colony  167 

goods  and  victuals  of  the  planters  and  taken  wood 
and  fresh  water,  and  were  newly  calking  and  trim- 
ming their  vessels  for  their  return  to  England.  The 
settlers  also  prepared  their  letters  and  news  to  send 
back  to  England. 


56.    How  the  First  Colony  Dis- 
appeared 

By  Governor  John  White  (1590) 

When  our  boats  were  fitted  again,  we  put  off  from  white  went 
Hatteras,  numbering  nineteen  persons  in  both  boats.    to  En§land 

.      r  .  .  111  leaving 

Before  we  could  get  to  the  place  where  our  settlers  eighty-nine 
were  left,  three  years  before,  it  was  so  exceedingly  men>  seven- 
dark  that  we  overshot  the  place  by  a  quarter  of  a  ^ndeieveT' 
mile.     There  we  espied,  towards  the  north  end  of  the  children  at 
island,  the  light  of  a  great  fire  through  the  woods,  to  ,R°a,n°ke;,, 

&  °  &  '  but  he  could 

which   we   presently  rowed.      When   we  came  right   not  get  back 
over  against  it,  we  let  fall  our  grapnel  near  the  shore   tlU  three 

years  later. 

and  sounded  a  call  with  a  trumpet,  and  afterwards  This  extract 
many  familiar  English  tunes.  We  called  to  them  in  teiisuswhat 
friendly  tones,  but  had  no  answer;  we  therefore 
landed  at  day-break,  and  coming  to  the  fire,  found 
the  grass  and  sundry  rotten  trees  burning  about  the 
place.  From  thence  we  went  through  the  woods  to 
that  part  of  the  island  where  I  left  our  colony  in  the 
year  1587.  All  along  this  way  we  saw  in  the  sand 
the  print  of  the  savages  feet  of  two  or  three  sorts, 
trodden  during  the  night.  As  we  went  up  the  sandy 
bank,  upon  a  tree  and  on  the  very  brow  thereof,  were 
curiously  carved  these  fair  Roman  letters,  C  R  O  : 
which    letters   at   once   we    knew   to  signify  the   place 


1 68  Little  Folks  [No.  5e 

where  I  should  find  the  settlers  living,  according  to  a 
secret  token  agreed  upon  between  them  and  me,  at 
my  last  departure  from  them.  This  agreement  was, 
that  they  should  in  no  wise  fail  to  write  or  carve  on 
the  trees  or  posts  of  the  doors  the  name  of  the  place 
where  they  should  be  seated ;  for  when  I  came  away 
they  were  prepared  to  remove  from  Roanoke  fifty 
miles  inward.  Therefore  at  my  departure  from  them, 
in  the  year  1587,  I  told  them  that  if  they  should  hap- 
pen to  be  distressed  in  any  of  those  places,  that  then 
they  should  carve  over  the  letters  or  name,  a  cross 
in  this  form  but  we  found  no  such  sign  of  distress. 
Having  well  considered  all  this,  we  passed  towards 
the  place  where  we  had  left  the  people  in  sundry 
houses ;  but  we  found  the  houses  taken  down,  and 
the  place  very  strongly  enclosed  with  a  high  palisade 
of  great  trees,  looking  very  fort-like.  One  of  the 
chief  trees,  or  posts,  at  the  right  side  of  the  entrance, 
had  the  bark  taken  off,  and  five  feet  from  the  ground, 
in  fair  capital  letters,  was  graven  CROATOAN, 
without  any  cross  or  sign  of  distress.  This  done,  we 
entered  inside  the  palisade,  where  we  found  many 
bars  of  iron,  two  pigs  of  lead,  four  iron  fowlers,  iron 
sacker-shots,  and  such  heavy  things,  thrown  here  and 
there,  almost  overgrown  with  grass  and  weeds.  From 
thence  we  went  along  the  waterside,  towards  a  point 
of  the  creek,  to  see  if  we  could  find  any  of  their  boats 
or  the  pinnace,  but  we  could  perceive  no  sign  of  them 
nor  any  of  the  small  arms  which  were  left  with  them 
at  my  departure  from  them. 

At  our  return  from  the  creek,  some  of  our  sailors, 
meeting  us,  told  us  that  they  had  found  where  several 
chests  had  been  hidden,  and  long  since  dug  up  again. 
These  had  been  broken  up,  and  much  of  the  things 


No.  56] 


Lost  Colony 


169 


in  them  spoiled  and  scattered  about.  Presently  Cap- 
tain Cook  and  I  went  to  the  place,  which  was  in  the 
end  of  an  old  trench  made  six  years  ago  by  Captain 


MK    WALTER    RALEIGH. 


Amadas.      Here  we  found  fine  chests  that  had  been  whin- did 

carefully  hidden  bv  the  planters,  and  among  the  same  "."'  "' ' '" 

J  J  *  °  <  roatoan, 

chests  three  were  my  own.      About  the  place  I  found  an,i  nothing 

many  of  my  things  spoiled  and  broken,  and  my  books  waseverseen 


170  Little  Folks  [No. 57 

again  of  a  torn  from  the  covers,  the  frames  of  some  of  my  pic- 
smgie  one  of    j-ures  anci  mapS  rotten  and  spoiled  with  rain,  and  my 

the  one  nun-  l  '  J 

dred  and  armor  almost  eaten  through  with  rust.  This  could 
seventeen        De  no  0ther  but  the  deeds  of  the  savages,  our  enemies, 

white  people  1111111  r  ^ 

who  were  wno  had  watched  the  departure  of  our  men  to  Croa- 
left  there  toan,  and  as  soon  as  they  were  departed,  these  men 
before'6  dug  UP  everv  place  where  they  suspected  anything 

to  be  buried  ;  but  although  it  grieved  me  much  to  see 
such   spoil    of    my  goods,  yet  on  the  other  hand,   I 
Nobody  greatly  rejoiced   that   I    had    safely  found   a   certain 

knows  what     token  of  their  safe  being  at  Croatoan,  which  is  the 

became  of  ° 

little  Virginia  place  where  Manteo  Mras  born,  and  where  the  savages 
Dare.  0f  ^e  isiand  were  our  friends. 


57.   Boyhood  of  a  Famous  Colonist 

By  Thomas  Shephard  (1605-1620) 

I  was  born  on  the  fifth  day  of  November  in  the 
year  1605,  in  Lancaster,  some  six  miles  from  the  town 
of  Northampton  in  Old  England.  My  father's  name 
was  William  Shephard.  As  one  of  my  older  brothers 
had  been  called  William  he  gave  the  name  of  Thomas 
to  me. 

I  remember  my  father  well  and  have  some  little 
remembrance  of  my  mother.  My  father  was  a  wise 
and  prudent  man,  the  peace-maker  of  our  town.  My 
mother  had  a  gteat  love  for  me,  perhaps  because  I 
was  the  youngest;  but  she  died  when  I  was  about 
four  years  old.  Later  my  father  married  another 
woman  who  let  me  see  the  difference  between  my 
own  mother  and  a  step-mother.  She  did  not  seem  to 
love  me  and  turned  my  father  against  me.     Then  my 


No.  57] 


R?iglish  Boyhood       171 


father  sent  me  to  school  to  a  Welshman,  Mr.  Rico, 

who  kept  the  free  school  in  the  town  of  Lancaster. 

He  was  exceedingly  cruel  and  dealt  unjustly  with  me. 

This  discouraged  me  so  about  school  and  lessons  that 

I  remember  wishing  often  times  that  I  might  take 

care  of  pigs,  for  once  when  I  was  a  little  fellow  on  a 

visit   at   my  grandfather's,   he  had  let  me  take  care 

of  the  geese  and  do  other  farm-work.      I  still  had  a 

memory  of  it  and  thought  I  should  like  it  better  than 

I  did  to  go  to  school  and  learn.     My  father  died  when 

I  was  about  ten  years  of  age,  so  I  was  left  to  the  care 

of  my  step-mother  who  neglected  my  education  very 

much,  although  my  father  had  left  a  hundred  pounds   About  $500. 

to  pay  for  my  schooling.     When  John,  an  older  brother, 

decided  to  take  me  out  of  this  mother's  hands,  he  was 

granted  the  right,  and  my  portion  was  paid  over  to  him. 

So  I  lived  with  this  brother  who  showed  much  love 

for  me  and  to  whom  I  owed  much,  for  he  seemed  to 

be  a  brother,  father,  and  mother  to  me. 

Just  about  this  time  the  cruel  schoolmaster  died,  and  Thomas 
another  came  to  take  his  place.     This  man  stirred  up   Shephard 

1  L      lived  to  be 

in  my  heart  a  desire  of  learning,  and  I  told  my  friends  the  minister 

I  would  be  a  scholar.      I  studied  Greek  and   Latin;  of  the  church 

1   r     11     t         i  1       i  r     1  m  Cam- 

ana  finally  I   could    take  notes  or    the    sermons    on 

Sundays. 

So  I  continued  at  my  studies  until  I  was  about 
fifteen  years  of  age  and  was  considered  ripe  for  the 
University  at  Cambridge,  in  Lngland. 


bridge, 
Massachu- 
setts. 


172 


Little  Folks 


[No.  58 


58.    Let's  Go  A-Fishing 

By  Captain  John  Smith  (1614) 

Now  here  in  New  England  savage  boys  and  girls, 
or  any  other  children  may  turn,  carry,  and  return  fish 
without  either  shame  or  any  great  pain.  He  is  a  very 
idle  boy  who  has  passed  the  age  of  twelve  years  and 


Two-pence 
=  about  four 
cents. 


A   COLONIAL   CRADLE. 


cannot  do  so  much ;    and  a  girl  is  very  stupid  who 
cannot  spin  a  thread  to  make  nets  to  catch  the  fish. 

What  pleasure  can  be  greater,  when  people  are 
tired  with  work  on  shore,  whether  they  have  been 
planting  vines,  or  building  houses  or  ships,  than  to 
get  recreation  for  themselves  before  their  very  doors, 
in  their  own  boats  upon  the  sea.  There  man,  woman, 
and  child,  each  with  a  small  hook  and  line,  may  take 
divers  kinds  of  excellent  fish  at  their  pleasure.  And 
is  it  not  a  pretty  sport  to  pull  up  two-pence,  sixpence, 


no.  58j  Fishing  I7  3 

and  twelve  pence  as  fast  as  you  can  haul  and  change 
a  line  ? 

He  is  a  very  bad  fisher  who  cannot  take  in  one  day 
with  his  hook  and  line  one,  two,  or  three  hundred  cods. 
These,  dressed  and  dried,  if  they  be  sold  here  in  New 
England,  will  bring  ten  shillings  for  a  hundred;  or  in   Ten  shillings 
England,  more  than  twenty.     If  a  man  work  but  three   wou!dbe 
days  in  seven  he  may  get  more  than  he  can  spend,   ah°undrS° 
unless  he  is  very  wasteful. 

Now  carpenters,  masons,  gardeners,  tailors,  sailors, 
and  smiths  may  all  take  this  pretty  recreation.  Even 
if  they  fish  for  an  hour  only  in  a  day,  they  may  take 
more  than  they  will  eat  in  a  week.  Or,  if  they  do 
not  eat  it,  they  may  sell  it  or  exchange  it  with  fisher- 
men and  merchants  for  anything  they  want. 

What  sport  doth  yield  a  more  pleasing  feeling  of 
contentment  and  less  harm  than  angling  \yth  a  hook 
and  breathing  the  sweet  air,  from  isle  to  isle,  over  the 
silent  streams  ? 

My  purpose  is  not  to  persuade  children  to  leave 
their  parents,  or  servants  to  leave  their  masters,  but 
to  bring  over  such  as  may  be  spared  freely.  Each 
parish  or  village  in  England,  which  will  clothe  its 
fatherless  children  of  thirteen  or  fourteen  years  of 
age  and  send  them  here,  will  find  that  they  can  live 
exceedingly  well  here  by  their  labor. 


J74 


Little  Folks 


[No   59 


This  extract 
tells  about  a 
plan  to  build 
up  the  Dutch 
Colony  at 
New  Nether- 
land,  now 
the  city  and 
state  of  New 
York. 
Large 
enough  to 
carry  a  cargo 
besides  the 
children,  and 
thus  cover 
the  expense 
of  their  free 
transporta- 
tion. 

Curacco, 
what  we  now 
call  Dutch 
Guiana,  in 
South 
America. 
Bound 
means 
pledged  by 
the  written 
agreement  of 
their  parents 
or  guardians. 


59.    Boys   and  Girls  in  New  Neth- 
erlands 

By  Cornelis  Von  Tienhoven  (1650) 

We  are  of  the  opinion,  that  permission  should  be 
obtained  from  the  magistrates  of  some  provinces  and 
cities  in  Holland  to  send  over  boys  and  girls  from 
the  almshouses  and  orphan  asylums.  There  ought 
to  be  three  or  four  hundred  of  these  boys  and  girls 
of  ten,  twelve,  or  fifteen  years  of  age.  And  their 
own  consent  should  be  obtained  also. 

With  that  intention  a  large  ship  might  be  char- 
tered suitable  to  carry  horses  and  pork  from  Curacco, 
and  afterward  to  return  here  with  a  cargo  of  log- 
wood. 

It  must  be  understood  that  the  children  are  not  to 
be  bound  to  their  masters  longer  than  six  or  seven 
years.  If  the  girls  should  get  married  during  that 
time,  they  must  have  a  chance  to  hire  again  as  ser- 
vants with  their  masters  or  mistresses,  if  they  will. 
Or  they  may  remain  wholly  at  liberty,  or  settle  in 
New  Netherland  for  themselves,  on  condition  that 
they  be  allowed  some  land  by  the  government,  as 
much  as  the  director  of  the  colony  shall  think  proper 
that  each  should  have  for  the  support  of  her  family. 
This  land  is  to  be  free  from  all  rents  and  taxes  for 
ten  years  after  they  settle  upon  the  land.  But  after 
that  time  the  people  living  in  those  parts  shall  pay 
one-tenth  of  what  is  made  on  their  land,  for  the  sup- 
port of  the  colony. 


No.  60] 


Send  Children  ! 


175 


60.    London  Children  in  Virginia 

By  the  Virginia  Company  (1619) 

It  is  asked  what  land  the  children  are  to  have  in 
return  for  their  going  over  to  Virginia.  The  answer 
is  that  they  are  not  to  have  any  ;  but  at  the  end  of 
their  apprenticeship  they  are  to  be  tenants  of  the 
common  land.  It  is  thought  that  the  council  of  the 
company  would  then  allow  twenty-five  acres  apiece, 
for  every  one  of  them.  For  the  good  of  these  same 
children  it  is  ordered  by  the  council  that  every  one 
of  the  children  who  are  now  living  at  the  expense  of 
the  Virginia  Company  shall  be  educated  and  brought 
up  in  some  good  trade  and  profession. 

By  this  means  they  will  be  able  to  get  their  living 
and  support  themselves,  when  they  have  reached  the 
ages  of  four-and-twenty  years,  or  are  out  of  their 
apprenticeships.  Their  apprenticeships  are  to  last  at 
least  seven  years,  if  they  live  so  long. 

Further  it  is  ordered  that  all  of  these  children 
when  they  become  of  age,  or  marry,  whichever  shall 
happen  first,  shall  have  freely  given  and  made  over 
to  them  fifty  acres  of  land  apiece.  This  land  is  to 
be  in  Virginia  within  the  limits  of  the  English  plan- 
tation. 

It  is  fully  intended  that  this  next  spring  one  hun- 
dred children  more  shall  be  sent  and  carried  by  the 
Virginia  Company  out  of  the  city  of  London  to  Vir- 
ginia. During  their  voyage  they  shall  have  their 
food  sweet  and  good.  They  shall  also  be  well  dressed 
and  have  all  other  things  necessary  for  the  voyage. 

Every  one  of  these  children  shall  there  be  placed 
as  apprentices  with   honest  and   good   masters.     The 


The  city  of 
London  had 
agreed  to 
furnish  one 
hundred 
children  for 
Virginia,  and 
to  pay  the 
Virginia 
Company  a 
premium  of 
twenty-five 
dollars 
apiece  for 
each  child, 
partly  to  pay 
for  the 
passage  to 
Virginia,  and 
partly  for  the 
children's 
clothes. 
Apprentice- 
ship. 

The  custom 
of  the  time 
was  to  draw 
up  agree- 
ments for 
Ijovs  and 
gins  who 
were  Ruing 
into  trades 
or  service,  by 
which  their 
parents  or 
guardians 
put  children 
under  the 
legal  control 
of  masters 
who  had  a 
right  to  their 
services  for  a 
term  of 
years,  usually 
seven. 


176 


Little  Folks 


[No.  60 


Virginia 
wanted  as 
manyfarmers 
or  planters 
as  she  could 
get.     The 
first  appren- 
ticeship was 
to  be  fol- 
lowed in  each 
case  by  a 
second,  upon 
easier  terms, 
or  at  least 
terms  better 
suited  to  the 
age  of  the 
apprentice. 
After  a  man 
had  worked 
as  a  farmer 
for  fourteen 
years,  he 
would  be 
likely  to  con- 
tinue in  that 
occupation. 


boys  shall  serve  for  seven  years,  or  until  they  are 
twenty-one  years  old  or  more.  The  girls  shall  serve 
for  seven  years,  that  is,  until  they  are  twenty-one 
or  married. 

Their  masters  during  that  time  must  educate  them 
and  bring  them  up  in  some  good  trade  or  business. 
In  this  way  the)/'  will  be  able  to  get  their  living  and 
support  themselves  when  their  apprenticeships  are 
over. 

During  their  terms  of  labor,  they  shall  have  all 
things  necessary  provided  for  them,  such  as  food, 
drink,  and  clothing.  At  the  end  of  their  apprentice- 
ships, every  one  of  these 
children  shall  have  freely 
given  to  them  by  the  Vir- 
ginia Company  enough 
corn  to  serve  for  food  for 
a  whole  year. 

They  shall  also  each 
have  a  house  ready  built 
to  live  in,  and  shall  be 
placed  as  tenant  in  some 
convenient  place  upon  as 
much  land  as  they  can 
manage.  Each  of  these 
children  shall,  at  this  time, 
have  one  cow,  and  as  much 
corn  as  he  or  she  will  plant. 
Each  shall  have  suitable 
clothing,  convenient  weap- 
ons, and  armor  for  defence 
in  war. 

Every  one  shall  have  the  necessary  implements 
and  utensils  for  the  household,  and  enough  working 


AN    OLD    DOLL. 


no.  61]  Lost  Boy  177 

tools  for  his  trade.  Every  one  who  has  thus  served 
the  apprenticeship  shall  be  bound  to  be  tenant  or 
farmer  for  seven  years  after  his  apprenticeship  end. 

During  that  time  of  their  labor  and  care  they  shall 
have  one  half  of  all  the  profits  that  shall  arise  from 
the  management  of  their  farms.  At  the  end  of  the 
last  seven  years  every  one  of  the  young  men  and 
women  is  to  be  at  liberty  to  remain  as  farmer  on  the 
same  land  if  he  will,  or  to  provide  for  himself  else- 
where. 


61.    The  Lost  Boy 

By  Governor  Bradford  (1621) 

Ten  of  our  men  made  a  voyage  to  the  Kingdom  of 
Nauset  to  find  a  boy  that  had  lost  himself  in  the 
woods.  The  11th  of  June  we  set  out,  the  weather 
being  ^ery  fine. 

Before  we  had  been  long  at  sea,  however,  there 
arose  a  storm  of  wind  and  rain  with  much  lightning 
and  thunder.  So  that  a  water-spout  arose  not  far 
from  us.  But  God  be  praised,  it  did  not  last  long ; 
and  we  put  in  that  night  at  a  harbor  where  we  had 
some  hope  of  finding  the  boy. 

Two  savages  were  in  the  boat  with  us.  The  one 
was  Tisquantum  who  was  our  interpreter.  The  other 
was  Tokamahamon,  a  special  friend.  It  was  night 
when  we  came  into  the  bay. 

In  the  morning  we  saw  savages  hunting  lobsters,  and 
sent  our  two  interpreters  to  speak  with  them.  They 
told  the  Indians  who  we  were  and  whence  we  came. 
They  told  the  Indians  not  to  fear  us  for  we  would  not 
hurt  them,  as  we  were  only  searching  for  a  lost  boy. 

N 


x78 


hit  tie  Folks  [No.  61 


Their  answer  was  that  the  boy  was  well  but  that 
he  was  at  Nauset.  Yet,  since  we  were  there,  they 
wished  us  to  come  ashore  and  eat  with  them.  This 
we  did. 

They  brought  us  to  their  sachem,  Iyanough,  a  man 
not  over  twenty-six  years  of  age.  He  was  very  gen- 
tle, polite,  and  considerate.  Indeed  he  was  not  like 
a  savage,  with  the  exception  of  his  dress. 

He  entertained  us  in  the  same  kind  polite  way; 
and  his  foods  of  different  kinds  were  plentiful. 

One  thing  was  very  sad  to  us  at  this  place.  There 
was  an  old  woman,  whom  we  judged  to  be  no  less 
than  a  hundred  years  of  age.  She  came  to  see  us 
because  she  had  never  seen  any  English  people.  Yet 
she  could  not  look  at  us,  without  breaking  out  in  great 
anger,  weeping  and  crying  loudly. 

We  asked  the  reason  of  this.  They  told  us  that 
she  had  three  sons  who  went  aboard  a  ship  when  Mr. 
Hunt  was  in  this  place,  to  trade  with  him,  and  he  car- 
ried them  away  as  captives  into  Spain. 

So  the  old  woman  had  lost  the  comfort  of  her  sons 
in  her  old  age.  We  told  them  we  were  sorry  that 
any  English  man  should  do  them  that  wrong.  We 
said  that  Hunt  was  a  bad  man,  and  that  all  the  Eng- 
lish people  who  heard  of  the  deed  would  say  the 
same.  But  for  us,  we  would  not  do  them  any  harm, 
even  if  it  would  gain  us  all  the  skins  in  the  country. 
So  we  gave  her  some  small  presents,  which  quieted 
her  anger  somewhat. 

After  dinner  we  took  boat  for  Nauset.  Iyanough 
and  two  of  his  men  went  with  us.  We  sent  Tisquan- 
tum  to  tell  Aspinet,  the  sachem,  at  Nauset  why  we 
came.  The  savages  here  came  very  thick  about  us. 
But  we  had  little  cause  to  trust  them,  as  they  had 


No.  61] 


Puritan   Children 


*79 


some  time  before  made  an  attack  upon  us  in  that 
place.  When  our  boat  was  aground  they  gathered 
on  the  shore,  but  we  stood  upon  our  guard,  not  allow- 
ing any  of  them  to  enter  the  boat  except  two. 


AN    OLD   TOY. 


After  sunset,  Aspinet  came  with  a  great  company 
of  Indians,  and  brought  the  boy  with  him.  One  Ind- 
ian carried  the  boy  through  the  water.  He  had  wan- 
dered five  days,  living  on  berries.  Then  he  saw  the 
lights  of  an  Indian  village  which  proved  to  be  that  of 
these  people  who  first  attacked  us. 

Aspinet,  when  he  brought  the  boy  to  us,  had  not 
less  than  a  hundred  Indians  with  him.  Half  of  them 
came  with  him  to  our  boats'  side  unarmed.  The  others 
stood  at  some  distance  with  their  bows  and  arrows. 

There  he  gave  over  to  us  the  boy,  hung  with  beads, 
and  then  made  peace  with  us.  We  presented  him 
with  a  knife.  We  gave  one  also  to  another  Indian 
who  had  cared  for  the  boy  at  his  home  and  brought 
him  here.      Then  they  went  away  from  us. 


i8o 


Little  Folks 


[No.  62 


62.    Puritan  Children 

By  Governor  William  Bradford  (1622) 

The  Puritans  who  went  to  Holland  had  hard  work 
to  support  their  families  in  a  strange  land  where  the 
chief  industry  was  cloth-making.  The  children  suf- 
fered, too,  by  the  change  from  country  life  in  Eng- 
land to  city  life  at  Amsterdam  and  Leyden. 


A    COLONIAL   FAMILY. 


Necessity  was  a  taskmaster  over  them  and  so  the 
Puritans  were  forced  to  be  taskmasters,  not  only  to 
their  servants,  but  in  a  way  to  their  dearest  children. 
This  greatly  wounded  the  tender  hearts  of  many  a 
loving  father  and  mother. 

So  also  it  caused  many  sad  and  sorrowful  effects. 
Many  of  their  children  were  of  the  best  dispositions 
and  of  right  intentions.  They  had  learned  to  bear 
the  yoke  of  hardships  in  their  youth.  They  were 
willing  to  bear  part  of  their  parents'  burdens  also. 


no.  62]  Puritan   Children  181 

But  oftentimes  they  were  so  weighed  down  by  their 
heavy  work,  that  although  their  minds  were  willing, 
yet  their  bodies  bowed  under  the  weight.  And  so 
they  became  like  old,  weak  people  even  in  their  early 
youth.  The  strength  of  nature  was  used  up  in  the 
very  bud  as  it  were. 

But  there  were  other  things  more  to  be  grieved 
over,  which  of  all  sorrows,  were  most  heavy  to  be 
borne.  Many  of  their  children,  because  of  these 
hardships  and  the  great  wickedness  of  young  people 
in  that  country,  and  the  many  temptations  of  the 
place,  were  drawn  away  into  evil. 

By  bad  example  they  were  drawn  into  spendthrift 
and  dangerous  ways  of  doing.  Having  got  the  reins 
off  their  necks  they  left  the  good  teachings  of  their 
parents.  Some  became  soldiers.  Others  went  upon 
far  voyages  by  sea. 

Some  others  did  worse  things  which  led  them  to 
evil,  to  the  danger  of  their  souls.  This  brought  great 
sorrow  to  their  parents,  and  dishonor  to  God.  So  the 
parents  saw  that  those  who  would  be  born  after  them, 
in  years  to  come,  would  be  in  danger  of  being  weak 
and  wicked. 

To  show  how  strict  and  serious  life  was  among  the 
Puritans,  we  have  only  to  notice  how  different  a  time 
Christmas  was  then  than  it  is  now. 

On  the  day  called  Christmas,  the  governor  called   This  pan  of 
them  all  out  to  work,  as  was  the  way  then.     But  the  theej^ract 

'  j  describes 

most  of  the  people,  newly  come  at  this  time,  said  it  life  in  piy- 
was  against  their  conscience  to  work  on  that  day. 

So  the  governor  said,  if  they  made  it  a  matter  of 
conscience,  he  would  let  them  alone  until  they  knew 
better.     So  he  led  away  the  rest  and  left  them. 

But  when  those  with  him  came  home  at  noon  from 


mouth,  after 
the  Puritans 
had  come 
over  to  New 
England. 


l82 


Little  Folks 


[No.  63 


The  Puritans 
did  not  cele- 
brate Christ- 
mas because 
they  thought 
it  was  a 
Catholic  day 
of  rejoicing. 
Puritan  chil- 
dren had 
sport,  but  not 
on  Christmas 
Day,  which 
is  now  a  day 
of  rejoicing 
everywhere. 


their  work,  he  found  the  others  in  the  street  at  play, 
publicly.  Some  were  pitching  the  bar,  some  were 
playing  at  stool-ball,  and  such  sports. 

So  he  went  to  them  and  took  away  the  things  they 
were  playing  with.  He  told  them  that  it  was  against 
his  conscience  that  they  should  play  while  others 
worked.  If  they  made  the  keeping  of  the  day  a 
matter  of  religion,  let  them  stay  in  their  houses. 
There  should  be  no  merry-making  in  the  streets. 
After  that  time  nothing  of  the  kind  was  tried  again. 


63.  A  Poem  about  my  Son  Samuel's 
Going  to  England 

By  Anne  Bradstreet  (1657) 

Thou  mighty  God  of  sea  and  land 

I  here  resign  into  Thy  hand 

The  son  of  prayers,  of  vows,  of  tears, 

The  child  I  looked  for  many  years. 

Thou  heard'st  me  then  and  gave'st  him  me ; 

Hear  me  again  ;   I  gave  him  Thee. 

He's  mine,  but  more,  O  Lord,  thine  own, 

For  surely  grace  on  him  is  shown. 

No  friend  I  have  like  Thee  to  trust, 

For  mortal  helps  are  brittle  dust. 

Preserve,  O  Lord,  from  storm  and  wrack. 
Protect  him  there  and  bring  him  back. 
And  if  Thou  shalt  spare  me  a  space, 
That  I  again  may  see  his  face 
Then  shall  I  sing  henceforth  Thy  praise 
And  bless  Thee  for  it  all  my  days. 


No.  64] 


Son   Samuel 


183 


64.    On  Samuel's  Return  from 
England 

By  Anne  Bradstreet  (1657) 

All  praise  to  Him  who  hath  now  turned 
My  fears  to  joy,  my  sighs  to  song, 
My  tears  to  smiles,  my  sad  to  glad, 
He's  come  for  whom  I  waited  long. 

Thou  did'st  preserve  him  where  he  went, 
On  raging  seas  did  safely  keep, 
Did'st  that  ship  bring  to  quiet  port, 
While  others  sank  into  the  deep. 

From  dangers  great  Thou  did'st  him  save 
Of  pirates  who  were  near  at  hand  ; 
And  ordered  so  the  adverse  wind 
That  he  before  them  got  to  land. 

On  eagle's  wings  him  hither  brought 
Through  wanton  dangers  manifold  ; 
And  thus  hath  granted  my  request 
That  I  Thy  mercies  might  behold. 

O  help  me  pay  my  vows,  O  Lord, 
That  ever  I  may  thankful  be, 
And  may  put  him  in  mind  of  what 
Thou  did  for  him,  and  so  for  me. 


In  the  years 
when  many 
pirates 
threatened  to 
give  chase 
to  ships 
bound  for 
England  or 
America,  it 
was  a  mo^t 
serious  thing 
to  be  depend- 
ent upon  the 
winds,  as  all 
the  sailing 
vessels  were 


In  both  our  hearts  erect  a  shrine 
Of  duty  and  of  thankfulness. 
That  all  Thy  favors  great  received 
Our  upright  walking  may  express. 


i84 


Little  Folks 


[No.  65 


A  letter 
written  to  the 
Dutch  Com- 
pany which 
had  charge 
of  New 
Netherland, 
from  the 
Manhattans, 
i.e.  the  pres- 
ent city  of 
New  York. 


The  Dutch 
Colonists  at 
first  had  few 
cows. 


Fort  Amster- 
dam on 
Manhattan 
Island,  on  or 
near  the  spot 
now  calif  d 
the  Battery. 
The  settle- 
ment here 
was  begun 
about  the 
year  1613. 


65.    Send  us  More  Children 

By  J.  Alrichs  (1658) 

Honorable,  Worshipful,  Wise,  Prudent  Gentlemen  : 

In  regard  to  the  salt,  which  your  Honors  suppose 
is  quite  plenty  at  the  Manhattans,  you  are  mistaken. 
We  have  only  a  hogshead  and  a  half,  and  can  hardly 
get  any  there  for  money.  Hardly  a  cup  of  salt  can 
be  had  for  extraordinary  occasions  ;  this  causes  great 
discontent  and  uproar.  In  well  regulated  places  it 
happens  that  scarcity  and  want  occur.  Much  more 
is  this  the  case  in  a  colony  far  distant  and  newly 
begun.  Such  a  colony  ought  to  be  provided  for  one 
year  with  whatever  is  not  produced  there  or  procured 
easily  from  others. 

Little  or  no  butter  is  to  be  had  here,  and  less 
cheese.  Whenever  any  one  is  about  to  go  on  a  jour- 
ney he  can  get  hardly  anything  more  than  dry  bread, 
or  he  must  carry  along  a  pot  or  kettles  to  cook  some 
food.  Therefore,  as  a  reminder,  I  say  once  more 
that  it  would  be  well  if  some  rye  meal,  cheese,  and 
such  things  were  sent  in  all  the  ships.  As  horses  are 
required  here  for  agriculture,  means  should  be  found 
of  sending  a  good  supply  of  horses. 

In  regard  to  the  fort,  it  is  in  a  great  state  of  decay. 
I  have  resolved  on  building  a  house  of  planks  about 
fifty  feet  in  length  and  twenty  in  breadth  ;  also  I 
have  had  one-third  of  the  house,  in  which  I  have 
been  lodging  very  uncomfortably,  repaired,  yet  the 
greater  part  of  it  is  still  so  leaky  that  it  is  only  with 
great  difficulty  that  anything  can  be  kept  dry.  We 
shall  be  obliged  to  pull  down  and  rebuild  the  soldiers' 
barracks  immediately. 


no.  65]  Childre?i    Wanted  185 

I  had  expected,  at  least,  a  supply  of  provisions  in 
the  ship  which  had  just  arrived.  There  is  a  set  of 
insolent  fellows  on  board  of  her  who  will  not  turn  a 
hand  to  work  if  there  be  anything  to  do,  and  there 
never  is  any  one  to  be  hired  here  for  such  work. 
Laborers  will  not  stir  for  less  than  a  dollar  a  day. 
Carpenters,  masons  and  other  mechanics  earn  four 
guilders  ;  this  amounts  to  much  in  extensive  works.   A  guilder  = 

There  is  no  reason  or  plea  for  refusing  to  supply  or> 
the  settlers,  who  have  been  here  some  time  from  our 
common  store,  in  exchange  for  their  money.  There 
is  no  merchant's  store  here,  and  scarcely  any  one 
who  has  provisions  for  sale,  for  the  daily  supply  of 
the  inhabitants ;  nay,  not  even  bread,  although  there 
are  over  six  hundred  souls  in  this  place.  Whoever 
has  anything  will  not  sell  it,  and  who  so  has  none,  can- 
not. Things  are  here  in  their  infancy,  and  demand 
time.  Many  who  come  hither  are  as  poor  as  worms 
and  lazy  withal,  and  will  not  work  unless  compelled 
by  necessity. 

Send  in  the  spring,  or  in  the  ships  sailing  in 
December,  a  large  number  of  strong  and  hard  work- 
ing men.  Should  they  not  be  forth  coming  at  the 
right  time,  their  places  can  be  filled  with  boys  of  fif- 
teen, sixteen,  seventeen  years  and  over.  Bear  in 
mind  that  the  boys  be  healthy  and  strong.  What- 
ever is  done  here  must  be  clone  by  labor. 

The  children  sent  over  from  the  almshouse  have 
arrived  safely,  and  were  in  such  demand  that  all  are 
bound  out  among  the  inhabitants  ;  the  oldest  for  two 
years,  most  of  the  others  for  three  years,  and  the 
youngest  for  four  years.  They  are  to  earn  fort}',  That  is, 
sixty,  and  eighty  guilders  during  the  period,  and  at  about  ?8*°° 
the  end  of  the  term,  will   be   fitted   out  in   the  same 


i  86  Little  Folks  [No. ee 

manner  as  they  are  at  present.  Please  to  continue 
sending  others  from  time  to  time  ;  but,  if  possible, 
none  ought  to  come  under  fifteen  years  of  age.  They 
ought  to  be  somewhat  strong,  as  little  profit  is  to  be 
expected  here  without  labor. 

'Tis  as  yet  somewhat  too  soon  to  send  many  women 
or  a  multitude  of  little  children  ;  it  will  be  more 
advisable  and  safer  when  crops  are  gathered,  when 
abundance  prevails,  and  everything  is  cheaper. 

I  might  enlarge  upon  this  account,  but  time  does 
not  permit,  as  the  sloop  by  which  I  send  it,  is  ready 
to  sail. 


66.    A  Sick  Boy  Cured 

By  John  Barnard  (1766) 

It  pleased  God  that  I  should  be  taken  with 
scarlet  fever ;  through  the  raging  of  the  fever,  and  a 
fierce  pain  at  my  heart,  every  breath  I  drew  was  as 
though  a  sword  had  been  run  through  me.  I  was  so 
ill  that  they  thought  I  would  not  live. 

On  the  third  night,  I  think,  it  seemed  to  me  that  a 
certain  woman  came  and  brought  me  some  small 
dark-colored  pills.  She  told  me  to  put  one  in  my 
mouth  and  hold  it  there  till  it  grew  soft.  Then  I  was 
to  squeeze  it  flat  between  my  thumb  and  finger  and 
put  it  on  my  breast. 

It  would  soak  in,  she  said,  and  before  I  had  used 
them  all  so,  I  should  be  well.  I  did  as  I  was  told, 
and  when  I  had  used  the  third  pill,  my  pain  and 
fever  left  me,  and  I  was  well. 

My   tender    father,   very   early  the    next    morning 


no.  66]  Sick  Bov  Cured  187 

came  into  my  bed-room  to  ask  how  I  was.  I  told  him 
I  was  quite  well  and  intended  to  get  up  soon.  I  said 
the  pills  Mrs.  Baird  gave  me  last  night  had  entirely- 
cured  me. 

He  said  to  me  :  "  Child,  I  believe  she  was  not  here  ; 
I  heard  nothing  of  it."  To  satisfy  him  I  said:  "Sir, 
I  have  the  other  four  pills  now  in  my  hand."  I  put 
my  hand  out  of  the  bed  to  show  them,  but  they 
dropped  out  of  my  hand  into  the  bed. 

I  then  raised  myself  up  to  look  for  them  but  could 
not  find  them.  He  said  to  me  :  "  I  am  afraid,  child, 
you  are  out  of  your  senses."  I  said  to  him  :  "  Sir,  I 
am  perfectly  awake  and  in  my  senses,  and  find  myself 
truly  well." 

He  left  the  room,  thinking  I  was  delirious,  and  I 
saw  by  his  face  that  he  feared  I  would  die.  He  then 
asked  of  all  the  house  whether  that  woman  had  been 
at  the  house  the  day  or  evening  before.  They  all  let 
him  know  that  they  had  not  seen  her  here.  He  went 
to  his  own  room,  and  in  about  an  hour  came  to  me 
again. 

I  was  firm  in  the  story  I  had  told  him.  He  talked 
to  me  of  some  other  things  and  found  by  my  answers 
that  I  was  thoroughly  awake.  He  was  better  satis- 
fied, and  left  me  with  a  more  cheerful  face. 

By  noon  I  got  up  and  was  perfectly  well  of  my 
sickness.  I  thought  I  would  have  given  ever  so  much 
to  know  what  the  pills  were,  that  others  might  have 
the  benefit  of  them.  Finding  that  the  woman  had 
not  been  at  our  house,  and  I  was  perfectly  healed,  I 
could  not  help  thinking  that  a  merciful  God  had  sent 
a  good  angel  to  heal  me. 

And  to  this  very  day  I  cannot  but  think  it  was 
more  than   a  common  dream,  or  the  wild  ideas  of  a 


i88 


Little  Folks 


[No.  67 


feverish  mind.     It  seemed  to  me  a  dream  from  God. 
And  what  else  can  you  make  of  it  ? 

Thus  has  God  kindly  helped  me.     Forever  blessed 
be  his  name. 


The  hired 
servants  very 
often  ran 
away,  and 
could  be 
brought  back 
by  force,  if 
their  engage- 
ments had 
not  run  out. 


About  $15. 


67.    Wants  in  New  Jersey 

Advertisements  by  Many  People  (1 700-1 750) 

Wanted  :  —  A  good  schoolmaster  for  children  ; 
one  who  can  teach  reading,  writing,  and  ciphering, 
at  Rariton,  about  six  miles  above  Bound  Brook.  Any 
person  properly  qualified  may  meet  with  good  en- 
couragement by  applying  to 

John   Broughton. 

Ran  away  on  Wednesday,  the  eighth  of  January, 
from  Hartshorne  FitzRandolph,  of  Woodbridge,  in 
the  province  of  East  New  Jersey,  an  Irish  servant 
lad,  name  Michael  Hibbets.  He  is  about  sixteen  or 
seventeen  years  old,  of  a  dark  complexion,  has  dark 
curly  hair,  is  of  middle  size,  and  is  a  chimney  sweeper 
by  trade.  When  he  went  away  he  had  on  an  old 
wide-brimmed  wool  hat,  a  very  ragged  brown  over- 
coat, a  homespun  Kersey  coat  and  jacket,  with  metal 
buttons.  He  wore  leather  breeches,  coarse  yarn 
stockings,  and  shoes  tied  with  leather  strings.  He 
speaks  very  good  English.  He  was  seen  in  New 
York,  and  it  is  thought  that  he  is  in  or  about  that 
city.  It  is  supposed  that  he  has  silver  amounting  to 
three  pounds.  All  masters  of  vessels  are  warned 
against  carrying  him  off.  Whoever  takes  up  this 
servant  and   returns    him  to   his  master  shall  have 


no.  67]  Jf^ants  in  "Jersey  189 

thirty    shillings    reward,  and  all  reasonable  charges 
paid. 

Stolen  from  Thomas  Steeples,  of  Springfield,  New 
Jersey,  on  the  first  day  of  March,  a  white  horse,  of 
low  stature,  well  built  for  strength,  and  short  backed. 
He  has  a  small  head,  little  ears,  two  white  eyes,  one 
whiter  than  the  other,  a  long  mane  on  the  off  side, 
curled  and  trimmed  on  the  other ;  also  a  large  switch 
tail,  and  four  white  hoofs. 

Any  person   bringing  to  me  the  horse   and  rider 
shall  have  five  pounds  reward,  or  for  the  horse  alone,    $25  orsio. 
forty  shillings  reward. 

John,  the  son  of  Peter  Hodgkinson,  a  boy  about  Families 
thirteen  vears  of  age,  was  taken  bv  a   Spanish  pri-   were  often 

•  "     1   •  r  t^    1  f  '  t.,  -i      -,    1     1   •       separated  by 

vateer,  in  his  passage  from   Dublin  to  Philadelphia  captures 
on    board    a    brigantine.      His   father   can  obtain  no   made  by 
satisfactory  account  of  him  at  present.      If  any  per-   p'r' 
son  will  take  care  of  this  boy  if  he  is  on  the  continent 
among    English    inhabitants,  and    send    word  to  his 
father,  in   Burlington,   New  Jersey,   or   conduct   him 
there,  he  shall  receive  five  pounds  for  the  said  boy   S25. 
or  reasonable  satisfaction  for  any  information. 

To-morrow  at  two  o'clock  in  the  afternoon,  at  the 
Fort  there  will  be  exposed  for  sale  at  public  auction 
the  following  goods,  belonging  to  the  estate  of  the 
late  Governor  Montgomery  :  — 

A  fine  yellow  Camblet  bed  lined  with  silk  and 
trimmed  with  lace,  which  came  from  London.  fabric, 

One  fine  field  bedstead  and  curtains.  earners  hair 

Some   blue   cloth    lately    come    from    London    for  now  of  goafs 
liveries,  and  some  broad  gold  lace.  hair,and  f k' 

'  °  or  of  wool 

and  cotton. 


Camblet 
a  woven 


190  Little  Folks  [No.  67 

A  very  fine  medicine  chest,  with  a  great  variety  of 
valuable  medicines. 

A  parcel  of  sweetmeat  and  jelly  glasses. 

A  case  of  twelve  knives  and  twelve  forks  with 
silver  handles. 

A  large  iron  fireplace  and  iron  bars. 

All  to  be  seen  at  the  Fort. 

Pleasant  country  seat,  fit  for  a  gentleman  or  a 
storekeeper,  on  the  Rariton  road,  which  leads  down 
from  Wells  Ferry.  On  it  there  is  a  good  dwelling 
house,  fifty-two  feet  wide  in  front,  and  thirty-two 
feet  wide  in  back.  It  has  an  entrance  ten  feet  long, 
a  parlor  on  each  side,  and  a  room  over  each.  The 
rooms  and  entry  are  wainscotted,  and  have  sash 
windows.  There  is  a  cellar  running  the  whole  length 
and  breadth  of  the  house,  part  of  which  makes  a 
large  kitchen.  The  remainder  may  be  used  as  a 
dairy  and  cellars.  There  is  a  fireplace  in  each 
room. 

There  is  a  barn  sixty  by  thirty  feet.  Besides  this, 
there  is  a  small  dwelling  house  or  shop,  twenty-four 
by  twenty  feet.  All  these  buildings  are  well  shingled 
and  in  very  good  repair. 

The  orchard  is  a  good  one,  containing  about  two 
hundred  apple-trees,  and  may  be  extended  at  pleas- 
ure. There  is  a  very  good  kitchen  garden,  at  the 
back  of  which  is  a  grass  plot,  with  a  prim  hedge 
about  it.  There  are  forty  acres  of  woodland,  a  spring 
of  running  water  near  the  house,  and  a  brook 
whereon  may  be  built  a  grist  mill.  The  cleared  land 
is  well  fenced  and  in  good  condition. 

Whoever  is  inclined  to  purchase  may  apply  to  Dr. 
William  Farquhar  in  New  York,  Benjamin  Franklin 


No.  67 j  Wa?its  in  Jersey  191 

in  Philadelphia,  or  Jacob  Janeway,  who  lives  on  the 
premises. 

This  advertisement  is  to  give  notice  that  on  the 
sixteenth  day  of  July,  1716,  an  Indian  man  named 
Nym  ran  away  from  his  master,  David  Lyell.  Nym 
is  about  twenty-one  years  of  age,  and  is  a  short, 
broad  shouldered  fellow.  His  hair  has  been  cut  off 
lately  and  he  has  a  swelling  on  the  back  of  his  right 
hand.  He  has  with  him  two  new  shirts,  a  new  waist- 
coat and  breeches  of  white  coarse  linen,  a  homespun 
coat,  and  he  wears  a  hat,  shoes,  and  stockings.  It 
is  believed  that  he  is  trying  to  get  on  board  some 
vessel. 

Whoever  brings  the  said  Indian  into  the  Jerseys  to 
his  master  shall  have  forty  shillings. 

On  the  eighteenth  of  September,  there  ran  away 
from  Thomas  Hill  of  Salem,  an  Indian  man  named 
Pompey,  who  was  of  medium  height,  pretty  much 
pox  marked,  and  aged  about  thirty.  He  wears  a 
yellow  coat,  with  horn  buttons,  an  Ozenbridge  shirt,  Ozenbridge, 
and  a  pair  of  white  yarn  stockings.     Pompey  took  usua,'y 

•   ,     1  •  ,  •     ,      ,  1       1  •  1  1  11  ,         spelled  Ozna- 

with  him  a  little  black  pacing  horse,  branded  on  the   brig,  wa 


vas  a 


side  with  the  letters  "  H.  M."  standing  thus   H   M.  ,inen  im; 

.  L  .   .  ported  from 

\\  hoever  takes  up  this  Indian  and   brings  him  to  his  Germany, 
master  shall  receive  a  reasonable  reward. 


192 


Little   Folks 


[No.  68 


This  extract 
describes  life 
in  the  New 
England 
Colonies 
more  than  a 
century  ago. 
Small  clothes 
were 
breeches, 
worn  with 
long  stock- 
ings. 


68.    Young  People's  Life  in  New 
Hampshire 

From  Old  Colony  Memorial  (1765) 

In  general,  men  old  and  young,  who  had  got  their 
growth,  had  a  decent  coat,  vest,  and  small  clothes, 
and  some  kind  of  fur  hat.  These  were  for  holiday 
use  and  would  last  half  a  lifetime.  Old  men  had  a 
great  coat  and  a  pair  of  boots.  The  boots  generally 
lasted  for  life. 

For  common  use  they  had  a  long  jacket,  or  what 
was  called  a  fly  coat,  reaching  down  about  half  way 
to  the  knee.  They  had  a  striped  jacket  to  wear 
under  a  pair  of  small  clothes  like  the  coat.  These 
were  made  of  flannel  cloth. 

They  had  flannel  shirts  and  stockings  and  thick 
leather  shoes.  A  silk  handkerchief  for  holidays  would 
last  ten  years.  In  summer  time  they  had  a  pair  of 
wide  trousers  reaching  half  way  from  the  knee  to 
the  ankle. 

Shoes  and  stockings  were  not  worn  by  the  young 
men.  Few  men  in  farming  business  wore  them  either. 
As  for  boys  as  soon  as  they  were  taken  out  of  petti- 
coats, they  were  put  into  small  clothes  summer  and 
winter.  This  lasted  till  they  put  on  long  trousers 
which  they  called  tongs.  They  were  but  little  differ- 
ent from  the  pantaloons  of  to-day.  These  were  made 
of  linen  or  cotton,  and  soon  were  used  by  old  men 
and  young  through  the  warm  season. 

Later  they  were  made  of  flannel  cloth  and  were 
in  general  use  for  the  winter.      Young  men  never 


no.  es]       New  Hampshire  Life        193 

thought  of  great  coats ;  and  overcoats  were  then 
unknown. 

As  for  the  women,  old  and  young,  they  wore 
flannel  gowns  in  winter.  The  young  women  wore 
wrappers  in  the  summer,  and  about  their  ordinary 
business  they  did  not  wear  stockings  and  shoes. 
They  were  usually  contented  with  one  calico  gown. 
They  generally  had  one  woolen  gown,  and  another 
of  camel's  hair  goods ;  and  some  had  them  made  of 
poplin.  The  sleeves  were  short  and  did  not  come 
below  the  elbow. 

On  holidays  they  wore  one,  two,  or  three  ruffles  on 
each  arm.  They  wore  long  gloves  coming  up  to  the 
elbow,  fastened  by  what  were  called  glove-tightens, 
made  of  black  horse  hair.  They  wore  aprons  made 
of  checked  linen  or  cotton ;  and  for  holiday  use  of 
white  cotton,  lawn,  or  cambric. 

They  seldom  wore  caps  when  about  their  ordinary 
affairs ;  but  they  had  two  kinds.  One  kind  they 
wore  when  they  meant  to  be  much  dressed  up.  One 
was  called  strap-cap  ;  it  came  under  the  chin  ;  the 
other  was  called  round-cord  cap,  and  did  not  come   The  colonials 

Over  the  ears.  knew  nothing 

They  wore  thick  leather,  thin  leather,  and  broad-   °fround 

J  '  dances  — 

cloth  shoes,  all  with  heels  an  inch  and  a  half  high,    their  dances 
These  had  peaked  toes,  turned  up  in  a  point  at  the   %vere  chiefly 

country 

toes.     They  generally  had  small,  very  small  muffs  ;    dances," 
and  some  wore  masks  people  drawn 

„.  .       .       ,  r      ,  up  in  two 

I  he  principal  amusements  01  the  young  men  were   lines,  or  jigs 
wrestling,    running   and   jumping,    or   hopping   three   and  such 
hops.     Dancing  was  considered   an  important  thing  s,mse    „  „ 

r  o  10     dances,  one 

to  know.     Dances  to  step-tunes,  such  as  Old  Father  doing  the 
George,   Cape   Breton,   High    Betty   Martin,   and  the   w°rkafdi 

.  '  .  others  look- 

Rolling  Hornpipe  were  favorites.  ing  on. 

o 


194  Little  Folks  [No.  69 

At  their  parties  dancing  was  their  principal  exer- 
cise ;  they  sang  songs  also,  and  had  a  number  of  for- 
feit plays,  such  as  "breaking  and  setting  the  pope's 
neck"  and  "find  the  button." 

At  the  time  I  speak  of,  a  young  woman  did  not 
think  it  a  hardship  or  a  disgrace  to  walk  five  or  six 
miles  to  a  meeting.  There  was  no  chaise  or  any  sort 
of  wagon  or  sleigh  in  the  town  where  I  lived.  I 
remember  the  first  chaise  that  passed  through  the 
town.     It  caused  the  greatest  possible  wonder. 

Potatoes  were  a  scarce  article  in  those  days. 
Three  bushels  were  thought  a  very  large  crop.  I 
was  quite  a  large  boy  before  I  ever  saw  a  potato  as 
large  as  a  hen's  e§g. 


69.    Colonial  Sundays 

By  Dr.  Abiel  Abbott  (about  17S0) 

This  Sunday  evening  I  will  say  a  word  about  Sun- 
day of  olden  times.  On  Saturday  evening  the  work 
of  the  week  was  finished.  My  father,  after  washing 
and  putting  on  a  skillet  of  water,  would  get  his  razor 
and  soap,  sit  down  by  the  fire  and  shave  off  his 
beard.  Then  he  would  take  his  Bible  and  sometimes 
some  other  book. 

My  mother,  after  washing  the  potatoes  and  other 

vegetables,  and  getting  ready  the  Sunday  food,  used 

Hasty  pud-      to  make  hasty  pudding  for  supper.     This  was  eaten 

ding  =  com     m  m[\]^   or  jf  we  hac[  no  mjik  it  was  eaten  with  but- 

mush. 

ter  and  molasses.     Then  the  little  children,  were  put 
to  bed. 


no.  69]  Colonial  Sundays 


r95 


Early  in  the  evening  my  father  read  a  chapter  in 
the  Bible  and  made  a  prayer.  Soon  after  that  the 
younger  part  of  the  family  and  the  hired  help  went 
to  bed.  Indeed  the  family  every  night  went  to  their 
rest  soon  after  supper,  especially  in  the  summer. 

Saturday  night  and  Sunday  and  Sunday  night, 
there  was  a  perfect  stillness.  No  play  was  going  on, 
and  no  laughing.  Those  of  us  who  were  old  enough 
took  the  Bible  or  learned  a  hymn.     We  read  in  the 


COLONIAL   PEWS. 

testament  or  primer  to  father  or  mother  in  the  morn- 
ing. For  breakfast,  when  we  had  milk  enough,  we 
had  bread  and  milk.  Otherwise  we  had  beans  and 
corn  porridge. 

After  the  war  of  the  Revolution,  tea  and  toast  were 
used  for  Sunday  morning  breakfast.  As  we  lived  at 
a  distance  from  meeting,  those  who  walked  started 
as  early  as  nine  o'clock.  Those  who  went  on  horse 
back  set  out  soon  after. 

The  roads  and  bridges  were  very  bad.     The  horses 


196 


Little  Folks 


[No.  69 


"  The  New 

England 

Primer," 

everywhere 

read  by 

children. 


The  tithing 
man  was  an 
officer  of  the 
church,  who 
kept  order 
during  ser- 
vices, and 
saw  to  it  that 
people  did 
not  stay  away 
without 
reason. 


always  carried  two,  and  often  a  child  in  the  mother's 
lap.  Sometimes  there  was  another  child  on  the  pom- 
mel of  the  saddle  before  the  father.  All  went  to 
meeting,  except  someone  to  keep  the  house  and  to 
take  care  of  the  children  who  could  not  take  care  of 
themselves. 

The  one  who  stayed  at  home  was  told  when  to  put 
the  pork  and  vegetables  into  the  pot  for  the  supper 
which  we  had  after  meeting.  Those  who  went  to 
meeting  used  to  carry  in  their  pockets  some  short 
cake,  or  doughnuts  and  cheese  for  dinner.  We  used 
to  get  home  from  meeting  generally  at  four  o'clock. 

Then  the  women  set  the  table,  and  the  men  took 
care  of  the  horses  and  cattle  in  winter.  After  sup- 
per the  children  and  younger  part  of  the  family  were 
called  together  to  read  in  the  Bible  and  primer  and 
to  sing  some  hymns  and  prayers.  Soon  after  this, 
before  my  father  read  in  the  Bible  and  made  a 
prayer,  the  cows  were  brought  from  the  pasture  and 
milked. 

No  work  was  done  except  what  was  absolutely  nec- 
essary. The  dishes  for  supper  and  breakfast  were 
left  unwashed  till  Monday.  Every  one  in  the  town, 
who  was  able  to  go  to  meeting,  went.  If  any  were 
absent,  it  was  noticed,  and  it  was  supposed  that  sick- 
ness was  the  reason.  If  any  one  was  absent  three 
or  four  Sundays,  the  tithing  man  would  make  him  a 
visit.     But  this  did  not  often  happen. 

Sunday  was  not  unpleasant  to  me.  I  did  not  feel 
gloomy,  or  want  to  play,  or  wish  Sunday  was  gone  or 
would  not  come.  This  was  because  I  was  so  used  to 
its  rules. 


no.  7o]         Franklin's   Whistle  197 

70.    Too  Much  for  the  Whistle 

By  Benjamin  Franklin  (1779) 

I  am  charmed  with  your  description  of  Paradise,   This  piece  is 
and  with  your  plan  of  living  there ;  and  I  approve  Pnnted  In 

*  l  °     .  rr  the  old-fash- 

much  of  your  conclusion,  that,  in  the  mean  time,  we   ioned  style 

should  draw   all  the  good  we  can  from  this  world.   with  italus< 

In  my  opinion,  we  might  draw  more  good  than  we  Franklin 

do,  and  suffer  less  evil,  if  we  would  take  care  and  not  wrote  il- 

to  give  too  much  for  whistles.     For  to  me  it  seems 

that  most  of  the  unhappy  people  we  meet  with  are 

become  so  by  neglect  of  that  caution. 

You  ask  what  I  mean  ?  You  love  stories,  and  will 
excuse  my  telling  one  of  myself. 

When  I  was  a  child  of  seven  years  old,  my  friends, 
on  a  holiday,  filled  my  pockets  with  coppers.  I  went 
directly  to  a  shop  where  they  sold  toys  for  children, 
and  being  charmed  with  the  sound  of  a  whistle,  that 
I  met  by  the  way  in  the  hands  of  another  boy,  I  vol- 
untarily offered  and  gave  all  my  money  for  one. 

I  then  came  home,  and  went  whistling  all  over  the 
house,  much  pleased  with  my  whistle,  but  disturbing 
all  the  family.  My  brothers,  and  sisters,  and  cousins, 
understanding  the  bargain  I  had  made,  told  me  I  had 
given  four  times  as  much  for  it  as  it  was  worth. 
They  put  me  in  mind  what  good  things  I  might  have 
bought  with  the  rest  of  the  money ;  and  laughed  at 
me  so  much  for  my  folly,  that  I  cried  with  vexation. 
The  reflection  gave  me  more  chagrin  than  the  whistle 
gave  me  pleasure. 

This,  however,  was  afterward  of  use  to  me,  the 
impression  continuing  on  my  mind  ;  so  that  often, 
when  I  was  tempted  to  buy  some  unnecessary  thing, 


198 


Little  Folks  [No.  70 


I  said  to  myself,  Don 7  give  too  much  for  the  whistle; 
and  I  saved  my  money. 

As  I  grew  up,  came  into  the  world,  and  observed 
the  actions  of  men,  I  thought  I  met  with  many,  very 
many,  who  gave  too  much  for  the  whistle. 

When  I  saw  one  too  ambitious  of  court  favor,  sac- 
rificing his  time  in  attendance  upon  levees,  his  repose, 
his  liberty,  his  virtue,  and  perhaps  his  friends  to  at- 
tain it,  I  have  said  to  myself,  This  man  gives  too  much 
for  his  whistle. 

When  I  saw  another  fond  of  popularity,  constantly 
employing  himself  in  political  bustles,  neglecting  his 
own  affairs,  and  ruining  them  by  that  neglect,  He 
pays  indeed,  said  I,  too  much  for  his  whistle. 

If  I  knew  a  miser,  who  gave  up  every  kind  of  com- 
fortable living,  all  the  pleasure  of  doing  good  to 
others,  all  the  esteem  of  his  fellow-citizens,  and  the 
joys  of  benevolent  friendship,  for  the  sake  of  accum- 
ulating wealth,  Poor  man,  I  said,  you  pay  too  much 
for  your  whistle. 

When  I  met  with  a  man  of  pleasure,  sacrificing  every 
laudable  improvement  of  the  mind,  or  of  his  fortune, 
to  mere  corporeal  sensations,  and  ruining  his  health 
in  their  pursuit,  Mistaken  man,  said  I,  you  are  provid- 
ing pain \  for  yourself ~  instead  of pleasure  ;  you  give  too 
much  for  your  whistle. 

If  I  see  one  fond  of  appearance,  or  fine  clothes, 
fine  houses,  fine  furniture,  fine  equipages,  all  above 
his  fortune,  for  which  he  contracts  debts,  and  ends 
his  career  in  a  prison,  Alas  !  say  I,  he  has  paid  dear, 
very  dear,  for  his  whistle. 

When  I  see  a  beautiful,  sweet-tempered  girl  married 
to  an  ill-natured  brute  of  a  husband,  What  a  pity,  say 
I,  that  she  should  pay  so  much  for  a  whistle  ! 


no.  7o]         Franklin  s   Whistle 


199 


In  short,  I  conceive  that  great  part  of  the  miseries 
of  mankind  are  brought  upon  them  by  the  false  esti- 
mates they  have  made  of  the  value  of  things,  and  by 
their  giving  too  much  for  their  whistles. 


IK11.M    A    c  11I.11M  \L    I'll    ll'Kl.    K. 


PART    VII 

COLONIAL    SCHOOLS 


71.    Letters  from  a  Father  to  his 
Son 

By  John  Winthrop  (1622) 

"  To  my  beloved  son,  John  Winthrop,  at  the  Col-  This  was 

lege  in  Dublin.  written  by 

&  John  win- 

Dear    Son  :  throP.  later 

Though  I  have  received  no  letters  from  you  yet,  I  ffas^w 
cannot  let  any  chance  pass  without  some  expression  setts,  to  his 
of  my  fatherly  affection,  and  care  for  your  welfare.    son'about 

J  J  '  J  eight  years 

Because  of  this  affection,  I  am  content  to  have  you   before  he 
absent  from  me  at  so  great  a  distance,  for  I  know   came  over  to 

....  America. 

that  God  s  power  and  care  are  alike  in  all  places. 
And  as  for  my  own  comfort,  it  shall  be  in  your  suc- 
cess and  well-doing  wherever  you  may  be. 

Because  I  cannot  so  often  put  you  in  mind  of  those 
things  which  concern  your  good,  as  if  you  were 
nearer  to  me,  you  must  take  the  more  care  to  think 
about  those  teachings  which  I  give  you.  Try,  by  all 
means,  to  keep  in  your  heart  the  fear  of  God.  And 
let  not  the  awful  profaneness  and  contempt  of  un- 
godly men  lessen  the  respectful  and  great  regard  for 
the  Great  King,  which  is  in  your  heart. 


202  Colonial  Schools  [No.  7i 

But  remember  still,  that  the  time  is  at  hand  when 
they  shall  call  the  mountains  to  hide  them  from  the 
face  of  Him  whom  now  they  slight  and  pay  no  atten- 
tion to. 

When  you  write  back,  let  me  know  about  the  state 
of  things  at  your  college.  Tell  me  how  you  like  it. 
And  remember  my  love  to  your  teacher.  Your  grand- 
father, grandmother,  and  mother,  send  blessings  to 
you. 

Your  brothers  and    sisters  are  in  health,   I  thank 
God.     The  Lord  in  mercy,  fill  your  heart  with   his 
goodness.     May  he  keep  you  from  all  evil. 
Your  loving  father, 

John  Winthrop. 

Groton,  Aug.  6,  1622. 

My  Beloved  Son,  — 

I  pray  the  Lord  to  bless  thee  with  goodness  and 
peace.  I  give  him  thanks  for  thy  welfare.  I  hope, 
through  his  goodness,  that  this  sickness  which  is  now 
upon  thee  will  turn  to  thy  health.  I  received  two 
letters  from  you,  written,  I  see,  in  haste.  But  they 
were  welcome  to  me  and  the  rest,  to  your  grand- 
mother and  mother. 

They  all  are  glad  that  you  like  the  college.  I  sent 
you  two  letters  a  good  while  ago.  I  hope  they  will 
reach  you,  though  they  may  be  long  in  going.  The 
further  you  are  from  me,  the  more  careful  I  am  of 
your  welfare,  both  in  body  and  soul.  The  best  way 
to  both  of  these  lies  in  your  own  trying. 

Your  friends  may  pray  for  you  and  advise  you ; 
but  your  own  faithfulness  and  watchfulness  must  be 
added  to  make  you  blessed.     God  has  given  you  a 


No.  71] 


Father  to   St 


on 


203 


large  number  of  outward  good  things.     You  must  try 
to  use  them  carefully. 

Remember   that    your    happiness    is   not    in   food, 
drink,  and  such  things,  but  in  the  favor  of  God  for 


your  part  in  a  better  life.  I 
send  you  the  books  you  wrote 
for.  I  shall  also  send  you 
some  cloth  for  a  gown  and  suit. 

For  a  study  gown,  you  would 
better  buy  some  coarse  Irish 
cloth.  I  shall,  if  God  is  will- 
ing, write  to  you  again  soon. 
Your  grandfather  and  grand- 
mother will  write  to  you  also. 
Your  mother  sends  you  her 
blessings. 

We  are  all  in  health,  I  thank 
God.  Remember  my  love  to 
your  good  teacher.  The  Lord 
in  mercy  bless  and  keep  you, 
and  direct  and  prosper  your 
study. 

Your  loving  father, 

John  Winthrop. 

Groton,  Aug.  31,  1622. 


iW»"Uiiiii<ri[tKTTi! 


Imnopqrjf 

IntDefJame  of  god  tf)c 
j  j?at(jcr,tHe£onne>$flf 
'"  the  $oi(c  <S&o(l:  amea,  0 

I  Or^athet.aljicb  art  in E)ta. 
Ocn,.0alortKD{)e  tftp/iamt! 

'.ttp  tunseora  romr.'Crjp  mil  be 
lone  In  Canli  as 't  is  inpatient 
"Mne  bs  ill  is  Dap  ourDailp  b:caD 

InOfoJB'iwus  ouricefpatfcs.as 
fott  fwciu*  ft)""  'bat  trefpafte 

■-■'..:  l  r.5'''.:;p  o  I  tact  us  not  into 
itmptatton  Out  OtliberbBf  corn 
ibilli/ojtbmeistrjtfunflooiiif, 
jowcr,8tv6  olojifefoj  cber  Smnv 


A    H<>KN    BOOK. 


72.     Letters  from  a  Son  to  a  Father 

By  Forth  Winthrop  (1622) 

Most  Loving  Father,  — ■ 

I  laving  such  a  chance  as  the  coming  down  of  my   This  is  a 
room    fellow,   Thomas    Archisden,    I    thought    good,    m,m  y 


204 


Colonial  Schools 


[No.  72 


letter  —  loves 
his  father, 
means  to  do 
right,  and 
wants  some 
new  clothes. 


though  in  some  haste,  to  write  to  you.  I  hope  you 
are  all  in  health  as  I  am  here,  blessed  be  God  Al- 
mighty. 

I  humbly  pray  him  to  help  me  by  his  holy  spirit  to 
keep  in  the  way  of  goodness  and  to  escape  the  poi- 
sonous sins  of  these  evil  times.  I  was  once  entangled 
in  such  sins,  but  I  hope  by  the  good  spirit  of  God  to 
avoid  them  more  and  more. 

My  teacher  sent  down  a  letter  to  you  some  time 
ago  by  Deverux.  I  did  not  know  about  it.  Now  I 
have  heard  that  he  forgot  to  deliver  it.  I  wish  you 
to  send  word  whether  you  got  it,  for  that  Deverux, 
as  I  am  told,  takes  in  hand  letters  to  deliver  and 
then  opens  them  and  does  not  send  them. 

I  suppose  you  have  heard  our  college  news  about 
the  change  in  the  rules  of  the  library.  The  duke  is 
about  to  come  to  the  college.  If  you  have  not  heard 
all  this,  Tom  Ark.  can  tell  you  when  he  sees  you. 

I  remember  my  duty  to  yourself  and  my  mother,  and 
I  send  love  to  the  rest  of  my  friends.      I  wish  always 
to  have  your  prayers  and  blessings.     In  haste,  I  am, 
Your  dutiful  and  obedient  son, 

F.  Winthrop. 


I  wish  you  to  send  me  the  shoes  of  which  I  wrote 
you.  I  have  need  of  some  clothes,  for  these  are 
worn  out.  I  ask  you  to  send  me,  sometime  when  it 
seems  best,  some  stuff  to  make  me  clothes.  Or  do 
as  you  think  right  about  this. 


no.  73]        A  Learned  W^oman         205 


73.      A     Puritan's    Objection    to 
Women's  Education 

By  General  John  Winthrop  (1645) 

Mr.  Hopkins,  the  governor  of  Hartford  upon  Con- 
necticut, came  to  Boston  and  brought  his  wife  with 
him  (a  godly  young  woman,  and  of  special  parts), 
who  was  fallen  into  a  sad  infirmity,  the  loss  of  her 
understanding  and  reason,  which  had  been  growing 
upon  her  divers  years,  by 
occasion  of  her  giving  herself 
wholly  to  reading  and  writ- 
ing ;  and  she  had  written 
many  books.  Her  husband 
being  very  loving  and  tender 
of  her,  was  loath  to  grieve 
her ;  but  he  saw  his  error 
when  it  was  too  late.  For 
if  she  had  attended  to  her 
household  affairs,  and  such 
things  as  belong  to  women, 
and  had  not  gone  out  of  her 
way  to  meddle  in  such  things 
as  are  proper  for  men,  whose 
minds  are  stronger  &c.  she 
had  kept  her  wits  and  might 
have  improved  them  usefully 
and  honorably  in  the  place 
God  had  set  her.  He  brought 
her  to  Boston  and  left  her  with  her  brother,  one  Mr. 
Yale,  a  merchant,  to  try  what  means  might  be  had 
for  her.     But  no  help  could  be  had. 


We  know 
now  that 
girls  can  be 
educated 
without 
learning  to 
neglect  their 
household 
affairs. 


L3B» 


KEY" 


gggygcg 


A    SAMPLER. 


2o6 


Colonial  Schools 


[No.  74 


74.     Rules  of  Dorchester  Schools 

By  the  Town  of  Dorchester  (1641) 

The  schoolmaster  shall  faithfully  attend  his  school 
and  do  his  best  to  benefit  his  scholars.     In  this  he  is 
to  use  his  best  judgment,  and  not  remain  away  from 
school  unless  necessary.     This  would  be  to  the  dis- 
advantage     of      his 


Qcfmruvvf/L,  ^ws^i^ /&** 


^Hl^n^^Ci, 


J3 


/2 


scholars    and    would 
hinder  their  learning. 
From    the    begin- 
ning    of      the     first 
ff  month  until  the  end 

of  the  seventh,  he 
shall  begin  to  teach 
every  day  at  seven 
of  the  clock  in  the 
morning.  For  the 
other  five  months  he 
shall  begin  every  day 
f^.  at  eight  of  the  clock 
in  the  morning  and 
end  at  four  in  the 
afternoon. 

Every  day  in    the 

year  the  usual  time 

for  dismissing  at  noon 

shall  be  at  eleven  ;  to 

begin  again  at  one. 

But  every  second  day  of  the  week,  he  shall  call  his 

scholars  together  between  twelve  and  one  of  the  clock 

to  examine  them.     This  is  to  find  out  what  they  have 

learned  the  Sabbath  day  before.    At  this  time  he  shall 


c^Te^y  J&rtC  Jlf    c^^-i^  /77& 


r, yy  /     -«--S 

COLONIAL   HANDWRITING. 


No.  74] 


Good  Rllh 


uies 


207 


take  notice  of  any  wrong-doing  or  disorder  that  any 
of  his  scholars  have  committed  on  the  Sabbath. 

Then  at  some  suitable  time  he  shall  instruct  them 
how  they  must  do  at  another  time.  Or  he  may  pun- 
ish them  if  the  offence  shall  require  it. 

He  shall  equally  and  impartially  teach  such  as  are 
placed  in  his  care.  No  matter  whether  their  parents 
be  poor  or  rich,  he  shall  not  refuse  any  who  have  a 
right  and  interest  in  the  school. 

Such  as  are  placed  in  his  care  he  shall  faithfully 
teach  both  in  the  regular  school  studies  and  also  in 
points  of  good  manners.  He  shall  teach  them  dutiful 
behavior  to  all,  especially  those  who  are  their  superiors. 

Every  sixth  day  of  the  week  he  shall  question  his 
scholars  in  the  principles  of  Christian  religion. 

All  men's  efforts,  without  the  blessing  of  God  must 
be  fruitless  and  unsuccessful.  Therefore  it  is  to  be 
a  chief  part  of  the  schoolmaster's  duty  to  commend 
his  scholars  and  his  work  to  God  in  prayer.  This  he 
shall  do  morning  and  evening,  taking  care  that  his 
scholars  do  devoutly  listen  during  the  prayer. 

The  rod  of  correction  is  a  rule  of  God  necessary 
sometimes  to  be  used  upon  children.  It  may  easily 
be  abused  by  too  much  severity  or  too  much  kindness. 
The  schoolmaster  shall  have  full  power  to  punish  all 
or  any  of  his  scholars,  no  matter  who  they  are. 

He  shall  do  as  the  offence  seems  to  require.  All 
his  scholars  must  be  subject  to  this  rule.  No  parent 
or  other  person  living  in  the  place  shall  go  about  to 
hinder  the  master  in  this. 

But  if  any  parent  or  others  shall  think  there  is  just 
cause  for  complaint  against  the  master  for  too  much 
severity,  they  shall  have  liberty  to  tell  him  so  in 
friendly  and  loving  way. 


This  warning 
was  neces- 
sary in  a 
century  when 
the  richer 
and  more 
influential 
men  were 
always  given 
the  better 
places. 
That  is,  every 
Saturday. 


At  that  time 
parents  and 
teachers  fre- 
quently 
whipped 
their  children 
with  rods. 


208 


Colonial  Schools 


[No.  75 


Harvard 
College  was 
for  more  than 
a  century 
the  only  col- 
lege in  the 
English 
Colonies. 


Until  two 
centuries 
later  the  cost 
of  broken 


75.    Strict  Rules  for  College  Stu- 
dents 

By  Harvard  College  (1660) 

1.  It  is  hereby  ordered  that  the  president  and  fel- 
lows of  Harvard  College  have  the  power  to  punish  all 
misdeeds  of  the  young  men  in  their  college.  They 
are  to  use  their  best  judgment  and  punish  by  fines  or 
whipping  in  the  hall  publicly,  as  the  nature  of  the 
offence  shall  call  for. 

2.  No  student  shall  live  or  board  in  the  family  or 
private  house  of  any  person  in  Cambridge  without 
permission  from  the  president  and  his  teachers.  And 
if  any  shall  have  leave  to  do  so,  yet  they  shall  attend 
all  college  exercises  both  for  religion  and  schooling. 

They  shall  also  be  under  college  rules,  and  do  as 
others  ought  to  do.  In  case  any  student  shall  be  and 
live  in  town  out  of  the  college  grounds,  more  than 
one  month  or  several  times,  without  permission,  he 
shall  afterwards  be  looked  upon  as  no  member  of  the 
college. 

3.  Former  orders  have  not  prevented  unnecessary 
damage  to  the  college,  by  the  roughness  and  careless- 
ness of  certain  students.  Yet  for  their  benefit  a  great 
amount  of  money  has  been  spent  on  these  things. 

It  is  therefore  ordered  that  hereafter  all  possible 
care  shall  be  taken  to  prevent  such  injury  to  things. 
And  when  any  damage  shall  be  found  done  to  any 
study  room  or  other  room  used,  the  person  or  persons 
living  in  it  shall  pay  for  this. 

And  where  any  damage  shall  be  done  to  any  part 
of  the  college  building  (except  by  the  act  of  God), 
this  shall  be  made  good  or  paid  for  by  all  the  students 


No.  75] 


College  Rules 


209 


living  in  the  college  at  the  time  when  such  damage  windows  was 
shall  be  done  or  found  to  be  done.     This  means  dam-  assessedon 

all  the 

age  to  any  empty  room,  the  college  fences,  pump,  students, 
bell,  clock,  etc. 

But  if  the  person  or  persons  that  did  these  things 
be  discovered,  he  or  they  shall  make  good  the  dam- 
age. He  or  they  shall  also  be  in  danger  of  further 
punishment  and  fines  for  such  misconduct. 

If  any  student  shall  take  any  study  room  for  his 
use  he  shall  pay  the  rent  of  it  for  a  whole  year, 
whether  he  live  in  it  so  long  or  not.  He  shall  be 
under  promise  to  leave  the  room  in  as  good  condition 
as  he  found  it  when  he  first  came  into  it. 

Parents  are  greatly  annoyed  by  reason  of  ill-treat-  This  shows 
ment  put  upon  their  children  when  they  first  come   thathazing 

1  1  J  existed  two 

to  college.     This  is  because  the  older  students  send  hundred  and 
them  upon  their  own  private  errands.    For  the  future  fortyyears 
great  care  shall  be  taken  to  prevent  this  same  thing. 

All  doings  of  this  kind  shall  be  severely  punished, 
by  a  fine  paid  by  such  persons  as  shall  do  so.  Or 
they  shall  receive  bodily  punishment  if  it  is  consid- 
ered best. 

4.    M ,  H ,  and  W were  expelled  from 

college  and  their  names  cut  out  of  the  tables  in  the 
dining  room.  By  order  of  the  president  of  the  col- 
lege, this  was  done  before  all  the  fellows  interested. 
It  was  because  of  the  disorder  and  bad  actions  of 
these  three  young  men  toward  Andrew  Belcher. 
They  killed  Grandma  Sell's  dog  and  stole  ropes  with 
which  to  hang  him.  They  hung  him  upon  a  sign- 
post at  night,  as  one  of  them  afterwards  confessed 
before  the  college  authorities  and  before  his  com- 
panions. And  at  the  time  it  was  not  denied  in 
any  way ;  but  two  of  the  students  afterwards  got 
i' 


ago. 


2  i  o  Colonial  Schools  [No.  7e 

the  third  one  to  say  that  after  all  what  he  had 
related  was  not  true.  Many  great  lies  were  told 
by  all  of  them,  and  especially  by  one.  And  there 
were  many  reasons  for  the  belief  that  they  committed 
these  crimes. 


76.     Benjamin  Franklin's  Boyhood 

By  Benjamin  Franklin  (1706) 

I  was  the  youngest  son  of  my  father,  Josiah  Frank- 
lin, and  was  born  in  Boston,  New  England.  My 
father  had  in  all  seventeen  children  ;  of  which  I  re- 
member thirteen  sitting  at  once  at  his  table. 

I  was  put  to  the  grammar  school  at  eight  years  of 
age,  my  father  intending  as  an  offering  to  God,  to 
make  me  a  minister  of  the  church.  My  readiness 
in  learning  to  read  must  have  been  very  early  as  I 
do  not  remember  when  I  could  not  read.  Later  my 
father  sent  me  to  a  school  for  writing  and  arithmetic. 
I  learned  good  writing  pretty  soon  but  I  failed  in  the 
arithmetic.  At  ten  years  of  age  I  was  taken  home 
to  help  my  father  in  his  business. 

He  was  a  tallow-candle-maker  and  soap-boiler.  He 
was  not  brought  up  to  follow  this  business.  He  had 
gone  into  J ;  when  he  came  to  New  England  ;  for  he 
found  his  dyeing  trade  would  not  support  his  family. 

So  I  was  at  work  cutting  wick  for  the  candles,  fill- 
ing the  moulds  for  dipping  the  candles,  keeping  the 
shop,  and  going  on  errands.  I  disliked  the  business. 
I  had  a  strong  desire  to  go  to  sea ;  but  my  father 
declared  against  it. 

Living  near  the  water,  I  was  much  in  and  about  it. 
I  learned  early  to  swim  well  and  to  manage  boats. 


No.  76] 


Ben  Franklin 


211 


And  when  in  a  boat  or  canoe  with  other  boys,  I  was 
generally  allowed  to  manage  things,  especially  in  any 
case  of  danger. 

Upon  other  occasions  I  was  generally  a  leader 
among  the  boys.  Sometimes  I  led  them  into  scrapes. 
I  will  tell  of  one  such  time. 

There  was  a  salt  marsh  on  one  side  of  the  mill 
pond.      On  the  edge  of  this,  at  high  water,  we  used 
to  stand  to  fish  for 
minnows.  By  much 
trampling   we  had 
made     it    a    mere 
quagmire.  My  plan 
was      to     build     a 
wharf  there  fit  for 
us  to  stand  upon  ; 
and  I   showed   my 
comrades    a    large 
heap       of      stones 
which  were  intended  for  a  new  house  near  the  marsh. 
These  would  very  well  suit  our  purpose. 

So,  in  the  evening,  when  the  workmen  were  gone, 
I  gathered  together  a  number  of  my  playfellows ;  we 
worked  very  hard,  like  so  many  ants.  Sometimes  two 
or  three  of  us  were  needed  for  one  stone.  Finally 
wc  brought  thorn  all  away  and  built  our  little  wharf. 

The  next  morning  the  workmen  were  surprised  at 
missing  the  stones,  which  were  found  in  our  wharf. 
They  began  to  ask  who  moved  them.  We  were 
found  out  and  complaint  was  made.  Several  of  us 
were  punished  by  our  fathers.  And  although  I  said 
for  excuse  that  it  was  a  useful  kind  of  work,  my 
father  convinced  me  that  nothing  was  useful  which 
was  not  honest. 


A  school-boy's  trunk. 


212  Colonial  Schools  [No.  7e 

My  father  was  often  visited  by  leading  people,  who 
asked  his  opinion  in  affairs  of  the  town  or  of  the 
church  to  which  he  belonged.  They  showed  a  good 
deal  of  respect  for  his  judgement  and  advice.  He 
liked  to  have  some  sensible  friend  or  neighbor  to 
talk  with  him  at  his  table.  He  always  took  care  to 
start  some  useful  subject  for  conversation,  which 
might  help  to  improve  the  minds  of  his  children. 
By  this  means  he  turned  our  attention  to  what  was 
good,  just,  and  wise  in  the  affairs  of  life. 

Little  or  no  notice  was  ever  taken  of  the  food  on 
the  table.  If  it  was  well  or  poorly  prepared,  in  or 
out  of  season,  of  good  or  bad  flavor,  better  or  worse 
than  some  other  thing  of  the  kind,  we  did  not  discuss 
it.  I  was  brought  up  to  pay  so  little  attention  to 
these  things,  that  I  cared  little  what  kind  of  food  was 
set  before  me.  To  this  day,  if  I  am  asked,  I  can 
hardly  tell  a  few  hours  after  dinner  what  I  had  to  eat. 

This  has  been  a  great  convenience  to  me  in  travel- 
ling. When  my  companions  have  been  very  unhappy 
sometimes  for  want  of  what  would  suit  their  more 
delicate  tastes  I  have  been  satisfied. 

I  never  knew  my  father  or  my  mother  to  have  any 
sickness  but  that  of  which  they  died,  he  at  89  and 
she  at  85  years  of  age.  They  lie  buried  together 
at  Boston,  where  I  some  years  ago  placed  a  tomb- 
stone over  their  grave. 

From  a  child  I  was  ever  fond  of  reading,  and  all 
the  little  money  that  came  into  my  hands  was  ever 
laid  out  in  books.  My  father's  little  library  was 
chiefly  of  books  on  religious  discussions,  most  of 
which  I  read. 

I  have  since  often  been  sorry  that,  at  a  time  when 
I  had  such  a  thirst  for  knowledge,  more  proper  books 


No.   76] 


Be?i  Franklin 


213 


had  not  fallen  in  my  way,  since  it  was  later  decided 
I  should  not  be  a  minister. 

My  taste  for  books  at  last  caused  my  father  to 
make  me  a  printer.  I  like  it  much  better  than  my 
father's  business,  but  I  still  had  a  hankering  for  the 
sea.  To  prevent  this  my  father  was  in  haste  to  have 
me  bound  to  my  brother  as  an  apprentice  in  the 
printing  business. 


ttiiiiiiiiii  miiin'iin n  1 1 1 1 1 . 1 , 1  ■  1 1 1  j  m  1 1 1 1 1 1  ■  ■  M 


As  runs  the  Glafs, 
Oui  Life  doth  pafs. 


My  Book  and  Heart 
Muft  never  pan. 


Jet  feels  the  Rod, 
Yet  blefles  GOD. 


Proud  Rrrah'sTroop 
Wm  fwallow'd  up. 

Lot  fled  to  Ztar, 
Saw  6ery  Showed 
OnScifeTTi  pour. 

Mo/it  was  ht  '-'. 

Who  ljratH  Hoft 
Led  thro' the  Sea.     ' 


nmmimimi ■miiuiiw 

Neab  did  view 
Theold  worlds  new. 


Young  OtadUii 
DavitL,Jefuu, 
All  were  ploui, 

Peter  den/d 

His  Lord  tnd  cry'd. 

Queen  Efthtr  -Cues, 
And  fa?es  thejewt, 

Young  pious  Ruth, 
Left  all  for  Truth. 


Young  Samuil  AtiXy 
The  Lord  did  fear. 


imiiiimiUiTHimmiiiiiiiiiimr 


THE   NEW   ENGLAND   PRIMER. 


I  now  had  a  chance  to  read  better  books.  Know- 
ing the  apprentices  of  book-sellers  enabled  me  some- 
times to  borrow  a  small  one  which  I  was  careful  to 
return  clean.  Often  I  sat  up  in  my  room  reading 
the  greatest  part  of  the  night,  when  the  book  was 
borrowed  in  the  evening  and  had  to  be  returned  early 
in  the  morning. 

After  some  time,  Mr.  Matthew  Adams,  who  had  a 


214  Colonial  Schools  [No.  77 

pretty  collection  of  books,  took  notice  of  me,  invited 
me  to  his  library,  and  very  kindly  lent  me  such  books 
as  I  chose  to  read. 


77.  School  Days  and  School  Fights 

By  John  Barnard  (1687-1700) 

I,  John  Barnard,  was  born  at  Boston,  November 
6,  1 68 1.  My  parents  were  respectable  and  very 
pious  and  charitable.  In  the  spring  of  my  eighth 
year  I  was  sent  to  the  grammar  school. 

My  master  was  the  aged  and  famous  Mr.  Ezekiel 
Cheever,  and  well  he  merited  the  fame  so  heartily 
given  him.     I  have  many  interesting  memories  of  him. 

He  placed  me  in  the  lowest  class,  but  finding  that 
I  soon  read  through  my  books,  he  put  me,  after  a 
few  weeks,  into  a  higher  class,  and  the  next  year 
made  me  the  head  of  it. 

Although  my  master  put  me  in  a  higher  class,  I 
was  a  very  naughty  boy,  much  given  to  play.  So  at 
last  he  said  before  all :  "  You,  Barnard,  I  know  you 
can  do  well  enough  if  you  will.  But  you  are  so  full 
of  play  that  you  hinder  your  classmates  from  getting 
their  lessons.  Therefore,  if  any  of  them  cannot  say 
their  lessons  I  shall  correct  you  for  it." 

One  unlucky  day,  one  of  my  classmates  did  not 
look  into  his  book,  so  he  could  not  say  his  lesson, 
although  I  had  once  and  again  told  him  to  mind  his 
book.  Therefore,  my  master  beat  me.  I  told  my 
master  the  reason  why  he  could  not  say  his  lesson 
was  his  saying  that  he  would  beat  me  if  any  of  the 
class  could  not  do  their  part  in  lessons.     Ever  since 


no.  77]  Discipline  215 

he  said  that  this  boy  would  not  look  into  his  book, 
though  I  told  him  to  mind  his  book  as  the  class  could 
prove. 

The  boy  was  pleased  with  my  being  punished  and 
kept  on  failing  in  his  lessons.  For  this  I  was  still 
punished,  and  so  for  several  days.  I  thought  in  jus- 
tice I  ought  to  punish  the  boy,  and  make  him  do 
better. 

So,  after  school  was  done,  I  went  up  to  him  and 
told  him  I  had  been  beaten  several  times  for  his  fail- 
ures. I  told  him  that  since  the  master  would  not 
punish  him  I  would,  and  I  should  do  so  as  often  as 
I  was  punished  for  him.  Then  I  drubbed  him  well. 
The  boy  never  came  to  school  any  more.  And  so 
that  unfortunate  matter  ended. 

Though  I  was  often  beaten  for  my  play,  and  my 
little  roguish  tricks,  yet  I  don't  remember  that  I  was 
ever  beaten  for  my  lessons  more  than  once  or  twice. 

Once,  in  a  Latin  lesson,  my  master  found  fault 
with  the  way  I  used  a  word.  It  was  not  used  so  by 
me,  carelessly,  but  on  purpose.  So  I  told  him  there 
was  a  plain  grammar  rule  for  it.  He  angrily  replied 
there  was  no  such  rule.  I  took  the  grammar  and 
showed  the  rule  to  him.  Then  he  smilingly  said, 
"Thou  art  a  brave  boy.  I  had  forgotten  it."  And 
no  wonder ;  for  he  was  then  more  than  eighty  years 
old. 


2  1 6  Colonial  Schools  [No.  7» 

78.    Indian  Students  at  William 
and  Mary  College 

By  Governor  Spotswooo  (1711-1712) 

Virginia,  Nov.  ii,  1711. 
To  my  Lord  Dartmouth,  — 
My  Lord  : 

I  have  given  your  lordship  an  account  of  my 
intention  to  meet  and  treat  with  the  Tuscarora  Ind- 
ians for  securing  the  peace  of  this  colony  and  pun- 
ishing the  Indians  who  had  part  in  the  recent  savage 
massacre. 

My  messenger  is  returned.  He  brought  with  him 
five  of  the  chief  men  of  that  nation  to  represent  the 
rest.  These  chiefs  came  at  a  very  good  time,  just 
as  I  had  brought  into  view  a  body  of  militia  consist- 
ing of  about  sixteen  hundred  men.  So  great  an 
appearance  of  armed  men  in  such  good  order  very 
much  surprised  them. 

It  gave  them  a  better  opinion  of  the  strength  of 
this  government  than  they  before  had.  I  thought 
this  a  good  time  to  let  them  know  what  I  expected 
of  their  nation  if  they  wished  to  keep  our 'friendship. 

I  told  them  that  either  they  must  themselves  carry 
on  a  war  with  our  Indian  foes  or  help  us  to  destroy 
them.  And  that  we  might  be  the  better  assured  of 
their  friendship  I  proposed  that  two  of  the  sons  of 
the  chief  men  in  each  of  their  towns  should  be  edu- 
cated at  our  college.  These  sons  were  to  be  sent  to 
our  government  as  hostages. 

The  king  of  the  Nausemonds  has  sent  his  son  and 
cousin.     The    Nottaways  and  Meherrins  have  each 


no.  78]  Indian   Students  217 

sent  two  of  their  chief  men's  sons  to  the  college. 
They  have  consented  for  them  to  be  brought  up  in 
the  Christian  religion. 

To  encourage  them  I  have  taken  care  to  have  them 
well  clothed  and  kindly  treated.  The  queen  of  Pa- 
munkey,  upon  seeing  their  good  treatment  has  also 
promised  that  her  son  and  one  of  the  sons  of  a  chief 
in  her  nation,  shall  soon  be  sent.  I  expect  one  from 
the  Chickahominys. 

That  they  shall  no  longer  pay  tribute  of  skins  is 
one  of  the  conditions  upon  which  they  send  their 
children  to  the  college.  It  was  as  much  with  an 
intention  to  bring  the  Indians  to  accept  Christianity, 
as  to  secure  their  friendship  to  the  government,  that 
I  pioposed  to  have  their  children  here. 

There  are  now  about  twenty-five  Indian  children 
at  the  college.  They  have  a  master  to  teach  them, 
and  are  decently  clothed  and  cared  for ;  so  that  they 
seem  very  well  pleased.  So  also  are  their  parents, 
and  others  of  their  nations,  who  come  often  to  see 
them. 

These  Indians  express  much  satisfaction  at  the 
treatment  which  is  given  to  their  children.  They 
often  grieve  that  they  were  not  so  fortunate  as  to 
have  such  advantages  in  their  young  days. 

Among  the  Indian  children  now  at  the  college 
there  are  several  that  can  read  and  write  quite  well. 
They  can  repeat  the  church  catechism  and  know  how 
to  take  part  in  the  service  at  church.  Both  the  boys 
and  the  parents  show  a  great  desire  that  they  should 
receive  baptism. 


2l8 


Colonial  Schools 


[No.  70 


A  French 
book. 


79.    A  Philadelphia  School-Boy 

By  Alexander  Grayden  (i  760-1 766) 

When  I  was  about  eight  years  of  age,  it  was  deemed 
expedient  to  enter  me  at  the  academy,  and  I  was 
accordingly  introduced  by  my  father  to  Mr.  Kinnes- 

ley,  the  teacher  of  Eng- 
lish and  professor  of 
oratory.  The  task  of 
the  younger  boys,  at 
least,  consisted  in  learn- 
ing to  read  and  to  write 
their  mother  tongue 
grammatically  ;  and  one 
day  in  the  week,  I  think 
Friday,  was  set  apart 
for  the  recitation  of  se- 
lect passages  in  poetry 
and  prose. 

For  this  purpose,  each 
scholar,  in  his  turn,  as- 
cended the  stage,  and 
said  his  speech,  as  the 
phrase  was.  This  speech 
was  carefully  taught  him 
by  his  master,  both  with 
respect  to  its  pronunci- 
ation, and  the  action 
deemed  suitable  to  its 
several  parts.  More 
profit  attended  my  reading.  After  ^sop's  fables, 
and  an  abridgement  of  the  Roman  history,  Telema- 
chus  was  put  into  our  hands ;  and  if  it  be  admitted 


IN    SCHOOL. 


no.  79]  Philadelphia  219 

that  the  human  heart  may  be  bettered  by  instruction, 
mine,  I  may  aver,  was  benefited  by  this  work  of  the 
virtuous  Fenelon. 

A  few  days  after  I  had  been  put  under  the  care 
of  Mr.  Kinnersley,  I  was  told  by  my  class  mates, 
that  it  was  necessary  for  me  to  fight  a  battle  with 
some  one,  in  order  to  establish  my  claim  to  the  honor 
of  being  an  academy  boy-  I  found  that  the  place  of 
battle  was  fixed,  and  that  a  certain  John  Appowen, 
a  lad  who  was  better  set  and  older  than  myself, 
though  not  quite  so  tall,  was  pitted  against  me.  A 
combat  immediately  began  between  Appowen  and 
myself,  which  for  some  time  was  maintained  on  each 
side  with  equal  vigor  and  determination,  when  un- 
luckily, I  received  his  fist  directly  in  my  gullet.  The 
blow  for  a  time  depriving  me  of  breath  and  the  power 
of  resistance,  the  victory  was  declared  for  my  adver- 
sary, though  not  without  the  acknowledgment  of  the 
party,  that  I  had  at  least  behaved  well,  and  shown 
myself  not  unworthy  of  the  name  of  an  academy 
boy. 

I  have  said  that  I  was  about  to  enter  the  Latin 
School.  The  person  whose  pupil  I  was  consequently 
to  become,  was  Mr.  John  Beveridge,  a  native  of  Scot- 
land, who  retained  the  smack  of  his  mother  tongue 
in  its  primitive  purity.  His  acquaintance  with  the 
language  which  he  taught,  was,  I  believe,  justly 
deemed  to  be  very  accurate  and  profound.  But  as  to 
his  other  acquirements,  after  excepting  the  game  of 
backgammon, .  in  which  he  was  said  to  excel,  truth 
will  not  warrant  me  in  saying  a  great  deal.  He  was, 
however,  diligent  and  laborious  in  his  attention  to  his 
school;  and  if  he  had  possessed  the  faculty  of  mak- 
ing himself  beloved   by  the  scholars,  anil  of  exciting 


2  2  o  Colonial  Schools  [No.  so 

their  emulation  and  exertion,  nothing  would  have 
been  wanting  in  him  to  an  entire  qualification  for  his 
office.  But  unfortunately,  he  had  no  dignity  of  char- 
acter, and  was  no  less  destitute  of  the  art  of  making 
himself  respected  than  beloved.  Though  not  per- 
haps intolerably  severe,  he  made  a  pretty  free  use  of 
the  rattan  and  the  ferule,  but  to  very  little  purpose. 
Very  few  As  my  evil  star  would  have  it,   I  was  thoroughly 

boys  of  four-    ^jrecj   0f   books   and   confinement,    and    my   mother's 

teen  nowa-  .  J 

days  have  advice  and  even  entreaties  were  overruled  by  my 
read  these  extreme  repugnance  to  a  longer  continuance  in  the 
authors.  school.     So,  to  my  lasting  regret,  I  bid  it  adieu  when 

a  little  turned  of  fourteen,  at  the  very  season  when 
the  minds  of  the  studious  begin  to  profit  by  instruc- 
tion. We  were  at  this  time  reading  Horace  and 
Cicero,  having  passed  through  Ovid,  Virgil,  Caesar, 
and  Sallust. 


80.    A  Word  about  Schools 

By  Dr.  Abel  Abbot  (about  1780) 

A  word  about  schools.  These  were  poor  enough. 
We  used  to  read,  spell,  write,  and  do  numbers. 
The  primer,  spelling  book,  and  the  Bible  were  the 
books.  My  father  became  aware  that  the  schools 
were  useless  and  hired  Mr.  John  Abbott,  who  was 
then  in  college,  to  teach  a  month  in  his  vacation.  He 
then  invited  other  people  to  send  their  children  free. 

This  made  the  schools  there  of  a  different  sort. 
For  a  number  of  years  after  this  good  teachers  were 
hired  for  about  eight  weeks  in  the  winter.  They 
were  usually  students  from  college.  Other  places 
then  began  to  have  as  good  schools. 


no.  so]  '  Plain   Fare  221 

I  respect  my  father  and  mother  deeply  for  their 
anxiety  and  sacrifices  to  give  their  children  the  best 
education  possible.  Their  children,  grandchildren, 
and  so  on  to  the  twentieth  generation  will  have  reason 
to  bless  the  memory  of  parents  of  such  true  worth. 

Now  for  something  else.  For  breakfast  in  olden 
times  there  was  bread  and  milk,  as  soon  as  the  cows 
were  milked.  About  nine  o'clock  there  was  a  lunch- 
eon of  bread  and  cheese,  or  fried  pork  and  potatoes. 

For  dinner  we  had  a  good  Indian  pudding.  Often 
there  were  blue-berries  or  suet  in  it.  We  had  also  for 
dinner  pork  and  beef,  through  the  winter  and  spring, 
besides  potatoes,  turnips,  and  cabbage. 

At  four  or  five  o'clock  in  the  summer  evenings,  we 
had  some  bread  and  cheese  or  the  like.  For  supper 
we  had  bread  and  milk. 

When  there  was  company  chocolate  was  used  for 
breakfast,  but  no  coffee.  Pewter  basins  and  some- 
times wooden  bowls  were  used.  Wooden  plates  were 
used  for  dinner.  When  a  friend  dined  pewter  plates 
and  spoons  were  used  by  father,  mother,  and  the 
friend. 

I  do  not  think  that  swearing  was  ever  heard  in  the 
town  until  after  the  Revolution.  I  do  not  remember 
seeing  my  father  or  mother  angry  ;  but  they  were 
sometimes  displeased  no  doubt.  I  do  not  remember 
more  than  one  man  being  drunk. 

Rum  was  commonly  used  at  the  raising  of  build- 
ings. If  the  raising  was  finished  before  night,  the 
men  amused  themselves  with  wrestling,  goal,  and 
coits.  Goal  was  the  favorite  game  of  the  boys  after 
thanksgiving  and  Flection  days,  the  only  holidays 
which  I  remember. 


222  Colonial  Schools  [No.  si 

8  i.     From  Childhood  to  College 

By  Samuel  Kneeland  (about  1750) 

The  most  remarkable  thing  in  my  childhood  was  a 
wonderful  talent  which  I  possessed  to  imitate  any- 
thing that  I  saw  or  heard.  I  could  grunt  like  a  hog, 
roar  like  a  lion,  or  bellow  like  a  bull.  I  was  once 
very  near  being  worried  by  a  pack  of  rascally  dogs, 
who  took  me  for  a  fox,  I  deceived  their  ears  with  so 
natural  a  squeal.  I  was  a  particular  favorite  of  all 
the  hens  in  the  neighborhood  ;  I  rivalled  the  cock 
with  a  crow  as  exquisite  as  it  was  inimitable.  I  will 
add  for  the  satisfaction  of  my  enemies,  that  when 
I  hoot  they  would  infallibly  take  me  for  an  owl. 
Also  on  occasion,  I  can  bray  so  very  advantageously, 
that  few  donkeys  can  go  beyond  me. 

Nay,  to  such  a  perfection  am  I  now  arrived  in  the 
art  of  mimicry,  that  I  am  able  not  only  to  make  any 
sound  that  I  hear,  but  I  have  a  faculty  of  looking  like 
anybody  I  think  fit.  There  is  no  person  whom  I 
have  ever  seen,  but  I  can  immediately  throw  all  his 
features  into  my  face,  assume  his  air  and  monopolize 
his  whole  countenance.  I  remember  when  I  was  a 
school-boy  my  master  once  gave  me  an  unlucky  rap 
on  my  pate,  for  a  fault  committed  by  Giles  Horror, 
whose  visage  I  had  at  that  time  most  unfortunately 
put  on.  Esau  Absent  may  remember  to  this  day,  if 
he  is  living,  how  his  mother  took  me  for  him,  when  I 
marched  off  in  triumph,  with  a  huge  lunch  of  bread 
and  butter,  that  was  just  spread  for  Esau's  dinner. 

When  I  was  three  years  old,  I  was  sent  to  school 
to  a  mistress,  where  I  learned  to  read  with  great  dis- 
patch ;  in  my  fifth  year,  I  was  taken  away  and  put  to 


A   COLONIAL  SCHOOL-GIRL    (MISTRESS   CAMPION). 


2  24 


Colonial  Schools 


[No.  82 


a  writing  master.  In  my  seventh  year  I  could  flour- 
ish a  tolerable  hand,  and  began  my  grammar.  By  the 
time  that  I  was  fourteen,  I  was  considerably  profi- 
cient in  the  Latin  and  Greek  languages,  and  was 
admitted  into  Harvard   College. 


Fithian  was  a 
graduate  of 
Princeton 
College  who 
went  down 
to  Virginia 
to  be  the 
tutor  of  the 
children  of 
the  wealthy 
Carter 
family,  at 
their  estate 
called  Nom- 
ini  Hall. 


Horse  races 
were  the 
favorite 
amusement 
of  the  time  in 
the  southern 
colonies,  and 
were  usually 
followed  by  a 
ball  called 
the  Assem- 
bly. 


82.    A  Tutor  and  his  Pupils 

By  Philip  Fithian  (i 773-1 774) 

Monday,  November  1.  We  began  school.  The 
school  consists  of  eight.  Two  of  Mr.  Carters  sons, 
one  nephew,  and  five  daughters.  The  eldest  son  is 
reading  Sallust ;  grammatical  exercises,  and  Latin 
grammar.  The  second  son  is  reading  English  gram- 
mar, and  reading  English  writing,  and  ciphering  in 
subtraction.  The  nephew  is  reading  and  writing  as 
above ;  and  ciphering  in  reduction.  The  eldest 
daughter  is  reading  the  Spectator,  writing,  and  be- 
ginning to  cipher.  The  second  is  reading  now  out  of 
the  spelling-book,  and  beginning  to  write.  The  next 
is  reading  in  the  spelling-book.  The  fourth  is  spell- 
ing in  the  beginning  of  the  spelling-book.  And  the 
last  is  beginning  her  letters. 

Thursday,  November  25.  Rode  this  morning  to 
Richmond  Courthouse,  where  two  horses  ran  for  a 
purse  of  500  pounds :  besides  small  bets  almost  in- 
numerable. One  of  the  horses  belonged  to  Colonel 
John  Tayloe,  and  is  called  Yorick ;  the  other  to  Dr. 
Flood,  and  is  called  Gift.  The  Assembly  was  re- 
markably numerous ;  beyond  my  expectation  and 
exceedingly  polite  in  general.  The  horses  started 
precisely  at  five  minutes  after  three  ;  the  course  was 


no.  82]         A   Virginia    Tutor  225 

one  mile  in  circumference,  they  performed  the  first 
round  in  two  minutes,  the  third  in  two  minutes 
and  a  half.  Yorick  came  out  the  fifth  time  round 
about  40  rods  ahead  of  Gift ;  both  horses,  when  the 
riders  dismounted  proved  very  lame ;  they  ran  five 
miles,  and  carried  180  pounds. 

Almost  every  lady  wears  a  red  cloak ;  and  when 
they  ride  out  they  tie  a  red  handkerchief  over  their 
head  and  face,  so  that  when  I  first  came  into  Virginia, 
I  was  distressed  whenever  I  saw  a  lady,  for  I  thought 
she  had  the  toothache.  The  people  are  extremely 
hospitable,  and  very  polite,  both  of  which  are  most 
certainly  universal  characteristics  of  the  gentlemen 
in  Virginia.  Some  swear  bitterly,  but  the  practice 
seems  to  be  generally  disapproved.  I  have  heard 
that  this  country  is  notorious  for  gaming ;  however 
that  may  be,  I  have  not  seen  a  pack  of  cards,  nor  a 
die,  since  I  left  home,  nor  gaming  nor  betting  of  any 
kind  except  at  the  Richmond-race.  Almost  every 
gentleman  of  condition,  keeps  a  chariot  and  four ; 
many  drive  with  six  horses.  I  observe  that  all  the 
merchants  and  shopkeepers  in  the  sphere  of  my 
acquaintance  are  young  Scotchmen,  several  of  whom 
I  know.  It  has  been  the  custom  heretofore  to  have 
all  their  tutors,  and  schoolmasters  from  Scotland, 
tho'  they  begin  to  be  willing  to  employ  their  own 
countrymen. 

In  the  evening  Ben  Carter  and  myself  had  a  long 
dispute  on  the  practice  of  fighting.  He  thinks  it 
best  for  two  persons  who  have  any  dispute  to  go 
out  in  good-humour  and  fight  manfully,  and  says  that 
they  will  be  sooner  and  longer  friends  than  to  brood 
and  harbour  malice.  Mr.  Carter  is  practising  this 
evening    on    the    eruitar.       He    has    here   at   home  a 


226  Colonial  Schools  [No.  82 

harpsichord,  forte-piano,  harmonica,  guitar,  violin, 
and  German  flutes,  and  at  Williamsburg,  he  has  a 
good  pipe  organ. 

In  the  morning  so  soon  as  it  is  light  a  boy  knocks 
at  my  door  to  make  a  fire  ;  after  the  fire  is  kindled,  I 
rise  which  now  in  the  winter  is  commonly  by  seven, 
or  a  little  after.  By  the  time  I  am  drest  the  children 
commonly  enter  the  school-room,  which  is  under  the 
room  I  sleep  in  ;  I  hear  them  round  one  lesson,  when 
the  bell  rings  for  eight  o-clock  (for  Mr.  Carter  has  a 
large  good  bell  which  may  be  heard  some  miles,  and 
this  is  always  rung  at  meal  times;)  the  children  then 
go  out ;  and  at  half  after  eight  the  bell  rings  for 
breakfast,  we  then  repair  to  the  dining-room  ;  after 
breakfast,  which  is  generally  about  half  after  nine, 
we  go  into  school,  and  sit  till  twelve,  when  the  bell 
rings,  and  they  go  out  for  noon  ;  the  dinner-bell  rings 
commonly  about  half  after  two,  often  at  three,  but 
never  before  two.  After  dinner  is  over,  which  in  com- 
mon, when  we  have  no  company,  is  about  half  after 
three  we  go  into  school,  and  sit  til  the  bell  rings  at 
five,  when  they  separate  til  the  next  morning.  We 
go  into  supper  commonly  about  half  after  eight  or  at 
nine  and  I  usually  go  to  bed  between  ten  and  eleven. 

Saturday,  December  18.  After  breakfast,  we  all 
retired  into  the  dancing  room,  and  after  the  scholars 
had  their  lesson  singly  round  Mr.  Christian,  very 
politely,  requested  me  to  step  a  minuet ;  I  excused 
myself,  however,  but  signified  my  peculiar  pleasure 
in  the  accuracy  of  their  performance.  There  were 
several  minuets  danced  with  great  ease  and  propriety  ; 
after  which  the  whole  company  joined  in  country- 
dances,  and  it  was  indeed  beautiful  to  admiration,  to 
see  such  a  number  of  young  persons,  set  off  by  dress 


no.  82]         A   Virginia    Tutor  227 

to  the  best  advantage,  moving  easily,  to  the  sound  of 
well  performed  music,   and  with    perfect  regularity, 


IN    A    LIBRARY. 


tho'  apparently  in  the  utmost  disorder.  The  dance 
continued  till  two,  we  dined  at  half  alter  three. 
Soon  after  dinner  we  repaired  to  the  dancing-room 


228  Colonial  Schools  [No.  82 

again ;  I  observe  in  the  course  of  the  lessons,  that 
Mr.  Christian  is  punctual,  and  rigid  in  his  discipline, 
so  strict  indeed  that  he  struck  two  of  the  young 
Misses  for  a  fault  in  the  course  of  their  perform- 
ance, even  in  the  presence  of  the  mother  of  one  of 
them !  And  he  rebuked  one  of  the  young  fellows 
so  highly  as  to  tell  him  he  must  alter  his  manner, 
which  he  had  observed  through  the  course  of  the 
dance,  to  be  insolent,  and  wanton,  or  else  absent 
himself  from  the  school.  I  thought  this  a  sharp 
reproof  to  a  young  gentleman  of  seventeen,  before  a 
large  number  of  ladies  !  Nothing  is  now  to  be  heard 
of  in  conversation,  but  the  balls,  the  fox-hunts,  the 
fine  entertainments,  and  the  good  fellowship,  which 
are  to  be  exhibited  at  the  approaching  Christmas. 
Mr.  Goodlet  was  barred  out  of  his  school  last  Mon- 
day by  his  scholars,  for  Christmas  holidays,  which 
are  to  continue  till  twelfth-day  ;  but  my  scholars  are 
of  a  more  quiet  nature,  and  have  consented  to  have 
four  or  five  days  now,  and  to  have  their  full  holiday 
in  May  next,  when  I  propose  by  the  permission  of 
Providence  to  go  home,  where  I  hope  to  see  the 
good  and  benevolent  Laura. 

When  the  candles  were  lighted,  we  all  repaired,  for 
the  last  time,  into  the  dancing-room  ;  first  each  couple 
danced  a  minuet;  then  all  joined  as  before  in  the 
country  dances,  these  continued  till  half  after  seven 
when  at  the  proposal  of  several,  we  played  Button,  to 
get  pawns  for  redemption  ;  here  I  could  join  with 
them,  and  indeed  it  was  carried  on  with  sprightliness, 
and  decency  ;  in  the  course  of  redeeming  my  pawns 
I  had  several  kisses  of  the  ladies  !  Half  after  eight 
we  were  rung  in  to  supper.  The  room  looked  lumi- 
nous and  splendid ;  four  very  large  candles  burning  on 


no.  82]  Christmas  229 

the  table  where  we  supped ;  three  others  in  different 
parts  of  the  room ;  a  gay,  sociable  assembly,  and  four 
well  instructed  waiters  !  So  soon  as  we  rose  from 
supper,  the  company  formed  into  a  semicircle  round 
the  fire,  and  Mr.  Lee,  by  the  voice  of  the  Company 
was  chosen  Pope,  and  the  rest  of  the  company  were 
appointed  Friars,  in  the  Play  called  "  Break  the  Pope's 
Neck."  Here  we  had  great  diversion  in  the  respective 
judgments  upon  offenders,  but  we  were  all  dismissed 
by  ten,  and  retired  to  our  several  rooms. 

Saturday,  December  25.  I  was  waked  this  morn- 
ing by  guns  fired  all  round  the  house.  The  morning 
is  stormy,  the  wind  at  south  east  and  it  rains  hard. 
Nelson  the  boy  who  makes  my  fire,  blacks  my  shoes, 
does  errands,  &c.  was  early  in  my  room.  He  made 
me  a  vast  fire,  blacked  my  shoes,  set  my  room  in 
order,  and  wished  me  a  joyful  Christmas,  for  which 
I  gave  him  half  a  bit.  Soon  after  he  left  the  room,  Half  a  bit 
and    before  I  was  drest,  the  fellow  who  makes  the   about  ten 

.  cents. 

fire  in  our  school  room,  dressed  very  neatly  in  green, 
but  almost  drunk,  entered  my  chamber  with  three 
or  four  profound  bows,  and  made  me  the  same  saluta- 
tion ;  I  gave  him  a  bit,  and  dismissed  him  as  soon  as 
possible.  Soon  after  my  clothes  and  linen  were  sent 
in  with  a  message  for  a  Christmas  box,  as  they  call 
it;  I  sent  the  poor  slave  a  bit,  and  my  thanks.  I 
was  obliged  for  want  of  small  change,  to  put  off  for 
some  days  the  barber  who  shaves  and  dresses  me. 

There  were  at  table  Mrs.  Carter  and  her  five 
daughters  that  are  at  school  with  me  —  Miss  Pris- 
cilla,  Nancy,  Fanny,  Betsy,  and  Harriot,  five  as  beau- 
tiful delicate,  well-instructed  children  as  I  have 
ever  known!  Ben  is  abroad;  Bob  and  Harry  are 
out. 


230  Colonial  Schools  [No.  82 

Ben,  the  eldest,  is  a  youth  of  genius:  of  warm  im- 
petuous disposition  ;  desirous  of  acquiring  knowledge, 
docile,  vastly  inquisitive  and  curious  in  mercantile, 
and  mechanical  matters,  very  fond  of  horses  and 
takes  great  pleasure  in   exercising  them. 

Bob,  the  other  brother,  is  by  no  means  destitute  of 
capacity.  He  is  extremely  volatile  and  unsettled  in 
his  temper,  which  makes  it  almost  wholly  impossible 
to  fix  him  for  any  time  to  the  same  thing,  on  which 
account  he  has  made  but  very  little  advancement  in 
any  one  branch  of  study,  and  this  is  attributed  to 
barrenness  of  genius.  He  is  slovenly,  clumsy,  very 
fond  of  shooting,  of  dogs,  and  of  horses,  but  a  very 
stiff  rider,  good  natured,  pleased  with  the  society  of 
persons  much  below  his  family,  and  estate  and  tho' 
quick  and  wrathful  in  his  temper,  yet  he  is  soon  mod- 
erated, and  easily  subdued. 

Harry,  the  nephew,  is  rather  sullen  in  his  make. 
He  is  obstinate,  tho'  steady,  and  makes  a  slow  uni- 
form advance  in  his  learning,  he  is  vastly  kind  to 
me,  but  in  particular  to  my  horse. 

Miss  Priscilla,  the  eldest  daughter,  about  16  years 
old,  is  steady,  studious,  docile,  quick  of  apprehension, 
and  makes  good  progress  in  what  she  undertakes ; 
she  is  small  of  her  age,  has  a  mild  winning  presence, 
a  sweet  obliging  temper,  never  swears,  which  is  here 
a  distinguished  virtue,  dances  finely,  plays  well  on 
keyed  instruments,  and  is  on  the  whole  in  the  first 
class  of  the  female  sex. 

Nancy,  the  second,  is  not  without  some  few  of  those 
qualities  which  are  by  some  (I  think  with  great  ill- 
nature,  and  with  little  or  no  truth)  said  to  belong 
intirely  to  the  fair  sex.  I  mean  great  curiosity, 
eagerness   for   superiority,   ardor    in    friendship,    but 


No.   82] 


Young  People 


231 


bitterness  and  rage  where  there  is  enmity.  She  is 
not  constant  in  her  disposition,  nor  diligent  nor 
attentive  to  her  business.  But  she  has  her  excellen- 
cies ;    she  is  cheerful,  tender  in   her  temper,   easily 


SCHOOL    DAYS. 


managed  by  perswasion,  and  is  never  without  what 
seems  to  have  been  a  common  gift  of  Heaven  to  the 
fair-sex,  readiness  of  expression  ! 

Fanny,  the  next,  is  in  her  person,  according  to  my 
judgment  the  flower  of  the  family.  She  has  a  strong 
resemblance  to  her  Mamma,  who  is  an  elegant,  beau- 
tiful woman.      Miss  Fanny  seems  to  have  a  remark- 


232 


Colonial  Schools 


[No.  83 


able  sedateness,  and  simplicity  in  her  countenance, 
which  is  always  rather  cheerful  than  melancholy ; 
she  has  nothing  with  which  we  can  find  fault  in  her 
person,  but  has  something  in  the  features  of  her  face 
which  insensibly  pleases  us,  and  always  when  she  is 
in  sight  draws  our  attention,  and  much  the  more  be- 
cause there  seems  to  be  for  every  agreeable  feature  a 
corresponding  action  which  improves  and  adorns  it. 

Betsy,  the  next,  is  young,  quiet,  and  obedient. 

Harriet  is  bold,  fearless,  noisy  and  lawless ;  always 
merry,  almost  never  displeased ;  she  seems  to  have 
a  heart  easily  moved  by  the  force  of  music ;  she  has 
learned  many  tunes  and  can  strike  any  note,  or  succes- 
sion of  notes  perfectly  with  the  flute  or  harpsichord, 
and  is  never  wearied  with  the  sound  of  music  either 
vocal  or  instrumental. 

These  are  the  persons  who  are  at  present  under 
my  direction,  and  whose  general  character  I  have 
very  imperfectly  attempted  to  describe. 


This  extract 
is  a  good- 
natured 
piece  of  fun 
at  the  ex- 
pense of  the 
college  pro- 
fessors of  the 
time. 


83.    A  Mock  Examination 

By  Francis  Hopkinson  (1784) 

Metaphysics 

Professor.    What  is  a  salt-box  ? 

Student.    It  is  a  box  made  to  contain  salt. 

Prof.    How  is  it  divided  ? 

Stu.    Into  a  salt-box,  and  a  box  of  salt. 

Prof.    Very  well !  —  show  the  distinction. 

Stu.  A  salt-box  may  be  where  there  is  no  salt ; 
but  salt  is  absolutely  necessary  to  the  existence  of  a 
box  of  salt. 


no.  83]      _A  Mock  Examination        233 

Prof.    Are  not  salt-boxes  otherwise  divided  ? 

Stu.    Yes  :  by  a  partition. 

Prof.    What  is  the  use  of  this  partition  ? 

Stu.    To  separate  the  coarse  salt  from  the  fine. 

Prof.    How  ?  —  think  a  little. 

Stu.    To  separate  the  fine  salt  from  the  coarse. 

Prof.  To  be  sure  :  —  it  is  to  separate  the  fine 
from  the  coarse  :  but  are  not  salt-boxes  yet  otherwise 
distinguished  ? 

Stu.    Yes  :  into  possible,  probable,  and  positive. 

Prof.    Define  these  several  kinds  of  salt-boxes. 

Stu.  A  possible  salt-box  is  a  salt-box  yet  unsold  in 
the  hands  of  the  joiner. 

Prof.    Why  so  ? 

Stu.  Because  it  hath  never  yet  become  a  salt-box 
in  fact,  having. never  had  any  salt  in  it;  and  it  may  pos- 
sibly be  applied  to  some  other  use. 

Prof.  Very  true  :  —  for  a  salt-box  which  never 
had,  hath  not  now,  and  perhaps  never  may  have, 
any  salt  in  it,  can  only  be  termed  a  possible  salt-box. 
What  is  a  probable  salt-box  ? 

Stu.  It  is  a  salt-box  in  the  hand  of  one  going  to  a 
shop  to  buy  salt,  and  who  hath  six-pence  in  his  pocket 
to  pay  the  grocer  :  and  a  positive  salt-box  is  one  which 
hath  actually  got  salt  in  it. 

Prof.  Very  good:  —  but  is  there  no  instance  of 
a  positive  salt-box  which  hath  no  salt  in  it  ? 

Stu.    I  know  of  none. 

Prof.  Yes  :  there  is  one  mentioned  by  some  au- 
thors :  it  is  where  a  box  hath  by  long  use  been  so 
impregnated  with  salt,  that  although  all  the  salt  hath 
been  long  since  emptied  out,  it  may  yet  he  called  a 
salt-box,  with  the  same  propriety  that  we  say  a  salt 
herring,  salt  beef,  &c. 


Source  Book  of  American  History 

FOR  SCHOOLS   AND    READERS 

Edited  bv  Albert  Bushnell  Hart,  Ph.D. 

Author  of  "  American  History  told  by  Contemporaries^'  etc. 


Cloth.        i2mo.        60  cents,  net 


"  The  book,  as  the  author  intends,  is  abundantly  suggestive.  But  at  the 
same  time  it  is  in  its  facts  good  history,  and  so  skilfully  and  admirauly 
arranged  as  to  arouse  in  every  young  reader  a  desire  for  wider  reading  upon 
the  interesting  themes  broached.  To  the  teacher  well  up  in  history  it  will  be 
found  a  rich  mine  of  thought."  —  Chicago  Inter-Ocean. 

"  A  fine  piece  of  historical  work,  grouping  extracts  from  trustworthy  rec- 
ords, and  with  some  facsimile  illustrations,  with  the  object  of  showing  whence 
our  knowledge  of  history  is  derived,  how  it  is  obtained,  and  what  the  proper 
use  of  material  for  history  is  when  discovered.  It  is  admirably  adapted  to 
give  as  ample  a  knowledge  as  can  be  furnished  consistently  with  the  inevi- 
table limitations  of  such  a  work." —  The  Congregationalism 

"  A  volume  that  we  have  examined  with  close  attention  and  can  commend 
with  confidence.  In  about  four  hundred  pages  of  text,  it  finds  room  for  some- 
thing like  one  hundred  and  fifty  examples  of  the  original  material  of  our  his- 
tory from  the  voyages  of  Columbus  to  the  Spanish-American  War.  The 
selections  are  judiciously  made,  edited,  and  annotated;  the  introductory  chap- 
ters for  teachers  are  of  the  most  helpful  sort;  and  the  book  is  sold  at  so  low  a 
price  that  no  secondary  school  in  which  American  history  is  taught  can  find  a 
reasonable  excuse  for  not  employing  it  as  an  adjunct  to  the  regular  manual." 

—  The  Dial. 


THE  MACMILLAN  COMPANY 

66   FIFTH   AVENUE,   NEW   YORK 

BOSTON  CHICAGO  SAN   FRANCISCO  ATLANTA 

100  Boylston  St.      378  Wabash  Ave.      319-325  Sans6me  St.       135  Whitehall  St. 


A  Short  History  of  the  United  States 

FOR    GRAMMAR    GRADES 

By  Edward  Channing 

Author  of  "A  Student's  History  of  the  United  States,"  etc. 


Half  leather.         i2tno.        90  cents,  net 


COMMENTS 

J.  A.  TUTTLE,  Superintendent  of  Schools,  Boothbay  Harbor,  Me. 

"  I  am  much  pleased  with  its  contents  and  arrangement.  The  essentials 
are  there  in  language  the  average  child  can  understand.  The  convenient  ref- 
erences to  other  books  is  an  improvement  the  wide-awake  teacher  will  appre 
date." 

LEWIS  E.  FUNNELL,  Principal  Elm  Street  School,  Stamford,  Conn. 

"  I  am  delighted  with  Channing's  Short  History.  It  is  admirably  adapted  to 
the  needs  of  the  highest  grammar  grades.  In  this  presentation  of  our  country's 
history  are  combined  the  broad  scholarship  of  the  university  professor  and  the 
skill  of  the  grammar  school  teacher.     Altogether  it  is  an  ideal  text-book." 

N.  G.  KINGSLEY,  Principal  Doyle-Avenue  Grammar  School,  Providence,  R.I. 

"  It  is  an  admirable  presentation  of  the  origin  and  growth  of  our 
nation,  from  cover  to  cover  it  is  made  intensely  interesting,  not  only  by 
striking  illustrations  and  complete  maps,  but  by  the  arrangement  of  the  text 
and  the  facts  presented  in  a  clear,  logical  manner.  The  references  to 
other  text-books  in  history  is  a  commendable  feature.  I  fully  agree  with  the 
author's  statement  in  the  preface  as  to  the  best  method  of  studying  the  history 
of  our  country." 

G.  H.  KNOWLTON,  Superintendent  of  Schools,  Swansea,  Seekonk,  and  Free- 
town, Mass. 

"It  is  desirable  on  account  of  its  brevity;  its  marginal  references  to  other 
books  is  an  excellent  feature;  the  maps  are  good;  and  I  like  the  use  of  chap- 
ters rather  than  sharply  marked  divisions  by  administrations." 


PUBLISHED    BY 

THE  MACMILLAN  COMPANY 

66   FIFTH  AVENUE,   NEW   YORK 

BOSTON  CHICAGO  SAN  FRANCISCO  ATLANTA 

100  Boylston  St.      378  Wabash  Ave.    319-325  Sansome  St.       135  Whitehall  St. 


w 


i 

■III    llllillllillil! 


